703800

Mercedes AMG GT 2020 Handleiding

447
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/458
Pagina verder
Digital – in the vehicleVehicle document walletDigital – on the InternetDigital – as an App
Familiarize yourself with the con‐
tents of the Operator's Manual
directly via the vehicle's multi‐
media system (menu item "Vehi‐
cle"). Start with the quick guide,
discover your vehicle's highlights
or broaden your knowledge with
useful tips.
Here you can find comprehen‐
sive information about operating
your vehicle and about services
and warranties in printed form.
You can find the Operator's Man‐
ual on the Mercedes-Benz home‐
page.
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App
is available free-of-charge in
familiar App stores.
É1905848905=ËÍ
1905848905
Apple
®
iOS Android
TM
Order no. P190 0530 13 Part no. 190 584 89 05
Edition C2020
Mercedes-AMG GT
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-AMG GT
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Documentation team
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with‐
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrasse 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
Example
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
if the front-passenger airbag is enabled
If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled,
a child on the front-passenger seat may be
struck by the front-passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
As at 11.11.18
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-AMG
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer
operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐
tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to
damage to the vehicle or injury to people.
Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre‐
gard of the instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may vary according to:
R
Model
R
Order
R
National version
R
Availability
Mercedes-AMG reserves the right to introduce
changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐
fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
R
Digital Operator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of
the documents on to the new owner.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
1905848905
1905848905
Symbols ........................................................ 5
At a glance .................................................... 6
Cockpit ........................................................... 6
Warning and indicator lamps .......................... 8
Overhead control panel ................................ 10
Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 12
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 14
Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 16
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 16
General notes ............................................. 17
Protecting the environment .......................... 17
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... 17
Operator's Manual ........................................18
Service and vehicle operation ....................... 19
Operating safety ...........................................20
Declaration of conformity for wireless
vehicle components ...................................... 21
Diagnostics connection ................................ 21
Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 22
Correct use of the vehicle ............................23
Problems with your vehicle ........................... 23
Reporting safety defects ...............................23
Limited Warranty .......................................... 24
QR code for rescue card ...............................24
Data storage .................................................24
Copyright ...................................................... 27
Occupant safety ......................................... 29
Restraint system ...........................................29
Seat belts ..................................................... 31
Airbags ......................................................... 36
PRE-SAFE
®
system ....................................... 43
Safely transporting children in the vehi‐
cle ................................................................44
Notes on pets in the vehicle .........................50
Opening and closing .................................. 52
SmartKey ...................................................... 52
Doors ............................................................ 57
Cargo compartment ...................................... 61
Side windows ............................................... 64
Roller sun blinds ...........................................68
Anti-theft protection .....................................68
Seats and stowing ..................................... 70
Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐
tion ............................................................... 70
Seats ............................................................ 70
Steering wheel ..............................................76
Easy entry and exit feature ...........................78
Operating the memory function .................... 79
Stowage areas .............................................. 80
Cup holder .................................................... 84
Ashtray and cigarette lighter ........................ 85
Sockets ......................................................... 86
Installing/removing the floor mats ............... 87
Light and visibility ..................................... 89
Exterior lighting ............................................ 89
Interior lighting ............................................. 93
Windshield wiper and windshield washer
system ..........................................................94
Mirrors .......................................................... 95
Operating the sun visors ...............................98
Climate control .......................................... 99
Overview of climate control systems ............ 99
Operating the climate control system ........... 99
2
Contents
Driving and parking ................................. 102
Driving ........................................................ 102
Race track operation ................................... 110
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................113
Automatic transmission .............................. 116
Refueling ..................................................... 120
Parking .......................................................122
Driving and driving safety systems .............130
Vehicle towing instructions .........................160
Instrument Display and on-board
computer ................................................... 161
Instrument Display overview .......................161
Overview of the buttons on the steering
wheel ..........................................................162
Operating the on-board computer .............. 162
Setting the design ....................................... 164
Setting the area for additional values .........164
Overview of displays on the multifunc‐
tion display .................................................165
Adjusting the instrument lighting ................165
Menus and submenus ................................. 165
Voice Control System ............................... 175
Notes on operating safety ...........................175
Operation ....................................................176
Using the Voice Control System effec‐
tively ........................................................... 177
Essential voice commands .......................... 178
Multimedia system .................................. 189
Overview and operation .............................. 189
System settings .......................................... 198
AMG TRACK PACE ...................................... 208
Navigation ................................................... 213
Telephone ...................................................237
Online and Internet functions ..................... 259
Media ......................................................... 265
Radio .......................................................... 277
Sound ......................................................... 284
Maintenance and care ............................. 287
ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 287
Engine compartment .................................. 288
Cleaning and care .......................................294
Breakdown assistance ............................ 303
Emergency .................................................. 303
Flat tire ....................................................... 303
Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 309
Tow starting or towing away ........................ 315
Electrical fuses ............................................ 319
Wheels and tires ...................................... 321
Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐
acteristics ...................................................321
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tires ............................................................ 321
Notes on snow chains ................................ 322
Tire pressure .............................................. 322
Loading the vehicle .................................... 329
Tire labeling ................................................ 333
Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 338
Changing a wheel ....................................... 341
Technical data .......................................... 351
Notes on technical data .............................. 351
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
engine number ............................................ 351
Operating fluids .......................................... 353
Contents
3
Vehicle data ................................................ 359
Display messages and warning/indi‐
cator lamps .............................................. 362
Display messages .......................................362
Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 405
Index ......................................................... 422
4
Contents
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐
lowing symbols:
&
DANGER Danger due to not observing
the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐
ards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
#
Observe the warning notices.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe envi‐
ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐
ronmentally responsible disposal.
#
Observe environmental notes.
*
NOTE Damage to property due to failure
to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of
risks which may lead to your vehicle being
damaged.
#
Observe notes on material damage.
%
Useful instructions or further information
that could be helpful to you.
X
Instruction
(Q page)
Further information on a topic
Display
Information on the multifunction dis‐
play/media display
+
Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
*
Corresponding submenus, which are
to be selected in the multimedia sys‐
tem
*Marks a cause
Symbols
5
Left-hand drive vehicles
6
At a glance – Cockpit
1
Steering wheel paddle shifters
→
118
2
Combination switch
→
90
3
Media display
→
189
4
Glove box
→
82
5
Start/stop button
→
103
6
Climate control systems
→
99
7
Touchpad
→
189
8
Control knob for volume and switching sound
on/off
→
189
Switches the multimedia system on/off
→
189
9
ECO start/stop function
→
108
A
Extends and retracts the rear wing
→
147
B
AMG Performance exhaust system
→
109
C
AMG E-SELECT selector lever
→
116
D
Activates/deactivates ESP
®
→
132
E
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
→
148
F
Manual gearshifting
→
118
G
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
→
113
H
Stowage compartment
→
81
I
Control panel for the multimedia system
(steering wheel)
→
162
J
AMG steering-wheel buttons
→
146
K
Adjusts the steering wheel
→
77
L
Control panel for the on-board computer
→
162
Operates cruise control
→
138
Operates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
→
141
M
Diagnostics connection
→
21
N
Opens the hood
→
288
O
Opens the tailgate
→
61
P
Electric parking brake
→
128
Q
Light switch
→
89
At a glance – Cockpit
7
Instrument Display
8
At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps
1
Speedometer
→
161
2
#! Turn signal lights
→
90
3
Multifunction display
→
165
4
R Rear fog light
→
90
5
K High beam
→
90
L Low beam
→
89
T Parking lights
→
89
6
Ö Rear wing
→
147
7
Tachometer
→
161
8
? Coolant too hot/cold
→
416
9
Coolant temperature display
→
161
A
L Distance warning
→
415
B
ü Seat belt not fastened
→
414
C
h Tire pressure monitor
→
419
D
Ù Electric power steering malfunction
→
420
E
! Electric parking brake (yellow)
→
407
F
Electric parking brake applied (red)
→
407
F USA only
! Canada only
G
6 Restraint system
→
407
H
Brakes (red)
→
407
$ USA only
J Canada only
I
8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
indicator
→
416
J
Fuel level indicator
K
ä AMG adaptive sport suspension system
→
415
L
# Electrical malfunction
→
416
M
; Check Engine
→
416
N
Æ ESP SPORT
→
407
O
! ABS malfunction
→
407
P
å ESP
®
OFF
→
407
At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps
9
10
At a glance – Overhead control panel
1
Sun visors
→
98
2
Switches the seat heating on/off
→
75
3
Switches the seat ventilation on/off
→
76
4
Front camera
→
152
5
Hazard warning lamps
→
91
6
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
→
149
7
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
→
41
8
| Switches automatic light control on/off
→
93
9
p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
→
93
A
MB Info call button (Mercedes me connect)
→
253
B
Inside rearview mirror
→
96
C
SOS emergency call system (Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system)
→
256
D
Breakdown assistance call button (Mercedes
me connect)
→
253
E
p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
→
93
F
c Switches the interior lighting on/off
→
93
G
u Switches the cargo compartment lamp
on/off
→
93
At a glance – Overhead control panel
11
12
At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
1
Opens the door
→
57
2
&%Locks/unlocks the vehicle
→
57
3
Operates the outside mirrors
→
95
4
W Opens/closes the right side window
→
64
5
W Opens/closes the left side window
→
64
6
Adjusting the head restraints
→
74
7
Adjusts the front seat mechanically
→
70
8
Operates the memory function
→
79
9
Sets the seat fore-and-aft position
→
72
A
Adjusts the seat cushion inclination
→
72
B
Adjusts the seat height
→
72
C
Adjusts the seat backrest inclination
→
72
D
Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support
→
73
At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
13
14
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
1
QR code for accessing the rescue card
→
24
2
Safety vests
→
303
3
Hazard warning lamps
→
91
4
Buttons for the SOS emergency call system
and breakdown assistance
→
256
5
Checking and adding operating fluids
→
353
6
Tow-starting and towing away
→
315
7
Starting assistance
→
313
8
Flat tire
→
303
9
Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire
pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing
the rescue card
→
120
A
TIREFIT kit
→
305
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
15
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
Õ Operator's Manual
#
Select a menu item.
In addition, you can also call up the Operator's
Manual within a main function (e.g. via Media
Info).
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the
function and operation of the vehicle and the
multimedia system.
For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐
ual is deactivated while driving.
The Digital Operator's Manual contains the fol‐
lowing menu items:
R
Search: allows you to search precisely for
keywords.
R
Quick start: provides you with important
information so that you can start using your
vehicle immediately.
R
Tips: provides tips on how to use your vehicle
in certain situations.
R
Messages: provides you with further informa‐
tion about the messages in the instrument
cluster.
R
Bookmarks: provides you with a list of all the
bookmarks you have stored yourself.
1
Picture
2
Menu
3
Navigation window
Some sections of the Digital Operator's Manual,
such as warnings, can be made visible by high‐
lighting and pressing them.
%
The Operator's Manual can also be found in
the Mercedes-Benz Guides app in all com‐
mon app stores.
16
Digital Operator's Manual
Protecting the environment
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and
personal driving style
The pollutant emission of your vehicle is
directly related to the way you operate your
vehicle.
Help to protect the environment by operating
your vehicle in an environmentally responsi‐
ble manner. Please observe the following rec‐
ommendations on operating conditions and
personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
#
Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐
rect.
#
Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no
longer need them).
#
Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
ute to environmental protection.
#
Always have maintenance work carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
#
Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
#
Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary.
#
Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front.
#
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking.
#
Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum
engine speed.
#
Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐
fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop
function.
#
Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO
display for a fuel-efficient driving style.
Environmental issues and recommendations:
It is recommended that you re-use or recycle
materials instead of just disposing of them.
The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐
lations serve to protect the environment and
must be strictly observed.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by not using recycled
reconditioned components
Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned
components and parts with the same quality
as new parts. The same entitlement from the
Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts.
#
Use recycled reconditioned compo‐
nents and parts from Daimler AG.
General notes
17
*
NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐
ciency of the restraint systems from
installing accessory parts or from repairs
or welding
Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices,
as well as control units and sensors for the
restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐
lowing areas of your vehicle:
R
Doors
R
Door pillars
R
Door sills
R
Seats
R
Cockpit
R
Instrument cluster
R
Center console
R
Lateral roof frame
#
Do not install accessory parts such as
audio systems in these areas.
#
Do not carry out repairs or welding.
#
Have aftermarket installation of acces‐
sories carried out at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your
vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well
as accessories relevant to safety which have not
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐
vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐
function. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels
and accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts are subject to
strict quality control. Each part has been spe‐
cially developed, manufactured or selected for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them.
Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz
Genuine Parts are available for Mercedes-Benz
models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
a supply of Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers pro‐
vide for quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) (/ page 351) when ordering Mercedes-
Benz Genuine Parts.
Operator's Manual
This Operator's Manual describes all models and
all standard and optional equipment available for
your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐
ual going to press. Country-specific differences
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This is also
the case for systems and functions relevant to
safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle
may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle
contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐
cle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
18
General notes
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept in
the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
the following points:
R
service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately.
R
unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐
cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
R
the fuel may have an extremely low octane
number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine
damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in
Europe through our European Delivery Program.
For more information, please consult an author‐
ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to
one of the following address:
in the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
in Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance
Your customer advisor confirms the service in
the service report.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐
gram offers technical help in the case of a
breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
You can find further information in the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the maintenance and warranty infor‐
mation booklet (Canada). You will find both in
the vehicle document wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of address change" in the
Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) on the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We
can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐
sary.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐
ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐
cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of
Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet
or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
General notes
19
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Possible danger due to substances hazard‐
ous to health
In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"),
the following detachable label has been added to
each vehicle sold in California:
Operating safety
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐
functions or system failures
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this could result in malfunctions
or system failures.
#
Always have the prescribed service/
maintenance work as well any required
repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury as
a result of incorrect modifications to
electronic component parts
Modification to electronic components, their
software or wiring could impair their function
and/or the function of other networked com‐
ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant
to safety could also be affected.
As a result, they may no longer function as
intended and/or endanger the operating
safety of the vehicle.
#
Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐
tronic component parts or their soft‐
ware.
#
You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
"Technical data".
&
WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
materials on hot parts of the exhaust
system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system.
#
When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under‐
side.
20
General notes
#
Remove trapped plants or other flam‐
mable material.
#
If there is damage, consult a qualified
specialist workshop immediately.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle
In the following situations, in particular, there
is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
R
The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road
R
The vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐
hole
R
A heavy object strikes the underbody or
chassis components
In situations such as this, the body, the
underbody, chassis components, wheels or
tires could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in this
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
an accident, may not absorb the loads that
arise as intended.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐
mable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can collect between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. These materials may
ignite if they come into contact with hot
parts on the exhaust system.
#
Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
or
#
If driving safety is impaired while con‐
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
the vehicle immediately in accordance
with the traffic conditions, and contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi‐
cle components
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com‐
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: 1) These
devices may not cause harmful interference, and
2) These devices must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or modifications
not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with the Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol‐
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including interfer‐
ence that may cause undesired operation of the
device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
General notes
21
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐
necting devices to the diagnostics con‐
nection
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems.
As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle could be affected.
#
Only connect equipment to a diagnos‐
tics connection in the vehicle which is
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
*
NOTE Battery discharging from using
devices connected to the diagnostics
connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection
drains the battery.
#
Check the charge level of the battery.
#
If the charge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable
distance.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐
mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions inspection during the main
inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
special skills, tools and qualifications to cor‐
rectly carry out the work required on your vehi‐
cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant
works.
For the following, always have your vehicle
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter:
R
safety-relevant works
R
service and maintenance work
R
repair work
R
modifications as well as installations and
conversions
R
work on electronic components
Mercedes‑AMG recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
service center.
22
General notes
Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others
could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave
warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information in particular
when driving your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
technical data for the vehicle
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti‐
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis‐
faction, please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec‐
essary, contact us at one of the following
addresses:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) (inside the USA); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis‐
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash‐
ington, DC 20590, USA.
Further information on vehicle safety can be
found at: http://www.safercar.gov
General notes
23
Limited Warranty
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising
from violation of these operating instruc‐
tions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐
tion of these operating instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
#
Follow the instructions in these operat‐
ing instructions on proper operation of
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐
cle damage.
QR code for rescue card
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and
on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event
of an accident, rescue services can use the QR
code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card
for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐
tains the most important information about your
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the
electric lines.
Further information can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage
Electronic control units
Electronic control units are installed in your vehi‐
cle. Some of these are necessary for the safe
operation of your vehicle, while some assist you
when driving (driver assistance systems). In
addition, your vehicle provides comfort and
entertainment functions, which are also made
possible by electronic control units.
Electronic control units contain data memories
which can temporarily or permanently store
technical information about the vehicle's operat‐
ing state, component loads, maintenance
requirements and technical events or malfunc‐
tions.
In general, this information documents the state
of a component part, a module, a system or the
surroundings such as:
R
Operating status of system components (e.g.
fill levels, battery status, tire pressure)
R
Status messages concerning the vehicle or
its individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel‐
eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas‐
tened seat belts)
R
Malfunctions or faults in important system
components (e.g. lights, brakes)
R
Information on events leading to vehicle
damage
R
System reactions in special driving situations
(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta‐
bility control systems)
R
Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
sensor)
In addition to providing the actual control unit
function, this data assists the manufacturer in
detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti‐
mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this
24
General notes
data is temporary and is only processed in the
vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is
stored in the event or fault memory.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical data
from the vehicle can be read out by service net‐
work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur‐
ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services).
Services include repair services, maintenance
processes, warranty claims and quality assur‐
ance measures, for example. The read out is per‐
formed via the legally prescribed port for the
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The
respective service network locations or third
parties collect, process and use the data. They
document technical statuses of the vehicle,
assist in finding malfunctions and improving
quality and are transmitted to the manufacturer,
if necessary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is
subject to product liability. For this, the manu‐
facturer requires technical data from vehicles.
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a
service outlet as part of repair or maintenance
work.
Depending on the selected equipment, you can
import data into vehicle convenience and info‐
tainment functions yourself.
This includes, for example:
R
Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system
R
Address book data for use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐
grated navigation system
R
Entered navigation destinations
R
Data about the use of Internet services
This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it
is located on a device which you have connected
to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB flash
drive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the
vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data
is sent to third parties only at your request, par‐
ticularly when you use online services in accord‐
ance with the settings that you have selected.
You can store or change convenience settings/
individualization in the vehicle at any time.
Depending on the equipment, this includes, for
example:
R
Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions
R
Suspension and climate control settings
R
Customizations such as interior lighting
If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can
connect your smartphone or another mobile end
device to the vehicle. You can control this by
means of the control elements integrated in the
vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone
can be output via the multimedia system. Cer‐
tain information is simultaneously transferred to
your smartphone.
Depending on the type of integration, this can
include:
R
General vehicle data
R
Position data
This allows you to use selected apps on your
smartphone, such as navigation or music play‐
back. There is no further interaction between the
smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi‐
cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of
General notes
25
further data processing occurs is determined by
the provider of the specific app used. Which set‐
tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe‐
cific app and the operating system of your
smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, it enables data to be exchanged between
your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐
less network connection is enabled via the vehi‐
cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐
nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones).
Online functions can be used via the wireless
network connection. This includes online serv‐
ices and applications/apps provided by the man‐
ufacturer or other providers.
Manufacturer's services
Regarding online services of the manufacturer,
the individual functions are described by the
manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Operator's
Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with
the relevant data protection information. Per‐
sonal data may be used for the provision of
online services. Data is exchanged via a secure
connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated
IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro‐
cessed and used via the provision of services
exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or
with prior consent.
The services and functions (sometimes subject
to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated.
In some cases, this also applies to the entire
vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐
ticular, legally prescribed functions and services.
Third party services
If it is possible to use online services from other
providers, these services are the responsibility
of the provider in question and subject to that
provider's data protection conditions and terms
of use. The manufacturer has no influence on
the content exchanged.
For this reason, please ask the service provider
for information about the type, extent and pur‐
pose of the collection and use of personal data
when services are provided by third parties.
Multimedia system/Mercedes me connect
If the vehicle is equipped with the multimedia
system or Mercedes me connect, additional data
about the vehicle's operation, the use of the
vehicle in certain situations, and the location of
the vehicle may be compiled by the multimedia
system or Mercedes me connect.
For additional information please refer to the
chapter "Multimedia system" and/or the
Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
USA only:
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐
uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
26
General notes
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and front
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which accidents and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the
special equipment, such as law enforcement,
can read the information by accessing the vehi‐
cle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐
out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐
see. Exceptions to this representation include
responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by
federal, state or local government; in connection
with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA
or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required
by law.
Warning: the EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of December
2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to
EDRs.
Copyright
Free and open source software
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet
and with updates on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
General notes
27
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg‐
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R
Burmester
®
is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows Media
®
are regis‐
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGATSurvey
®
and related brands are regis‐
tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
28
General notes
Restraint system
Protection by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following com‐
ponents:
R
Seat belt system
R
Airbags
R
Child restraint system
The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐
cle occupants from coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an
accident. In the event of an accident, the
restraint system can also reduce the forces to
which the vehicle occupants are subjected.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the
detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro‐
tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt.
Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags
are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐
pant must observe the following information:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly.
R
Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
R
Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
sible.
R
Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com‐
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt
and airbag generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the
risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Reduced restraint system protection
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
modifications to the restraint system
The restraint system can no longer function
correctly after alterations have been made.
The restraint system may then not protect
the vehicle occupants as intended by failing
in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for
example
#
Never alter the parts of the restraint
system.
#
Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their
software.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐
modate a person with disabilities, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
USA only: for details, contact our Customer
Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
Occupant safety
29
Restraint system functionality
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐
tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the vehicle is started.
The components of the restraint system are then
functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐
tem if:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a
journey
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig‐
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This may affect
the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air‐
bags, for example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci‐
dent
How the restraint system works is determined by
the severity of the impact detected and the type
of accident anticipated:
R
Frontal impact
R
Rear impact
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of
the restraint system are determined based on
the evaluation of the sensor values measured at
various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-
emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of
the components of the restraint system must
take place in good time at the start of the colli‐
sion.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci‐
sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do
they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐
out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration
is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐
ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of
vehicle deceleration.
30
Occupant safety
The components of the restraint system can
be activated or deployed independently of
each other:
Component Detected deploy‐
ment situation
Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices
Frontal impact, rear
impact, side impact,
rollover
Driver's airbag, front
passenger airbag
Frontal impact
Knee airbag Frontal impact
Side airbag Side impact
Window curtain air‐
bag
Side impact, rollover,
frontal impact
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during
the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 41 ).
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag
components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed.
#
Do not touch the air bag parts.
#
Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon
as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐
ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐
gered or an airbag deployed.
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐
gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also be
released:
R
The bang will not generally affect your hear‐
ing.
R
In general, the powder released is not haz‐
ardous to health but may cause short-term
breathing difficulties to persons suffering
from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to
prevent breathing difficulties.
Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices contain perchlorate material, which may
require special handling or environmental pro‐
tection measures. National guidelines regarding
waste disposal must be observed. In California,
see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Seat belts
Protection provided by the seat belt
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
Occupant safety
31
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#
Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐
pants have their seat belts fastened
correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the cor‐
rect driver's seat position and adjusting the
seats (/ page 70).
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐
vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐
cle occupant must observe the following infor‐
mation:
R
The seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body.
R
The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐
ter of the shoulder and as low down across
the hips as possible.
R
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck nor be routed under
your arm or behind your back.
R
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
R
Push the lap belt down as far as possible
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐
der section of the belt. Never route the lap
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular
care with this.
R
Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐
ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
R
Only one person may use each seat belt at
any one time. Infants and children must
never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle
occupant.
R
Never secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is being used by one of the vehi‐
cle's occupants. Always observe the instruc‐
tions for loading the vehicle when securing
objects, luggage or loads (/ page 80).
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,
are ever placed between a person and the
seat.
The co-driver seat belt is equipped with a special
seatbelt retractor.
Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt
retractor of the seat belt (/ page 48).
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Children in the vehicle" (/ page 45).
Reduced seat belt protection
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
32
Occupant safety
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐
ple.
#
Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
#
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoul‐
der.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death when
additional restraint systems are not used
for persons with a smaller build
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear
the seat belt correctly without a suitable
additional restraint system.
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#
Always secure persons under 5 ft
(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐
tem.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the
following situations:
R
The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R
The seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
Modifications have been made to the
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt
anchorage or seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or
fail in the event of an accident, for example.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may
be deployed unintentionally or not function
as intended.
#
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho‐
rages or seat belt retractors.
#
Make sure that the seat belts are not
damaged, are not worn and are clean.
#
Always have the seat belts checked
immediately after an accident at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts which have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Vehicles with AMG Performance seats
The AMG Performance seat is designed for the
standard three-point seat belt. If you install a dif‐
ferent multipoint seat belt, e.g. sport or racing
seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide
the intended level of protection.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury
due to modified seat belt systems
If you feed seat belts through the opening in
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
damaged or may even break in the event of
an accident.
Occupant safety
33
#
Only use the standard three-point seat
belt.
#
Never modify the seat belt system.
All vehicles
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐
sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer opera‐
tional and are unable to perform their inten‐
ded protective function.
#
Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐
ately replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident.
*
NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the
seat mechanism.
#
Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Fastening seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐
not be pulled out any further.
#
Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the
seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐
responding seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐
bag shutoff:
34
Occupant safety
*
NOTE Deployment of the Emergency
Tensioning Device and side air bag when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front
passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning
Device and the side air bag may also deploy
in the event of an accident along with other
systems.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger
airbag shutoff:
*
NOTE Deployment of the Emergency
Tensioning Device when the front-
passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front-
passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning
Device may also deploy in the event of an
accident along with other systems.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE
®
: If the seat belt is not
pulled tightly across your body, the seat belt
adjustment may automatically apply a certain
tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 35).
Releasing seat belts
#
Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment
via the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Belt Adjustment
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and
front passenger
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐
ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐
pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
seconds every time the vehicle is started.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
When the driver's and front passenger's doors
are closed and the driver and front passenger
have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt
warning goes out.
Occupant safety
35
In the following cases, the seat belt warning
lights up during a journey if:
R
The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver's or front
passenger seat belt is not fastened.
R
The driver or front passenger unfastens their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
Airbags
Overview of airbags
1
Driver's airbag
2
Front passenger airbag
3
Front passenger knee airbag
4
Window curtain airbag
5
Side airbag
6
Driver's knee bag
The installation location of an airbag can be rec‐
ognized by the AIRBAG marking.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
Potential protection from each airbag:
AIRBAG Potential protection for:
Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg
Driver's airbag,
front passenger
airbag
Head and ribcage
Window curtain
airbag
Head
Side airbag Ribcage
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
if the front-passenger airbag is enabled
If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled,
a child on the front-passenger seat may be
struck by the front-passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 49). Also, always
observe the notes on rearward-facing or
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front passenger seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐
bag shutoff:
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during
36
Occupant safety
the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 41 ).
*
NOTE Important points to remember if
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily
on the front passenger side if:
R
There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
R
The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger
seat and the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
#
Stow objects in a suitable place.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation,
the window curtain airbag on the front
passenger side may deploy. The airbag is
deployed regardless of whether the front
passenger seat is occupied.
Protection by the airbags
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag
may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐
tective function and deployment may even
cause further injuries.
In order to avoid risks, each vehicle occupant
must always make sure of the following:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to
ensure that the lap belt never lies across
the abdomen.
R
Adopt the correct seat position and keep
as far away as possible from the airbags.
R
Observe the following information.
#
Always make sure that there are no
objects between the airbag and vehicle
occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment
of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must
observe the following information in particular:
R
Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front
passenger seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
When doing so, always observe the informa‐
tion on the correct driver's seat position
(/ page 70).
R
Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully
deployed.
R
Always lean against the seat backrest when
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards
or against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the
airbags.
R
Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not
put your feet on the cockpit, for example.
Occupant safety
37
Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐
ment area of the airbag.
R
If children are traveling in the vehicle,
observe the additional notes (/ page 45).
R
Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an
airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle
occupant must always make sure of the follow‐
ing in particular:
R
There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air‐
bag.
R
There are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar).
R
There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
R
There are no accessory parts, such as mobile
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup
holders, attached to the vehicle within the
deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the
cockpit, on the door, on the side window or
on the side wall trim.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
straps or retaining straps must be routed or
attached to the vehicle within the deploy‐
ment area of an airbag. Always comply with
the accessory manufacturer's installation
instructions and, in particular, the notes on
suitable places for installation.
R
There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
Limited protection provided by airbags
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to the airbag cover
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
no longer function correctly.
#
Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identified
by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 36).
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
the use of unsuitable seat covers
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐
vent the deployment of air bags integrated
into the seats.
Consequently, the air bags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do. In addition, operation of the automatic
front passenger air bag shutoff may be
restricted.
#
You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the correspond‐
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions of the sensors in the door paneling
Sensors to control the airbags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per‐
formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to
the function of the sensors being impaired.
The airbags might therefore not function
properly any more.
38
Occupant safety
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do.
#
Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
#
Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
airbag
A deployed airbag no longer has a protective
function and cannot protect as intended in
the event of an accident.
#
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the
deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger front airbag
Function of the automatic front passenger
airbag shutoff
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is
able to detect whether the front passenger seat
is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐
tem. The front passenger airbag and front
passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled
accordingly.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, always make sure of the
following:
R
Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly (/ page 44).
R
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
R
Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or
behind the child restraint system.
R
Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐
ment.
R
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion of the
front-passenger seat.
R
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat.
R
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head
restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐
tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
ingly.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects between the sitting surface and
the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the
child restraint system could affect the func‐
tion of the automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff.
This could result in the front passenger air‐
bag not functioning as intended during an
accident.
#
Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint
system.
Occupant safety
39
#
The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the sitting
surface of the front passenger seat.
#
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possi‐
ble, be resting on the seat backrest of
the front passenger seat.
#
Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
A person on the front passenger seat must
observe the following information:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 31).
R
Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
R
Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
sible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be
disabled by mistake, for example in the following
situations:
R
The front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
R
The front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐
face.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
deactivated front passenger airbag
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐
bled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could
then, for example, come into contact with
the vehicle interior, especially if the person is
sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
bled in accordance with the person in the
front passenger seat.
R
The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
R
The person is seated correctly.
#
Ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐
sification of the person or child restraint system
on the front passenger seat takes place after the
front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
status of the front passenger airbag.
Always observe the notes on the function of the
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
(/ page 41).
40
Occupant safety
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐
tor lamps
Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed during which the two PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up
simultaneously.
The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐
played after the self-test:
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF): the front passenger airbag is able to
deploy in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐
ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled.
It will then not be deployed in the event of an
accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front passenger
airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
and the 6 restraint system warning lamp
light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat
may not be used. Also in this case, do not install
a child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. Have automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Status display
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for
the current situation.
After installing a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐
tinuously.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
Occupant safety
41
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 49).
Depending on the child restraint system and the
stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do
not install the rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat.
After installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat: depending on the child restraint system
and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off.
Always observe the following information.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury
due to incorrect positioning of the child
restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and you position the front passenger seat too
close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci‐
dent, the child could:
R
come into contact with parts of the vehi‐
cle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example.
R
be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
#
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible. Always make
sure that the shoulder belt strap is cor‐
rectly routed from the seat belt guide
on the vehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
wards and downwards from the seat
belt guide.
#
Always observe the child restraint sys‐
tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 49).
If a person is sitting on the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐
tinuously or be off, depending on the person's
stature.
A person on the front passenger seat must
always observe the following information:
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person with a stature correspond‐
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This
indicates that the front passenger airbag is
enabled.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
with a build corresponding to that of an adult
should not use the front passenger seat.
42
Occupant safety
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp either lights up continuously
or remains off, depending on the result of the
classification.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off: move the front passenger
seat as far back as possible.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously: the person of
smaller stature should not use the front
passenger seat.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test,
the front passenger air bag is deactivated. It
will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent. In this case, the front passenger air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front
passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle interior, especially if
the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger air bag is enabled or
deactivated in accordance with the per‐
son in the front passenger seat.
R
The person is seated properly with a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
R
The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/ page 49).
PRE-SAFE
®
system
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant protec‐
tion)
PRE-SAFE
®
is able to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐
ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE
®
can implement the following meas‐
ures independently of each other:
R
Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R
Closing the side windows.
R
Vehicles with memory function: Moving
the front passenger seat to a more favorable
seat position.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound: provided that the multi‐
media system is switched on, generates a
brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐
tective mechanism of a person's hearing.
Occupant safety
43
*
NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐
tion may result in damage to the seat and/or
the object.
#
Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE
®
system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
You will need to perform certain settings your‐
self.
#
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly.
The locking mechanism releases.
Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Always observe when children are traveling
in the vehicle
%
Also strictly observe the safety notes for the
specific situation. In this way you can recog‐
nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐
dren are traveling in the vehicle
(/ page 45).
Be diligent
Bear in mind that neglecting to secure a child in
the child restraint system may have serious con‐
sequences. Always be diligent in securing a child
carefully before every journey.
To improve protection for children younger than
12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height,
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the
following information:
R
Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cle.
R
The child restraint system must be appropri‐
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R
The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal‐
ling a child restraint system.
Generic term "child restraint system"
The generic term child restraint system is used
in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys‐
tem is, for example:
R
a baby car seat
R
a rearward-facing child seat
R
a forward-facing child seat
R
a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guide
The child restraint system must be appropriate
to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observing laws and legal requirements
Always observe the legal requirements when
using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Observing standards for child restraint sys‐
tems
All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐
ing standards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
44
Occupant safety
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
complies with the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the instal‐
lation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems
in the vehicle
Only use the following securing systems for child
restraint systems:
R
the vehicle's seat belt system
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a
height where a three-point seat belt can be
installed properly without a booster seat.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child
booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.
Advantage of a rearward-facing child
restraint system
It is preferable to transport a baby or a small
child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint
system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐
site direction to the direction of travel and faces
backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in
a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system cor‐
rectly
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by incorrect installation of the child
restraint system
If the child restraint system is incorrectly
installed on a suitable seating position, it
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion.
The child cannot be restrained in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
#
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use.
#
Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system always rests on
the sitting surface of the seat.
#
Never place objects under or behind
the child restraint system, e.g. cush‐
ions.
#
Always use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed for them.
#
Always replace damaged covers with
genuine covers.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
unsecured child restraint systems in the
vehicle
If the child restraint system is not correctly
installed or secured, it could release in the
Occupant safety
45
event of an accident, sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
The child restraint system could be flung
around and hit vehicle occupants.
#
Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use.
#
Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
R
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions as well as the vehicle-specific
information:
-
Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the front passenger seat
(/ page 50). Observe the specific
instructions for the rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems
(/ page 49).
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐
rent situation (/ page 41).
R
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior and on the child restraint system.
Do not modify the child restraint system
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system may no longer
function as it is supposed to if you make
modifications or attach objects to it, e.g. toys
or unsuitable accessories. This poses an
increased risk of injury!
Never modify the child restraint system. Only
attach accessories which the manufacturer
of the child restraint system has authorized
especially for this child restraint system.
Only use child restraint systems which are in
proper working condition
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by the use of damaged child restraint
systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐
tems that have been subjected to a load in
an accident may then not be able to perform
their intended protective function.
The child cannot be restrained in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
#
Always replace child restraint systems
immediately that have been damaged or
involved in an accident.
#
Have the securing systems for the child
restraint systems checked at a qualified
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again.
46
Occupant safety
Avoid direct sunlight
&
WARNING Risk of burns when the child
seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could suffer burns from these parts,
particularly on metallic parts of the child
restraint system.
#
Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
#
Protect it with a blanket, for example.
#
If the child restraint system has been
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
&
WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people – particularly children – are
exposed to extreme temperatures over an
extended period of time, there is a risk of
serious or even fatal injury.
#
Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐
dren – unattended in the vehicle.
#
Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
Occupant safety
47
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system
Securing systems for child restraint systems
Vehicle seat
Front passenger seat
Securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt .
Be sure to observe:
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the
current situation (/ page 41 ).
R
Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shut‐
off (/ page 39).
Activating/deactivating the seat belt's child
special seat belt retractor
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death if a
seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle
is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is
in motion, the child restraint system is no
longer correctly secured. The child seat
safety feature is deactivated and the seat
belt is drawn in a bit by the inertia reel.
It is therefore not possible to engage the seat
belt again.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as
soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions.
#
Activate the child seat safety feature
again and correctly secure the child
restraint system.
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor
ensures that the seat belt of the front passenger
seat does not slacken once the child restraint
system is secured.
The seat belt on the front passenger side is
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
#
To install a child restraint system: when
installing a child restraint system, always
observe the manufacturer's installation and
operating instructions as well as the informa‐
tion in this Operator's Manual.
48
Occupant safety
#
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt
outlet.
#
Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt
buckle.
#
To activate the special seat belt retrac‐
tor: pull the seat belt out fully and let the
inertia reel retract it again.
When the special seat belt retractor is activa‐
ted, you should hear a ratcheting sound.
#
Push the child restraint system down until
the seat belt sits tightly.
#
To deactivate the special seat belt retrac‐
tor: press the release button of the seat belt
buckle.
#
Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to
the seat belt outlet.
Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint
systems (/ page 50).
Always observe the status of the front passenger
airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐
tor lamp:
R
When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled.
This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously
(/ page 41).
R
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐
bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy
during an accident.
Occupant safety
49
Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the front passenger seat
When installing a belt-secured child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, always
observe the following:
O
Observe the child restraint system manufac‐
turer's installation and operating instruc‐
tions.
O
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat.
O
For certain child restraint systems in weight
category II or III, there may be restrictions
on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to
possible contact with the roof.
O
The child restraint system must not be ten‐
sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐
ion and/or be installed facing the wrong
direction.
O
The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraints. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
O
Never place objects under or behind the
child restraint system, e.g. cushions.
The seat belt on the front passenger side is
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor
function ensures that the seat belt does not
slacken once the child restraint system is
secured (/ page 48).
#
Set the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and move the seat into the highest
position if possible.
#
Set the seat backrest to the most vertical
position possible.
#
Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion of the
front-passenger seat.
#
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
let.
#
If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat
accordingly.
Notes on pets in the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
down buttons or switches.
Thereby an animal may:
R
activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R
switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
50
Occupant safety
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
the vehicle in the event of an accident or
sudden steering and braking maneuver and
injure vehicle occupants in the process.
#
Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
#
Always correctly secure animals while
driving, for example using a suitable
animal carrier.
Occupant safety
51
SmartKey
Overview of SmartKey functions
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
*
NOTE Damage to the key caused by
magnetic fields
#
Keep the key away from strong mag‐
netic fields.
1
Panic alarm
2
Locks
3
Opening the tailgate
4
Unlocks
5
Battery check lamp
%
The SmartKey may vary from the one shown
in the diagram, depending on the vehicle
equipment.
The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following
components:
R
the doors
R
the tailgate
R
the fuel filler flap
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately
40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
theft protection is armed again.
Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐
tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect
the SmartKey's functionality.
%
If battery check lamp 5 does not light up
after pressing the % or & button, the
battery has been discharged.
Change the SmartKey battery (/
page 54).
52
Opening and closing
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking
verification signal
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Acoustic Lock
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Activating/deactivating the panic alarm
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched off.
%
The panic alarm function is only available in
certain countries.
#
To activate: press button 1 for approx‐
imately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
#
To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again.
or
#
Press the start/stop button on the cockpit
(the SmartKey is inside the vehicle).
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey:
R
Central unlocking
R
Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
#
To switch between settings: press the
Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the battery
check lamp flashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
door and fuel filler flap has been selected:
R
Pressing the Ü button a second time cen‐
trally unlocks the vehicle
R
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel
filler flap are unlocked.
Deactivating the SmartKey functions
If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for
an extended period of time, you can reduce the
energy consumption of the respective SmartKey.
To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions.
#
To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in quick succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
flashes twice briefly and lights up once.
#
To activate: press any button on the Smart‐
Key.
%
When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐
Key in the marked space of the center con‐
sole, the SmartKey functions are automati‐
cally activated (/ page 104).
Opening and closing
53
Removing/inserting the emergency key
#
To remove: push release catch 1 in the
direction of the arrow and simultaneously
pull emergency key 2 completely out of the
SmartKey.
#
To insert: push emergency key 2 fully into
the SmartKey until it engages.
Release catch 1 must then be back in the
basic position.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
&
DANGER Serious damage to health
caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
stances. Swallowing batteries may cause
serious damage to health.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
#
Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
dren.
#
If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
Requirements
R
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
#
Remove the emergency key (/ page 54).
54
Opening and closing
#
Press emergency key 2 into the opening in
the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow
until battery compartment cover 1 opens.
When doing so, do not hold battery compart‐
ment cover 1 shut.
#
Remove battery compartment cover 1.
#
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery 3 falls out of the Smart‐
Key.
#
Insert the new battery with the positive pole
facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
#
Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other impurities.
#
Insert the front tabs of battery compartment
cover 1 into the housing and then press to
close it.
#
Insert emergency key 2 into the SmartKey.
Opening and closing
55
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle.
Possible causes are:
R
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R
The SmartKey is defective.
#
Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 54).
#
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 54).
#
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a SmartKey.
#
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
If necessary, have the mechanical lock changed as well.
56
Opening and closing
Doors
Unlocking and opening doors from the inside
#
Pull door handle 2.
Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is
unlocked.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle
from the inside
#
To unlock: press button 1.
#
To lock: press button 2.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle is not unlocked:
R
If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
R
If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐
LESS-GO
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is outside the vehicle.
R
The distance between the SmartKey and the
vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m).
R
The driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
Opening and closing
57
#
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐
face of the door handle.
#
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface
1 or 2.
#
Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐
sor surface 2 until the closing process has
been completed.
%
Further information on convenience closing
(/ page 65).
If you open the tailgate from outside it is auto‐
matically unlocked.
58
Opening and closing
Problems with KEYLESS-GO
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
Possible causes are:
R
The key functions have been deactivated (/ page 53).
R
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R
The SmartKey is faulty.
#
Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 53).
#
Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 54).
#
Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the vehicle (/ page 54).
#
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐
ing feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐
ing faster than walking pace.
Opening and closing
59
#
To activate: press and hold button 2 for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
#
To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
In the following situations, there is a danger of
being locked out when the function is activated:
R
While the vehicle is being tow started/
pushed.
R
If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐
mometer.
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the
emergency key
%
If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for
locking from the inside while the driver's
door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐
er's door using the emergency key.
#
Insert the emergency key as far as it will go
into opening 1 in the cover.
#
Pull and hold the door handle.
#
Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle
until it releases.
#
Release the door handle.
60
Opening and closing
#
To unlock: turn the emergency key counter-
clockwise to position 1.
#
To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to
position 1.
#
Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐
der until it engages and is seated firmly.
Cargo compartment
Opening the tailgate
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐
gate is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#
Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate.
#
Never drive with the tailgate open.
*
NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by
obstacles above the vehicle
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when it is opened.
#
Make sure that there is sufficient space
behind and above the tailgate.
You have the following options for opening
the tailgate:
#
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make
a kicking movement with your foot below the
bumper (/ page 62).
#
Press the remote operating switch for tail‐
gate 1.
#
Press the p button on the SmartKey.
The tailgate will open slightly.
Opening and closing
61
Closing the tailgate
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
To close the tailgate, the following options
are available:
#
Pull the tailgate down using the handle
recess and push it closed.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open the
tailgate by performing a kicking movement
under the bumper.
Observe the notes when opening (/ page 61 )
the tailgate.
&
WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system.
#
Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection
range of the sensors.
*
NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten‐
tional opening of the tailgate
R
when using an automatic car wash
R
when using a high pressure cleaner
#
Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure
that the key located is at least 10 ft
(3 m) away from the vehicle in such sit‐
uations.
When making the kicking movement, make sure
that your feet are firmly on the ground, other‐
wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
62
Opening and closing
Observe the following notes:
R
The SmartKey is behind the vehicle.
R
Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing the kicking move‐
ment.
R
Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement.
R
Do not carry out the kicking movement too
slowly.
R
The kicking movement must be towards the
vehicle and back again.
1
Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking movements are
not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following cases:
R
The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due
to road salt or snow.
R
The kicking movement is made using a pros‐
thetic leg.
The tailgate could be opened unintentionally in
the following situations:
R
If a person's arms or legs are moving in the
sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing
the vehicle or picking up objects.
R
If objects are moved or placed behind the
vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage.
R
If clamping straps, tarps or other coverings
are pulled over the bumper.
R
If a protective mat with a length reaching
over the trunk sill down into the detection
range of the sensors is used.
R
If the protective mat is not secured correctly.
Deactivate the key functions (/ page 53) or do
not carry the SmartKey about your person in
such situations.
Releasing the tailgate in an emergency
#
Climb into the cargo compartment from the
vehicle interior.
#
Unhook the cargo compartment cover, if nec‐
essary (/ page 82).
#
Remove the warning triangle from the warn‐
ing triangle holder .
#
Press carpet 1 down.
Opening and closing
63
#
Pull the cable behind carpet 1 until the tail‐
gate unlocks.
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#
When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
#
If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or pull it in order to
close the side window again.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts
could be trapped in the closing area in the
process.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper‐
ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐
tended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
Requirements:
R
The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
1
Closes
2
Opens
The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐
dence.
#
To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.
64
Opening and closing
#
To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull the W button again.
When the vehicle is switched off, the side win‐
dows can continue being operated.
Automatic reversing function of the side win‐
dows
If an object blocks a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing function
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
#
During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
R
To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
During resetting
This means that the reverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open the side window
again.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle
before starting a journey)
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#
When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
#
Press and hold the Ü button on the
SmartKey.
The following functions are performed:
R
The vehicle is unlocked
R
The side windows are opened.
R
The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
switched on.
#
To interrupt convenience opening: release
the Ü button.
#
To continue convenience opening: press
and hold the Ü button again.
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle
from outside)
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by
inadvertent convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side win‐
dows.
Opening and closing
65
#
Observe the complete closing proce‐
dure when using convenience closing.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
Press and hold the ß button on the
SmartKey.
The following functions are performed:
R
The vehicle is locked.
R
The side windows are closed.
#
To interrupt convenience closing: release
the ß button.
%
Convenience closing can also be operated
with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 57).
Problems with the side windows
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
fatally injured if reversing protection is
not activated
If you close a side window again immediately
after it has been blocked, the side window
will close with increased or maximum force.
The reversing feature will then not be active.
Parts of the body could become trapped in
the closing area in the process.
#
Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
#
To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to re-
open the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A side window cannot be closed and
you cannot see the cause.
#
Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
#
Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
66
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
#
Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold
the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment).
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:
#
Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold
the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment).
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
The side windows cannot be opened or
closed using the convenience opening
feature.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
#
Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 54).
Opening and closing
67
Roller sun blinds
Operating the panoramic roof's roller sun‐
blind
#
Pull handle 1 on the roller sunblind in the
corresponding direction.
Anti-theft protection
Function of the immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being
started without the correct SmartKey.
The immobilizer is automatically activated when
the ignition is switched off and deactivated when
the ignition is switched on.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐
Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can
start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left
inside the vehicle.
%
In the event the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the
system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Function of the ATA system
If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
R
when a door is opened
R
when the tailgate is opened
R
when the hood is opened
The ATA system is armed automatically after
approximately ten seconds in the following situa‐
tions:
R
after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R
after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system
is armed.
68
Opening and closing
The ATA system is deactivated automatically in
the following situations:
R
after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R
after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
after starting the vehicle with the SmartKey
(/ page 104)
%
When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call
system is active and the alarm stays on for
more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐
matically sent to the Customer Assistance
Center (/ page 258).
%
In the case of severe battery discharging,
the anti-theft alarm system is automatically
deactivated to facilitate the next engine
start.
Deactivating the ATA
#
Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
SmartKey.
or
#
Start the vehicle with the SmartKey
(/ page 104).
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
#
Grasp the outside door handle with the
SmartKey outside the vehicle.
Opening and closing
69
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
Ensure the following when adjusting steering
wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R
you are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible
R
you are sitting in an upright position
R
your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
R
your legs are not fully extended and you can
depress the pedals properly
R
the back of your head is supported at eye
level by the center of the head restraint
R
you can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
R
you can move your legs freely
R
you can see all the displays on the instru‐
ment cluster clearly
R
you have a good overview of the traffic con‐
ditions
R
your seat belt sits snugly against your body
and passes across the center of your shoul‐
der and across your hips in the pelvic area
Seats
Adjusting the front seat mechanically
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
70
Seats and stowing
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
#
When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐
dren in the vehicle".
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally
press the electrical seat adjustment buttons
and become trapped.
#
While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐
not provide protection as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
Seats and stowing
71
#
Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
#
Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐
ple.
#
Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
#
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoul‐
der.
#
To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
lift lever 1 and slide the seat into the
desired position.
#
Make sure that the seat is engaged.
#
To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever
2 until the desired position has been
reached.
#
To adjust the seat backrest inclination: lift
lever 3 and set the seat to the desired
angle.
#
Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged.
Adjusting the front seat electrically
1
Seat cushion inclination
2
Seat height
72
Seats and stowing
3
Seat backrest inclination
4
Seat fore-and-aft position
#
Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 79).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1
Raise
2
Soften
3
Lower
4
Harden
#
Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour
of the backrest individually to suit your back.
Adjusting the AMG Performance seat
To adjust the contour of the seat and for
improved lateral support, you can adjust the
front seats individually.
On the front passenger seat, you can adjust only
the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.
The AMG Performance seat is designed for the
standard three-point seat belt. If you install a dif‐
ferent multipoint seat belt, e.g. a sport or racing
seat belt, the restraint system cannot provide
the intended level of protection.
Seats and stowing
73
#
To adjust the seat side bolsters of the
seat cushion: press button 1 (narrower) or
2 (wider).
#
To adjust the seat side bolsters of the
seat backrest: press button 3 (narrower)
or 4 (wider).
Head restraints
Adjusting the head restraints
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐
not provide protection as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
#
Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
#
Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
74
Seats and stowing
#
To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#
To lower: push the head restraint down.
Switching the seat heating on/off
&
WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐
edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
padding to become very hot.
The health of persons with limited tempera‐
ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to
high temperatures may be affected or they
may even suffer burn-like injuries.
#
Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated after it is
switched on repeatedly.
*
NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
objects or documents when the seat
heating is switched on
When the seat heating is switched on, over‐
heating may occur due to objects or docu‐
ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush‐
ions or child seats. This could cause damage
to the seat surface.
#
Make sure that no objects or docu‐
ments are on the seats when the seat
heating is switched on.
Requirements:
R
The power supply is switched on.
#
To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps will light up.
Seats and stowing
75
#
To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating
is switched off.
%
The seat heating will automatically switch
down from the three heating levels after 5,
10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating
switches off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Requirements:
R
The power supply is switched on.
The seat ventilation is available only for vehicles
with AMG Performance seats.
#
To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
Depending on the ventilation level, up to
three indicator lamps will light up.
#
To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐
tion is switched off.
Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
76
Seats and stowing
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
This function is only available for the AMG GT
and AMG GT S models.
#
Push release lever 1 down as far as it will
go.
The steering column is unlocked.
#
Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the
steering wheel.
#
Push release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
The steering column is locked.
#
Check and make sure that the steering col‐
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
power supply is switched off.
1
Adjusts the distance to the steering wheel
2
Adjusts the height
#
Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 79).
Seats and stowing
77
Easy entry and exit feature
Using the easy entry and exit feature
&
WARNING Risk of accident when driving
off while adjusting the easy exit feature
‑ If you drive off while the easy entry and exit
feature is making adjustments, you could
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Always wait until the adjustment proc‐
ess is complete before driving off.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while adjusting the easy entry and exit
feature
When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped.
#
During the adjustment process of the
easy entry and exit feature, make sure
that no one has any body parts in the
sweep of the steering wheel.
#
Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐
ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming
trapped by the steering wheel.
The adjustment process is stopped.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during activation of the easy entry and
exit feature by children
If children activate the easy entry and exit
feature, they can become trapped, particu‐
larly when unattended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
Vehicles with memory function: you can stop
the adjustment process by pressing one of the
memory function position switches.
If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the
steering wheel will move upwards or towards the
dashboard when:
R
you switch the ignition off.
R
you open the driver's door.
%
The steering wheel will move upwards and
towards the dashboard only if it has not
already reached the steering limitation.
The steering wheel will move back to the last
drive position when:
R
you close the driver's door with the ignition
switched on.
R
you press the start/stop button once.
The last drive position will be stored when:
R
you switch the ignition off.
R
you save the setting with the memory func‐
tion.
If you press one of the memory function position
switches, the adjustment process will be stop‐
ped.
78
Seats and stowing
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Easy Entry/Exit
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Operating the memory function
&
WARNING Risk of an accident if the
memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv‐
er's side while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made.
#
Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station‐
ary.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐
ting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat
or steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped.
#
During the setting procedure of the
memory function, ensure that no body
parts are in the sweep of the seat or
the steering wheel.
#
If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐
ately release the memory function posi‐
tion button.
The adjustment process is stopped.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti‐
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
The memory function can be used when the igni‐
tion is switched off.
Storing
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function.
The following systems can be selected:
R
Seat and backrest
R
Driver's side: steering wheel
R
Driver's side: outside mirrors on the driver's
and front passenger sides
Seats and stowing
79
#
Set the seat, the steering wheel and the out‐
side mirrors to the desired position.
#
Press memory button M together with one of
preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are
stored.
#
To call up: press and hold the relevant pre‐
set position button 1, 2 or 3 until the front
seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors are
in the stored position.
Stowage areas
Notes on loading the vehicle
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐
gate is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#
Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate.
#
Never drive with the tailgate open.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If you do not adequately stow objects in the
vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed
around and thereby strike vehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot
always restrain the objects they contain in
the event of an accident.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
80
Seats and stowing
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
project from stowage spaces, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or
too large in the cargo compartment.
&
WARNING Risk of burning from the tail‐
pipe or tailpipe trim
The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become
very hot. If you come into contact with these
car parts, you could burn yourself.
#
Always be particularly careful when in
the vicinity of the tailpipe and tailpipe
trims and supervise children very
closely when in this area.
#
Before any contact, allow the car parts
to cool down.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are
dependent on the distribution of the load within
the vehicle. You should bear the following in
mind when loading the vehicle:
R
never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle
(including occupants). The values are speci‐
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
vehicle's B-pillar.
R
position heavy loads as far forwards as possi‐
ble and as low down in the cargo compart‐
ment as possible.
R
the load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
R
always attach the partition net when trans‐
porting objects in the cargo compartment.
R
always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
R
secure the load with sufficiently tear-resist‐
ant and wear-resistant tie downs. Pad sharp
edges for protection.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
Overview of the front stowage compart‐
ments
1
Stowage compartment in the doors
2
Stowage compartment beneath the armrest
with multimedia connection unit with an SD
card slot, two USB connections and the igni‐
tion lock
Depending on the equipment, there is a 12 V
socket in the stowage compartment
3
Stowage compartment in the front center
console with a USB connection
4
Glove box
Seats and stowing
81
Locking/unlocking the glove box
#
Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐
wise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to
unlock).
Extending/retracting the cargo compart‐
ment cover
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects being poorly secured
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load during
sudden changes in direction, braking or in
the event of an accident.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie-downs, even if you are using
the cargo compartment cover.
*
NOTE Damage to the cargo compart‐
ment cover when loading the vehicle
The cargo compartment cover may be dam‐
aged when loading the vehicle.
#
Do not place any objects above the
lower edge of the side windows or on
the cargo compartment cover.
#
To extend: pull cargo compartment cover
back by grab handle 1 and clip it into hold‐
ers 2 on the left and right.
82
Seats and stowing
#
To retract: unhook cargo compartment
cover from holders 2 on the left-hand and
right-hand side.
#
Guide the cargo compartment cover for‐
wards using grab handle 1 above holders
2 until it is fully retracted.
Attaching/removing the partition net
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects being poorly secured
On its own, the partition net cannot secure
or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage
and heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load during
sudden changes in direction, braking or in
the event of an accident.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using lashing material, even when you
are using the partition net.
For safety reasons, always use a partition net
when transporting a load.
Damaged partition nets can no longer fulfill their
functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified
specialist workshop.
#
To attach and tighten: push the seats as far
back as possible.
#
From the vehicle interior, insert hooks 1
into upper holders 2 and turn back by 90°.
Upper tensioning hook 3 stretches the par‐
tition net automatically.
#
Attach hooks 4 to lower holders 5.
#
After driving a short distance, check the ten‐
sion of the partition net.
Seats and stowing
83
#
To loosen and detach: turn back hooks 1
by 90° and detach from upper holder 2.
#
Detach hooks 4 from lower holders 5.
Cup holder
Installing the cup holder in or removing it
from the center console
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers
while the vehicle is moving.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is
moving, the container may be flung around
and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
could be distracted from traffic conditions
and you may lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
#
Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size.
#
Close the container, particularly if the
liquid is hot.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If you do not adequately stow objects in the
vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed
around and thereby strike vehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot
always restrain the objects they contain in
the event of an accident.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
project from stowage spaces, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or
too large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
The divider in cup holder 1 can be removed,
e.g. to enable use with smaller drinks cans.
#
To remove: pull the divider up and remove it.
#
To install: re-insert the divider and push it
down until it engages.
84
Seats and stowing
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Using the ashtray
*
NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐
ment under the ashtray due to intense
heat
The stowage compartment under the ashtray
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if
you rest a lit cigarette on it.
#
Make sure that the ashtray is fully
engaged.
#
Insert holder 3 into the cup holder on the
left or right-hand side.
#
To open: fold lid 1 upwards.
#
To close: press lid 1 downwards.
#
To remove: pull ashtray 2 up and out of
holder 3.
#
To insert: place ashtray 2 into holder 3.
%
Remove holder 3 to be able to use the
entire cup holder. Store holder 3 and ash‐
tray 2 in a suitable place. Comply with the
loading guidelines (/ page 80).
Using the cigarette lighter in the front center
console
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga‐
rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials may ignite
if:
R
you drop the hot cigarette lighter
R
a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
#
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob.
#
Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children.
Seats and stowing
85
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
#
Press in cigarette lighter 1.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automati‐
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
Sockets
Using the 12 V socket under the armrest
Requirements:
R
Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 watts (15 A).
#
Lift up socket cap 1.
#
Insert the plug of the device.
The 12 V socket is only available on vehicles with
an ashtray and a cigarette lighter in the stowage
compartment under the armrest.
Using the 12 V socket in the cargo compart‐
ment
Requirements:
R
Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
86
Seats and stowing
#
Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the
plug of the device.
Installing/removing the floor mats
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
#
To install: slide the corresponding seat
backwards and lay the floor mat in the foot‐
well.
#
Press press-studs 1 onto holders 2.
#
Adjust the corresponding seat.
#
To remove: slide the corresponding seat
backwards and pull the floor mat off holders
2.
Seats and stowing
87
#
Remove the floor mat.
88
Seats and stowing
Exterior lighting
Information about lighting systems and your
responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
for correct vehicle illumination in accordance
with the prevailing light and visibility conditions,
legal requirements and traffic situation.
Light switch
Operating the light switch
1
W Left standing light
2
X Right standing light
3
T Parking lights and license plate lamp
4
à Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
5
L Low beam/high beam
6
R Switches the rear fog light on or off
When low beam is activated, the T indicator
lamp for the parking lights is deactivated and
replaced by the L low beam indicator lamp.
#
Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐
cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐
vant legal stipulations.
*
NOTE Battery discharging by operating
the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of
hours puts a strain on the battery.
#
Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
In the case of severe battery discharging, the
standing lights or parking lights are automati‐
cally switched off to facilitate the next engine
start.
The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐
ing lights) switches off automatically when the
driver's door is opened.
Light and visibility
89
R
Observe the notes on surround lighting
(/ page 93).
Automatic driving lights function
The parking lights, low beam and daytime run‐
ning lamps are switched on automatically
depending on the ignition status and the ambi‐
ent light.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when the low
beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low
beam may not be switched on automatically
if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor
visibility such as spray.
#
In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
are responsible for vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog lights on or off
Requirements:
R
The light switch is in the L or à posi‐
tion.
#
Press the R button.
Please observe the country-specific laws on the
use of rear fog lamps.
Operating the combination switch for the
lights
1
High-beam headlamps
2
Turn signal indicator, right
3
High-beam flasher
4
Turn signal indicator, left
#
Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
90
Light and visibility
High-beam headlamps
#
To switch on: turn the light switch to the
L or à position.
#
Press the combination switch beyond the
point of resistance in the direction of arrow
1.
When the high beam is activated, the L
indicator lamp for low beam is deactivated
and replaced by the K indicator lamp for
the high beam.
#
To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its starting position.
High-beam flasher
#
Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 3.
Turn signal lights
#
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the
direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal indicator will
flash three times.
#
To indicate permanently: press the combi‐
nation switch beyond the point of resistance
in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning
lamps
#
Press button 1 .
The hazard warning lamps will switch on auto‐
matically if:
R
the airbag has been deployed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog‐
nize the following road users:
R
Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
trians
R
Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists
R
Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognize
them too late.
Light and visibility
91
In these or similar situations, the automatic
high beam is not deactivated or is activated
despite the presence of other road users.
#
Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following
cases:
R
In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
R
If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to
the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐
tions.
%
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available only in
vehicles with LED high performance head‐
lamps.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically
switches between the following types of light:
R
Low-beam headlamps
R
High-beam headlamps
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h):
R
If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will be switched on automatically.
The high beam switches off automatically in the
following cases:
R
At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h).
R
If other road users are detected.
R
If street lighting is sufficient.
At speeds greater than approximately 31 mph
(50 km/h):
R
The headlamp range of the low beam is regu‐
lated automatically based on the distance to
other road users.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
#
To switch on: turn the light switch to the
à position.
#
Switch on the high beam using the combina‐
tion switch.
When the high beam is switched on automat‐
ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on
the multifunction display comes on.
#
To switch off: switch off the high beam
using the combination switch.
92
Light and visibility
Switching the daytime running lamps on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Daytime Run. Lights
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay
time
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Ext. Light Switch Off
#
Set the switch-off delay time.
Setting the surround lighting
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Locator Lighting
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
If the surround lighting is switched on, the exte‐
rior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after the
vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle,
the surround lighting is deactivated and the
automatic driving lights are activated.
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting
1
u Cargo compartment lamp
2
| Automatic interior lighting control
3
p Right reading lamp
4
c Interior lighting
5
p Left reading lamp
#
To switch on or off: press button 1 – 5
accordingly.
Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay
time
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Int. Light Switch Off
#
Set the switch-off delay time.
Light and visibility
93
Windshield wiper and windshield washer
system
Switching the windshield wipers on/off
1
g Windshield wipers off
2
Ä Intermittent wiping, normal
3
Å Intermittent wiping, frequent
4
° Continuous wiping, slow
5
¯ Continuous wiping, fast
#
Turn the combination switch to the correct
position 1 - 5.
#
Single wipe/washing: push the button on
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 1.
R
í Single wipe
R
î Wipes with washer fluid
Changing the windshield wiper blades
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the windshield wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the
wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms to the change posi‐
tion
#
Switch the ignition on and switch off again
immediately.
#
Within around 15 seconds, press the î
button on the combination switch for approx‐
imately three seconds (/ page 94).
The wiper arms will move into the change
position.
Removing the wiper blades
#
Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐
shield.
94
Light and visibility
#
Set the wiper blade at an angle.
#
Pull the wiper blade out of the holder on the
wiper arm in the direction of the arrow.
Installing the wiper blades
#
Push the new wiper blade into the holder on
the wiper arm against the direction of the
arrow.
#
Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper
arm.
#
Fold the wiper arm onto the windshield.
Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
judgment of distances when using the
passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front-passenger
side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The
objects in view are in fact closer than they
appear.
As a result, you may misjudge the distance
between you and the road user driving
behind you, for example, when changing
lanes.
#
Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
der in order to ensure that you are
aware of the actual distance between
you and the road users driving behind
you.
Light and visibility
95
Folding the outside mirrors in/out
#
Briefly press button 2.
Resetting the outside mirrors
%
If the battery has been disconnected or com‐
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must
be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror
folding function work properly.
#
Briefly press button 2.
Adjusting the outside mirrors
#
Press button 1 or 3 to select the outside
mirror to be adjusted.
#
Press button 4 to adjust the position of the
mirror glass.
Engaging the outside mirrors
#
Vehicles without electrically folding out‐
side mirrors: manually move the outside
mirror into the correct position.
#
Vehicles with electrically folding outside
mirrors: press and hold button 2.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐
bly engage in position. The outside mirror will
now be set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors function
&
WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐
soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec‐
trolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and
causes irritation. It must not come into con‐
tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs
or clothing or be swallowed.
#
If you come into contact with electro‐
lyte, observe the following:
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek
medical attention.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, immediately rinse
them thoroughly with clean water
and seek medical attention.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out
thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing
which has been contaminated with
electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
96
Light and visibility
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐
ror on the driver's side will automatically go into
anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the
sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limits
The system will not go into anti-glare mode if:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
Reverse gear is engaged.
R
The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐
tion function
The parking position makes parking easier.
In the following situations, the front-passenger
outside mirror will swivel downwards in the
direction of the rear wheel on the front passeng‐
er's side:
R
The parking position is stored (/ page 97)
R
The front-passenger mirror is selected
R
Reverse gear is engaged
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
back to its original position in the following sit‐
uations:
R
You shift the transmission to another trans‐
mission position
R
You are traveling at speeds greater than
9 mph (15 km/h)
R
You press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side
Storing the parking position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing
#
Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button 2.
#
Engage reverse gear.
#
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
Light and visibility
97
Calling up
#
Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button 2.
#
Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
to the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror
folding function
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Autom. Mirror Folding
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Operating the sun visors
Using the single sun visor
#
Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1
down.
#
Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to
the side.
#
Vehicles with an extendable sun visor: slide
sun visor 1 horizontally as required.
98
Light and visibility
Overview of climate control systems
Notes on climate control
An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐
filter in the engine compartment must always be
used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐
tion level monitoring and the air filtration work
correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed
correctly and the filter housing in the engine
compartment is closed correctly using the cap
and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use
filters recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of the control panel for 3-zone
automatic climate control
The indicator lamps in the Ã, ¬, ¤,
g, ¿ and 0 buttons indicate that the
corresponding function is activated.
1
w Sets the temperature on the driver's
side
2
_ Sets the air distribution
3
H Sets the airflow
Switches climate control on/off
4
à Sets climate control to automatic
mode (/ page 100)
5
¬ Defrosts the windshield
6
t Calls up the air conditioning menu
7
¤ Switches the rear window heater on or
off
8
0 Activates or deactivates synchroniza‐
tion (/ page 100)
9
g Switches air-recirculation mode on/
off(/ page 101)
A
¿ Switches the A/C function on/off
(/ page 99)
B
w Sets the front passenger side tempera‐
ture
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/off
#
To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using the H button.
#
To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
the H button.
%
If climate control is switched off, the win‐
dows may fog up more quickly. Switch off
climate control only briefly.
Switching the A/C function on or off via the
control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies
the vehicle's interior air.
Climate control
99
#
Press the ¿ button.
Switch off the A/C function only briefly other‐
wise the windows may fog up more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is
not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐
trolled and maintained at a constant level by the
air supply.
#
Press the à button.
#
To switch to manual mode: press the H
or _ button.
Climate style
Climate style function
In automatic mode, you can select the following
climate style settings for the driver's and front
passenger areas:
R
FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting
R
MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting
R
DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and
draft-free setting
Adjusting the climate mode settings
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
Climate Mode
#
Select FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE.
%
To feel the effect of the climate style, the
à function must be active (/ page 100).
Overview of the air distribution settings
The symbols on the display indicate which vents
the airflow is being directed through:
¯
defroster vents
P
Center and side air vents
O
Footwell vents
S
Center, side and footwell vents
a
Defroster and footwell vents
_
All vents
b
Defroster, middle and side air vents
Activating/deactivating the climate control
synchronization function via the control
panel
Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronization function. The temperature and
air distribution setting for the driver side is adop‐
ted automatically for the front passenger side.
#
Press the 0 button.
The synchronization function is deactivated if the
settings for one of the other climate zones are
changed.
Removing condensation from the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
#
Press the ¿ button.
#
Press the à button.
#
If the windows continue to fog up: press the
¬ button.
100
Climate control
Windows fogged up on the outside
#
Switch on the windshield wipers.
#
Press the à button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
#
Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to
fresh air mode after some time.
%
If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on
air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Air vents
Setting the air vents
&
WARNING ‑ Danger of burns or frostbite
due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents.
#
Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance to
the air vents.
#
If necessary, direct the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air
vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the
following:
R
Always keep the vents and the ventilation
grille in the vehicle interior free.
R
Keep the air inlet free of deposits
(/ page 294).
#
To open or close: turn controller 1 to the
left or right.
#
To adjust the air direction (center air
vent): hold air vent 2 by the slats in the
center and move it up or down or to the left
or right.
To adjust the air direction of side air vent, hold
controller 1 and move it up or down or to the
left or right.
Climate control
101
Driving
Switching the power supply or ignition on
without starting the engine
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
Also observe the "Notes on pets in the vehicle".
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and
the SmartKey battery is not discharged.
R
The brake pedal is not depressed.
#
To switch on the power supply: press but‐
ton 1 once.
You can activate the windshield wipers, for
example.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
R
You open the driver's door.
R
You press button 1 twice more.
102
Driving and parking
#
To switch on the ignition: press button 1
twice.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the
following conditions is met:
R
You do not start the vehicle within
15 minutes.
R
The transmission is in position j or the
electric parking brake has been applied.
R
You press button 1 once.
%
You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the SmartKey in the ignition
lock (/ page 104).
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐
ton
Requirements
R
the SmartKey is located in the vehicle and
the SmartKey battery is not discharged.
#
Shift the transmission to position j or i.
#
Depress the brake pedal and press button
1 once.
#
If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-
essential consumers and press button 1
once.
#
If the vehicle still does not start and the Key
Not Detected display message also appears
in the multifunction display: start the vehicle
with the SmartKey (/ page 104).
%
You can switch off the engine while driving
by pressing button 1 for about three sec‐
onds or by pressing button 1 three times
within three seconds. Be sure to observe the
safety notes under "Driving tips"
(/ page 105).
Function of Emotion Start
#
Start the vehicle with the start/stop button
(/ page 103) and simultaneously pull one of
the steering wheel paddle shifters 1 or 2.
R
The idle speed is increased briefly when
starting the engine.
Driving and parking
103
R
The exhaust gas flaps are opened (sporty
characteristic) (/ page 109).
Starting the vehicle using the SmartKey
You can also start the vehicle with the SmartKey
in the ignition lock. The ignition lock is in the
rear stowage space in the center console.
g
To remove the SmartKey
1
To switch on the power supply
2
To switch on the ignition
3
To start the engine
#
Shift the transmission to position j or i.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and
turn to key position 3.
#
If the vehicle does not start:
R
Switch off consumers that are not
required.
R
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
R
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
again after a short waiting period.
R
Turn the SmartKey to key position 2.
The indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster light up.
R
Turn the SmartKey to key position 3.
%
You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the SmartKey. Additionally,
turn the SmartKey to key position 1 or 2 .
Breaking-in notes
To preserve the engine during the first
1,000 miles (1,500 km):
R
drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds.
R
do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h).
R
allow the engine to reach a maximum engine
speed of 4,500 rpm (4,500 rpm) only briefly.
R
drive the vehicle in drive program A.
R
change gear before the tachometer needle is
Ô of the way to the red area of the tachome‐
ter.
R
do not shift down a gear manually in order to
brake.
R
avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal past
the pressure point (kickdown).
R
only increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed after
1,000 miles (1,500 km).
104
Driving and parking
This also applies when the engine or parts of the
drivetrain have been replaced.
Please also observe the following breaking-in
notes:
R
In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐
tain distance is being driven after the vehicle
has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐
tem effectiveness is not reached until the
end of this teach-in process.
R
Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are
either new or have been replaced only ach‐
ieve optimum braking effect and grip after
several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐
pensate for the reduced braking effect by
applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on driving
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable footwear
Operation of the pedals may be restricted
due to unsuitable footwear such as:
R
Shoes with platform soles
R
Shoes with high heels
R
Slippers
#
When driving always wear suitable
shoes in order to be able to operate the
pedals safely.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when switch‐
ing off the ignition when driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety functions are restricted or no longer
available. This may affect the power steering
system and the brake force boosting, for
example.
You will then need to use considerably more
force to steer and brake.
#
Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐
ing.
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and can lead to poisoning.
#
Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
Driving and parking
105
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#
Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐
sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
cle. This is the case if the vehicle gets stuck
in snow, for example.
#
Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
engine or the stationary heater are run‐
ning.
#
Open a window on the windward side of
the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup‐
ply of fresh air.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to being under the influence of alco‐
hol and drugs while driving
Driving when under the influence of alcohol
and/or drugs is an extremely dangerous
combination. Even small quantities of alcohol
or drugs may affect your reflexes, perception
and judgment.
The probability of a serious or even fatal acci‐
dent greatly increases if you drive when
under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
#
Do not drink alcohol or take drugs while
driving, and do not allow anyone to
drive who has been drinking alcohol or
taking drugs.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
when driving, the brake system may over‐
heat.
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system may even fail.
#
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
#
Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time
while driving.
*
NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by
continuously depressing the brake pedal
#
Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐
uously whilst driving.
#
To use the braking effect of the engine,
shift to a lower gear in good time.
106
Driving and parking
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
engine when pulling away
#
Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐
ately.
#
Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
full throttle until the engine has reached
its operating temperature.
*
NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is
misfiring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐
lytic converter.
#
Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly.
#
Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#
If you engage the transmission position
h or k always depress the brake
pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
the same time.
Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads:
R
Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase
considerably or result in braking only on one
side
R
Maintain a much greater safe distance to the
vehicle in front
To remove the layer of salt:
R
Brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions
R
Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next
journey
Function of rear axle steering
Depending on the speed, rear axle steering
adapts the track of the rear axle to the position
of the front wheels. Together with the steering
input of the front wheels, this results in greater
mobility and improved stability.
Rear axle steering has the following characteris‐
tics:
R
Reduced steering effort and turning radius
resulting in reduced parking effort
R
Improved driving stability, e.g. on bends
R
More direct steering resulting in improved
control of the vehicle
Driving and parking
107
Information on the AMG ceramic high-per‐
formance composite brake system
The brake system is designed for heavy loads.
This may lead to noise when braking. This effect
can also occur after washing the vehicle.
The noise depends on the following factors:
R
Speed
R
Brake force
R
Environmental conditions, e.g. temperature
and air humidity
%
Have the brake system checked at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop after it has been
subjected to extreme loads.
ECO start/stop function
Operation of the ECO start/stop function
The engine is switched off automatically in the
following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop are met:
R
You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐
mission position h or i.
If you switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐
sion position h or i, the engine will automati‐
cally stop in the following situations:
R
You stop behind a vehicle that is pulling
away.
R
You stop at a stop sign when there is no vehi‐
cle in front of you.
R
You turn the steering wheel hard at a low
speed.
%
In transmission position k, the engine is
not switched off automatically even when
the HOLD function is switched on.
The engine is restarted automatically if:
R
You release the brake pedal in transmission
position h when the HOLD function is not
active and the vehicle does not start to
move.
R
You shift from transmission position j.
R
You release the brake pedal and the vehicle
starts to move on a gentle downhill gradient
at a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
R
You depress the accelerator pedal.
R
You permanently activate manual gearshift‐
ing.
R
You pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
R
An automatic engine start is necessary.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐
ing tone sounds. The Vehicle Ready to Drive
Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting display
message also appears in the multifunction dis‐
play. If you do not switch off the ignition, the
ignition is automatically switched off after one
minute.
108
Driving and parking
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/
stop function
#
Press display button 1.
The display button indicates current status
2 of the ECO start/stop function:
R
è OFF (red): deactivated
R
è (green): activated
R
ç (yellow): inactive
AMG Performance exhaust system
Function of the AMG Performance exhaust
system
Changing the position of the exhaust gas flaps
allows you to select the sound characteristics of
the AMG Performance exhaust system:
R
Closed exhaust gas flaps: comfort character‐
istic (balanced)
R
Open exhaust gas flaps: sporty characteristic
(powerful)
Operating the AMG Performance exhaust
system
#
Press display button 1.
The display button indicates the currently
selected sound characteristic 2:
R
Button symbol (blue): balanced
R
Button symbol (red): powerful
Driving and parking
109
Race track operation
Information on racetrack operation
%
Racetrack operation is understood as the
operation of the vehicle in extreme situa‐
tions when it is used on race tracks or
closed-off tracks.
Your vehicle may be used on both public roads
and race tracks. The vehicle operating loads dif‐
fer depending on use, which require differing
maintenance intervals.
When the vehicle is operated on a racetrack, the
component parts are subject to higher loads
than on the road.
To account for these loads, the following meas‐
ures in particular are taken as part of the main‐
tenance intervals:
R
Checking and replacing individual compo‐
nents
R
Overhauling complete assemblies after spe‐
cific periods of use
Additional checks must always be carried out on
the vehicle before and after each use on a race‐
track.
*
NOTE Damage to component parts
through a rise in temperature after oper‐
ation on a racetrack
Switching the vehicle off directly after opera‐
tion on a racetrack can lead to a continued
temperature increase of the component
parts as a result of heating while the vehicle
is stationary.
The component parts may thereby be perma‐
nently damaged in exceptional cases.
#
Do not switch off the vehicle immedi‐
ately. Carry out cool down laps at low
speed with minimal brake application.
Assemblies under strain, such as the
engine and the braking system, cool
down faster this way.
#
Always allow a Track-Check to be car‐
ried out at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center before and after use on the
racetrack.
Motorsport equipment, e.g. six-point seat belts,
are only intended for use where road traffic reg‐
ulations do not apply. This also applies to modifi‐
cations to both the suspension and aerodynamic
component parts.
You can obtain further information on servicing
your vehicle from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Notes on the characteristics of individual
vehicle assemblies
Due to specific vehicle operating loads in race‐
track operation, additional requirements must
be observed.
The following vehicle assemblies are affected in
particular:
R
Brake system
R
Wheels and tires
R
Suspension
R
Aerodynamic components
110
Driving and parking
Brake system
Notes on the brake system
The brake system of your vehicle is designed for
heavy loads. Therefore, there may be noise when
braking. The loads in the entire brake system
which occur when driving on a racetrack are sig‐
nificantly greater than those during normal oper‐
ation.
The increased brake forces and temperatures
when driving on a racetrack inherently lead to
increased wear of the brake system.
Check the condition and geometry of the brake
cover plate before using the vehicle on a race‐
track.
Observe the information on the cooling of com‐
ponents which are subject to loads when oper‐
ated on a racetrack (/ page 110).
Braking with ABS
Repeated hard braking within the ABS control
range causes higher temperatures in the brake
system than controlled braking shortly before
the ABS control limit.
Brakepad wear
The inner and outer brakepads may also suffer
"tapered wear". This could lead to poor pedal
feel. Therefore, you must also check the condi‐
tion of the brakepads before and after use on a
racetrack as part of a standard check for wear.
Brake discs
Observe the information on the cooling of com‐
ponents which are subject to strain in racetrack
operation (/ page 110).
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the AMG
ceramic high-performance composite braking
system is installed in your vehicle. The assess‐
ment of wear must therefore be carried out
using a special measurement procedure. The
brakes are measured using the current condition
of the ceramic composite material as a criteria
for assessing the wear instead of assessing the
residual thickness.
Depending on the type of brake disc, the follow‐
ing are combinations used to measure the wear
of the brake discs:
R
Carbon-ceramic brake disc:
-
Visual assessment of the brake disc for
mechanical damage
-
Wear measurement using the indicator
field method; alternatively using the Pro‐
ceq Carboteq
®
measuring device (e.g. in
the AMG Performance Center or at AMG
Trackdays)
R
Gray cast iron brake disc:
-
Visual check
-
Crack test
-
Wear thickness test
The ventilation holes on gray cast iron friction
rings of standard brake discs in particular could
become blocked by brake dust. Therefore, check
the ventilation holes before using the vehicle on
a racetrack and clean them if necessary. If nec‐
essary, also clean the drilled holes.
Brake fluid
Check the following properties of the brake fluid
before each use on a racetrack:
R
Boiling point
R
Fill level
Driving and parking
111
When driving on a racetrack, make sure that the
brake fluid is not more than 12 months old.
Brake caliper, brake hoses and brake lines
Check the following for damage each time
before driving the vehicle on a racetrack:
R
The dust boots on the brake calipers
R
The brake hoses and brake lines
Replace them if necessary.
Brake cooling
Special air deflectors and channels are installed
on the front and rear axles so that the brakes
are cooled sufficiently. They supply the brake
discs with cooling air. Check that they are in per‐
fect condition and correctly installed each time
before driving the vehicle on a racetrack. Exces‐
sive wear can be caused by driving over curbs,
for instance. For this reason, regularly check
they are all complete and installed securely.
In addition, check that the air guide plates are
seated securely and clean before and after driv‐
ing the vehicle on a racetrack.
Observe the information on the cooling of com‐
ponents which are subject to loads when driving
on a racetrack (/ page 110).
Wheels and tires
Notes on wheels
*
NOTE Restrictions relating to suspension
settings and driving characteristics
Driving with wheels with differing dimensions
of the following features could lead to restric‐
tions relating to the suspension settings and
driving characteristics of the vehicle:
R
Diameter
R
Wheel offset
#
Only use the wheels provided by
Mercedes-AMG for use on a racetrack.
#
Only use wheels with approved geome‐
try.
Do not use slick tires. Suspension and body
components may otherwise be subjected to
excessively high loads.
Observe the following notes on changing a
wheel:
R
Change the wheels after 9,320 miles
(15,000 km) on a racetrack at the latest.
R
To ensure concentricity and lateral trueness,
check the wheel contact surface for damage
when changing a wheel. These should also
be measured in the event of imbalance.
The wheel bolts are subjected to high wear when
used on a racetrack. To ensure the wheels are
bolted securely on a permanent basis, replace
the wheel bolts in the following situations:
R
After approximately 620 miles (1,000 km) on
a racetrack.
R
After ten bolting procedures at the latest.
Notes on tires
&
WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐
aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss.
As a result, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
112
Driving and parking
#
Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires
immediately.
Check the tires for damage and the correct tire
tread depth both before and after use on a race‐
track. Only then is it safe to drive on a racetrack
and on public roads.
As a result of the driving style and at high ambi‐
ent temperatures, when driving on a racetrack it
may be necessary to compensate for the
increase in pressure in warm tires by releasing
air. Even for warm tires, the specified tire pres‐
sure may only be exceeded by max. 0.5 bar.
After the tires have cooled down again, you must
readjust the tire pressure in accordance with the
specifications in order to drive on public roads.
Suspension
Suspension settings
The factory setting provides a good compromise
for driving on public roads and on a racetrack.
Vehicle measurements
Even small changes to the suspension settings
alter the driving characteristics of the vehicle. To
ensure optimal driving characteristics, the speci‐
fied values and tolerances of the individual sus‐
pension settings must be complied with. The
driving characteristics of the vehicle may other‐
wise be undesirable.
Vehicle measurements are required in the follow‐
ing situations:
R
The vehicle height has changed in relation to
the optimized setting.
R
The vehicle is frequently subjected to very
high loads, e.g. when driving over curbs.
Therefore, check the vehicle height at regular
intervals and, if necessary, perform vehicle
measurements.
Notes on suspension components
Despite regular checks, and regardless of
whether the relevant suspension components
are in good condition, the following components
must be replaced after a certain amount of use
on the racetrack:
R
Wheel bolts (/ page 112)
R
Wheel hubs including the wheel bearings
Notes on engine oil
Check the engine oil level before operating in
racetrack mode.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
between the following drive programs:
R
o (Slippery): optimized pulling away and
driving characteristics in wintry and slippery
road conditions
R
= (Individual): individual settings
Driving and parking
113
R
A (Comfort): comfortable and economi‐
cal driving style
R
C (Sport): sporty driving style
R
B (Sport Plus): particularly sporty driving
style
R
I (RACE): driving like on a race track
The I (RACE) drive program may not be
used on normal roads. I (RACE) must only
be activated and used on dedicated race cir‐
cuits, not on public roads.
Mercedes-AMG recommends selecting the drive
program A when in city traffic or stop-and-go
traffic.
Depending on the drive program selected the fol‐
lowing vehicle characteristics will change:
R
Drive:
-
Engine and transmission management
-
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
AMG Dynamics:
-
The four agility functions Basic,
Advanced, Pro and Master are automati‐
cally selected depending on the drive pro‐
gram.
-
The steering, shift timing point and stabi‐
lization functions are adapted to the
selected drive program.
-
When ESP
®
is activated, agility function
Pro is selected in drive program I
RACE. The Master function is automati‐
cally selected when ESP
®
is deactivated.
R
Position of the exhaust gas flaps
R
Suspension
R
Steering
R
Availability of glide mode
R
The I(RACE) drive program has the fol‐
lowing properties:
-
The vehicle exhibits driving characteris‐
tics suited for race circuits.
-
All vehicle systems are designed for maxi‐
mum sportiness.
-
The automatic transmission shifts up
later.
-
The chassis has a particularly tight sus‐
pension and damping system.
-
Glide mode is not available.
-
The sporty sound characteristic of the
exhaust system is activated.
%
You can call up vehicle characteristics via
the Performance menu in the on-board com‐
puter (/ page 166).
You can also change the following vehicle char‐
acteristics using the buttons in the center con‐
sole:
R
Position of the exhaust gas flaps
R
Suspension
114
Driving and parking
Selecting the drive program
#
Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
or backwards.
The selected drive program appears in dis‐
play 2 and in the multifunction display in
the instrument cluster.
Configuring drive program I
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
5
Individual
#
Select the individual setting.
Switching the operation feedback for drive
program on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Switch Notification for User on O or off ª.
When this function is active, a corresponding
message is shown in the media display when
a drive program is selected with the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Select Vehicle Data.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Select Engine Data.
%
The values for engine output and engine tor‐
que may deviate from the nominal values.
Items that can influence this are, for exam‐
ple:
R
Sea level
R
Fuel grade
R
Outside temperature
Driving and parking
115
Automatic transmission
E-SELECT selector lever
Function of the E-SELECT selector lever
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic.
R
operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, children could also set the vehi‐
cle in motion, for example, by:
R
releasing the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position j.
R
starting the engine
#
Never leave children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
#
Keep the SmartKey out of the reach of
children.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#
If you engage the transmission position
h or k always depress the brake
pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
the same time.
Use the E-SELECT selector lever to change the
transmission position. The current transmission
position is displayed in the multifunction display.
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R
#
Depress the brake pedal and push the E-
SELECT selector lever upwards past the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows k
in the multifunction display.
116
Driving and parking
Engaging neutral N
#
Depress the brake pedal and push the E-
SELECT selector lever up or down to the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows i
in the multifunction display.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will
allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or tow it away.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral ii even if the ignition is
switched off:
#
Start the vehicle.
#
Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i.
#
Release the brake pedal.
#
Switch off the ignition.
%
If you then exit the vehicle leaving the
SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐
mission remains in neutral i.
Engaging park position P
#
Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 122).
#
Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is
stationary.
#
When the vehicle is stationary, press the j
button.
Park position is only engaged when the j
transmission position display is shown in the
multifunction display. If no j transmission
position display appears, secure the vehicle
to prevent it from rolling away.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one
of the following conditions is met:
R
You switch off the ignition when the vehicle
is stationary and the transmission is in posi‐
tion h or k.
R
You open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low
speed and the transmission is in position h
or k.
%
To maneuver with an open driver's door,
open the driver's door while stationary and
engage transmission position h or k
again.
Engaging drive position D
#
Depress the brake pedal and pull the E-
SELECT selector lever back past the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows h
in the multifunction display.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐
sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐
cally. This depends on the following factors:
R
The selected drive program
R
The position of the accelerator pedal
R
The driving speed
Notes on the double-clutch function
The double-clutch function is active when chang‐
ing down in all drive programs. The double-
clutch function reduces load change reactions
and supports sporty driving. The acoustic per‐
ception of the double-clutch function changes
depending on the drive program.
Driving and parking
117
Rocking the vehicle free
Rocking the vehicle free can help to free a vehi‐
cle that has become trapped in slush or snow.
To rock the vehicle free, move the E-SELECT
selector lever upwards and downwards past the
point of resistance in order to switch between
transmission positions h and k(/ page 116).
%
The maximum design speed when switching
between h and k is 6 mph (9 km/h).
Manual gearshifting
#
To activate/deactivate: press display but‐
ton 1.
The display button displays the currently
selected gear setting 2:
R
M (red): manual gearshifting
R
D (blue): automatic transmission
%
To permanently shift the gears manually in
drive program = using the steering wheel
paddle shifters, select the M (Manual) set‐
ting for the transmission.
*
NOTE Damage to the engine due to shift‐
ing up too late
The automatic transmission does not shift up
in manual mode even when the engine's lim‐
iting speed is reached.
The fuel supply is interrupted in order to pre‐
vent the engine from overrevving.
#
Shift up before the engine speed rea‐
ches the red area in the tachometer.
118
Driving and parking
#
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter 2.
#
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter 1.
If the engine speed is too high or too low, you
cannot change gear using the steering wheel
paddle shifters. In this case, segments 1 light
up red.
Gearshift recommendation
The gearshift recommendation assists you in
adopting an economical driving style.
#
If gearshift recommendation message 1 is
shown on the multifunction display, shift to
the recommended gear.
%
Gearshift recommendation is active only if
you have activated manual gearshifting with
the button on the center console.
Using kickdown
#
Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐
erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
During kickdown, you cannot change gears using
the steering wheel paddle shifters. The auto‐
matic transmission shifts up to the next gear
when the maximum engine speed is reached to
protect the engine from overrevving.
%
If you have activated manual gearshifting
with the button in the center console, the
transmission does not react to the kick‐
down.
Glide mode function
With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode
helps you to reduce fuel consumption.
Glide mode is characterized by the following:
R
The combustion engine is switched off. All of
the vehicle functions remain active.
R
The J symbol will appear on the multi‐
function display.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐
tions are met:
R
The ECO start/stop function is activated.
R
Drive program = is selected with the
drive setting "Moderate" or "Reduced".
R
The speed is within a suitable range.
Driving and parking
119
R
The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.
R
You are no longer depressing the accelerator
or brake pedal.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the
conditions is no longer met.
Refueling
Refueling the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
#
Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided.
#
Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while
refueling the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#
Do not inhale fuel vapor.
#
Keep children away from fuel.
#
Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#
Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
#
If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
#
If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
#
Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
&
WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can create sparks and
thereby ignite fuel vapors.
#
Before opening the fuel filler cap or tak‐
ing hold of the pump nozzle, touch the
metallic body of the vehicle.
This discharges any electrostatic charge
that may have built up.
#
Do not get into the vehicle again during
the refueling process.
Otherwise, electrostatic charge could
build up again.
*
NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a gasoline engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#
The RON requirement is located in the
fuel filler flap.
120
Driving and parking
#
Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your
vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.
Never refuel using any of the following fuels:
R
Diesel
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
R
Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R
Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
#
Do not switch the ignition on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
*
NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐
cles with a gasoline engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the
wrong fuel:
R
Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.
*
NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused
by overfilled fuel tanks
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.
*
NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
remove the fuel pump nozzle
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.
Requirements
R
The vehicle is unlocked (/ page 53).
%
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 353).
Driving and parking
121
1
Fuel filler flap
2
Bracket for the fuel filler cap
3
Tire pressure table
4
QR code for rescue card
5
Fuel type
#
Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1.
#
Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and
remove it.
#
Insert the fuel filler cap into bracket 2.
#
Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
#
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
#
Close fuel filler flap 1.
Parking
Parking the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
caused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐
cle rolling away.
If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐
ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled
way even at a slight downhill gradient.
#
Ensure that the parked vehicle is always
properly secured against rolling away as
follows:
R
On uphill or downhill gradients, turn
the front wheels so that the vehicle
rolls towards the curb if it starts
moving.
R
Apply the parking brake.
R
Switch the transmission to position
j.
&
WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot
exhaust system parts
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system or
exhaust gas flow.
#
Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
#
In particular, do not park on dry grass‐
land or harvested grain fields.
122
Driving and parking
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it
rolling away
#
Always secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing away.
#
Bring the vehicle to a standstill by applying
the brake pedal.
#
On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front
wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the
curb if it starts moving.
#
Apply the electric parking brake.
#
Engage transmission position j in a station‐
ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied
(/ page 117).
#
Switch off the engine and the ignition by
pressing button 1.
#
Release the service brake slowly.
#
Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door
opener
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
Driving and parking
123
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and can lead to poisoning.
#
Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&
WARNING Risk of injury when opening
or closing a door with the garage door
opener
When you operate or program the door with
the integrated garage door opener, people in
the range of movement of the door may
become trapped or struck by the door.
#
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody
is within the range of movement of the
door.
Only operate the following doors using the
garage door opener:
R
Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea‐
ture.
R
Doors which conform to the current U.S.
safety standards.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been parked outside the
garage and outside the range of movement
of the door.
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The ignition is switched on.
%
The garage door opener function is always
available when the ignition is switched on.
#
Check if the transmission frequency of the
remote control has the frequency range of
280 to 868 MHz.
Radio equipment approval number:
R
NZLMUAHL5 (USA)
R
4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)
124
Driving and parking
#
Press and hold button 2, 3 or 4 that you
wish to program.
Indicator lamp 1 flashes yellow.
%
It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐
cator lamp flashes yellow.
#
Release the previously pressed button.
Indicator lamp 1 continues to flash yellow.
#
Point remote control 5 from a distance of
1 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards buttons
2, 3 or 4.
#
Press and hold button 6 of remote control
5 until one of the following signals appears:
R
Indicator lamp 1 lights up green contin‐
uously. Programming is complete.
R
Indicator lamp 1 flashes green. Pro‐
gramming was successful. Additionally,
synchronization of the rolling code with
the door system must also be carried out.
#
If indicator lamp 1 does not light up or flash
green: repeat the procedure.
#
Release all of the buttons.
%
The remote control for the door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the
garage door opener.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Requirements:
R
The door system uses a rolling code.
R
The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or door drive.
R
The vehicle as well as persons and objects,
are located outside the range of movement
of the door.
#
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds.
#
Press previously programmed button 2, 3
or 4 repeatedly until the door closes.
When the door closes, programming is com‐
pleted.
Driving and parking
125
%
Please also read the operating instructions
for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the
remote control
#
Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5 is supported.
#
Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
#
Hold remote control 5 at various angles at
a distance between 1 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm)
in front of the inside rearview mirror. You
should test every position for at least 25 sec‐
onds before trying another position.
#
Hold remote control 5 at the same angles
at various distances in front of the inside
rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐
tion for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
#
Note that some remote controls transmit
only for a limited period, press button 6 on
remote control 5 again before transmission
ends.
#
Align the antenna line of the door opener unit
with the remote control.
%
Support and additional information on pro‐
gramming:
R
On the toll free HomeLink
®
Hotline on
1-800-355-3515.
R
On the Internet at http://
www.homelink.com/mercedes.
Opening or closing the door
Requirements
R
The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
#
Press and hold buttons 2, 3 or 4 until
the door opens or closes.
#
If indicator lamp 1 flashes yellow after
approximately 20 seconds: press and hold
the previously pressed button again until the
door opens or closes.
126
Driving and parking
Clearing the garage door opener memory
#
Press and hold buttons 2 and 4.
Indicator lamp 1 lights up yellow.
#
If indicator lamp 1 flashes green: release
buttons 2 and 4.
The entire memory has been deleted.
Radio equipment approval numbers for the
garage door opener
Radio equipment approval numbers
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,
isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐
ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo
tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas
operando em caráter primário.
Para maiores informações acessar
www.anatel.gov.br
Radio equipment approval numbers
CountryRadio type approval number
EgyptTAC.2511151293.WIR
Andorra CE
Australia R-NZ
Barbados MED1578
Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74
European
Union
CE
GibraltarCE
Iceland CE
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/299
CanadaIC: 4112A-MUAHL5
Kuwait CE
Liechten‐
stein
CE
Driving and parking
127
Country Radio type approval number
Mexico RCPGEMU15-0448
Monaco CE
New Zea‐
land
R-NZ
NorwayCE
Russian
Federa‐
tion
Not required
Saudi Ara‐
bia
TA 10525
Switzer‐
land
CE
South
Africa
TA-2015/1386
Turkey Not required
Country Radio type approval number
United
Arab Emi‐
rates
ER41849/15
Dealer No: DA35176/14
United
States
FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5
Further information on the declaration of con‐
formity for wireless vehicle components
(/ page 21).
Electric parking brake
Electric parking brake function (applying
automatically)
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
128
Driving and parking
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐
mission is in position j and one of the follow‐
ing conditions is fulfilled:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
%
To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake.
In the following situations, the electric parking
brake is also applied:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill.
R
The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐
tionary.
R
Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
This is the case if one of the following conditions
is also fulfilled:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
R
There is a system malfunction.
R
The power supply is insufficient.
R
The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the
red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp
appears in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Electric parking brake function (releasing
automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the
following conditions are fulfilled:
R
The driver's door is closed.
R
The engine is running.
R
The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you
shift from transmission position j to h or
k when on level ground with the driver's
door closed.
R
If the transmission is in position k, the tail‐
gate must be closed.
R
The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow‐
ing conditions must be fulfilled:
R
You shift from transmission position j.
R
You have previously driven at speeds greater
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Driving and parking
129
When the electric parking brake is released, the
red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking
brake manually
Applying
#
Push handle 1.
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐
tor lamp appears in the instrument cluster.
%
The electric parking brake is only securely
applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐
ously.
Releasing
#
Switch on the ignition.
#
Pull handle 1.
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐
tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking
#
Press and hold handle 1.
As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please
Release Parking Brake message is displayed.
When the vehicle has been braked to a
standstill, the electric parking brake is
applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can‐
ada) indicator lamp appears in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended
period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, it may suffer disuse damage.
The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐
aged by heavy discharging.
%
Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐
vering the vehicle. The driving systems are aids
and do not relieve you of your responsibility per‐
taining to road traffic law. Pay attention to the
traffic conditions at all times and intervene
when necessary. Be aware of the limitations
regarding the safe use of these systems.
130
Driving and parking
Information on radar and ultrasonic sensors
Some driving and driving safety systems use
radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area
in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depend‐
ing on the vehicle's equipment).
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar
sensors are integrated behind the bumpers
and/or behind the Mercedes star. The ultrasonic
sensors are located in the front and rear bump‐
ers. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush
(/ page 299). The sensors must not be cov‐
ered, for example by cycle racks, overhanging
loads, stickers, foil or foils to protect against
stone chipping. Additional license plate brackets
can likewise impair the function of the ultrasonic
sensors. In the event of damage to the bumpers
or radiator grill, or following a collision impacting
the bumpers or radiator grill, have the function
of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. If the sensors are damaged, some
driving systems and driving safety systems may
no longer function properly.
Overview of driving systems and driving
safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving systems and driving safety
systems:
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(/ page 131)
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 139)
R
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
(/ page 148)
R
Active Brake Assist (/ page 135)
R
Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 158)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 154)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 132)
R
Hill Start Assist (/ page 143)
R
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 135)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(/ page 132)
R
HOLD function (/ page 143)
R
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 149)
R
Front and rear view camera (/ page 152)
R
RACE START (/ page 145)
R
Cruise control (/ page 137)
R
Blind Spot Assist (/ page 157)
R
Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 156)
Function of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the
brake pressure in critical driving situations:
R
During braking, e.g. at full brake application
or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are
prevented from locking.
R
Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and can serve as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
Driving and parking
131
System limits
R
ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 mph
(8 km/h).
R
ABS may be impaired or may not function if a
malfunction has occurred and the yel‐
low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐
uously in the instrument cluster after the
engine is started.
Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)
&
WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐
tem)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased.
#
Depress the brake pedal with full force
in emergency braking situations. ABS
prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS supports your emergency braking situation
with additional brake force.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
activated:
R
BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐
sure.
R
BAS can shorten the braking distance.
R
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Functions of ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram)
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is
malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry
out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other
driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
You can select between the following modes of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
ON
R
ESP
®
SPORT
R
ESP
®
OFF
Characteristics when ESP
®
is activated
ESP
®
monitors and improves driving stability and
traction, particularly in the following situations:
R
When pulling away on a wet or slippery road‐
way.
R
When braking.
ESP
®
can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in
the following ways:
R
One or more wheels are braked.
R
The engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
ESP
®
is activated every time the engine is star‐
ted regardless of whether ESP
®
was in ESP
®
SPORT or deactivated before the engine was
switched off.
132
Driving and parking
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp flashes in the
instrument cluster, one or several vehicle wheels
has reached its grip limit:
R
Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
R
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum‐
stances.
R
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
is necessary.
Characteristics when ESP
®
SPORT is activa‐
ted
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
SPORT is used incorrectly
When you activate ESP
®
SPORT, there is an
increased risk of skidding and having an acci‐
dent.
#
Activate ESP
®
SPORT only in the cir‐
cumstances described below.
Select ESP
®
SPORT when the vehicle's own
oversteering and understeering characteristics
are desired, e.g. on designated roads.
Driving with ESP
®
SPORT or with ESP
®
deactiva‐
ted requires an extremely qualified and experi‐
enced driver.
If ESP
®
SPORT is activated and one or more
wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning
lamp on the instrument cluster flashes. ESP
®
then only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited
degree.
ESP
®
SPORT also has the following characteris‐
tics:
R
ESP
®
only improves driving stability to a limi‐
ted degree.
R
ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
R
The engine's torque is only restricted to a
limited degree and the drive wheels can spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut‐
ting action for better traction on loose surfa‐
ces.
R
ESP
®
continues to provide assistance when
the brakes are firmly applied.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is
deactivated
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
cannot carry
out vehicle stabilization.
#
ESP
®
should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
When ESP
®
is deactivated, the å ESP
®
OFF
warning lamp and the ESP OFF message light up
continuously in the instrument cluster.
Deactivating ESP
®
has the following effects:
R
Driving stability will no longer be improved.
R
The drive wheels could spin.
R
ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
%
Even when ESP
®
is deactivated, you are still
assisted by ESP
®
when braking hard.
It may be best to activate ESP
®
SPORT or deacti‐
vate ESP
®
in the following situations:
R
When using snow chains.
Driving and parking
133
R
In deep snow.
R
On sand or gravel.
%
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
action, which enhances traction.
%
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp lights up continu‐
ously even when ESP
®
is activated, ESP
®
is not
available due to a malfunction.
Observe any information which may be displayed
in the instrument cluster:
R
Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 405)
R
Display messages
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
.
ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
intervening in the following ways:
R
The drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin.
R
More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Activating/deactivating ESP
®
(Electronic Sta‐
bility Program)
#
To activate ESP
®
SPORT: press and hold
display button 1 until the road in button
symbol 2 lights up yellow.
The ESP SPORT message is shown in the
instrument cluster and the å and Æ
warning lamps light up.
#
To deactivate ESP
®
: press and hold display
button 1 until the road in button symbol 2
lights up red.
The ESP OFF message is shown in the instru‐
ment cluster and the å and ESP OFF
warning lamps light up.
#
To activate ESP
®
: press and hold display
button 1 until the road in button symbol 2
lights up blue.
The å and Æ warning lamps in the
instrument cluster go out.
When the ÷ symbol 2 is shown with a red !
on display button 1, ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Observe the information on warning lamps and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster.
134
Driving and parking
Function of EBD (electronic brake force dis‐
tribution)
EBD is characterized by the following:
R
Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels.
R
Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of:
R
Distance warning function
R
Autonomous braking function
R
Situation-dependent braking assistance
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with vehicles or to reduce the
effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐
sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis‐
tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument
cluster.
If you do not react to the visual or acoustic warn‐
ing, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti‐
cal situations.
In especially critical situations, Active Brake
Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly.
In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone
occur simultaneously with the braking applica‐
tion.
If you apply the brake yourself in a situation
detected as critical by Active Brake Assist, or
apply the brake during autonomous braking, sit‐
uation-dependent braking assistance occurs.
The brake pressure increases up to maximum
full-stop braking if necessary.
If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered,
additional preventive measures for occupant
protection (PRE-SAFE
®
) may also be initiated, if
the vehicle is equipped with these.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
limited detection performance of Active
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
R
Give a warning or brake without reason
R
Not give a warning or not brake
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only
an aid. The driver is responsible for
maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for
braking in good time.
#
Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐
essary.
Observe the system limitations of Active Brake
Assist.
Driving and parking
135
The individual subfunctions are available in
the following speed ranges:
Distance warning function
The distance warning function issues a warning
at speeds:
R
From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or
pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone
sounds and the L distance warning lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐
ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation
allows this.
The distance warning function can aid you in
the following situations with an intermittent
warning tone and a warning lamp:
Vehicles traveling in
front
Up to approx.
155 mph (250 km/h)
Stationary vehicles Up to approx. 44 mph
(70 km/h)
Autonomous braking function
If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above
approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autono‐
mous braking function may intervene in the
following situations:
Vehicles without
Active Distance
Assist
DISTRONIC
Vehicles with
Active Distance
Assist
DISTRONIC
Vehi‐
cles
travel‐
ing in
front
Up to approx.
65 mph
(105 km/h)
Up to approx.
124 mph
(200 km/h)
Sta‐
tio‐
nary
vehi‐
cles
Up to approx.
31 mph
(50 km/h)
Up to approx.
31 mph
(50 km/h)
Situation-dependent braking assistance
Situation-dependent braking assistance may
intervene at speeds above approximately
4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles traveling in
front
Up to approx.
155 mph (250 km/h)
Stationary vehicles Up to approx. 44 mph
(70 km/h)
Canceling a brake application of Active Brake
Assist
You can cancel a brake application by Active
Brake Assist at any time by:
R
Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or
with kickdown.
R
Releasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐
cation when one of the following conditions is
fulfilled:
R
You maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
R
There is no longer a risk of collision.
136
Driving and parking
R
An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
ambient light.
R
If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered.
R
If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐
ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong
radar reflections in parking garages.
R
If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed.
R
Full system performance is not available for a
few seconds after switching on the ignition
or after driving off.
R
In complex traffic situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identified.
R
For vehicles if they move quickly into the
sensor detection range.
R
On bends with a tight radius.
Setting Active Brake Assist
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Active Brake Assist
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
%
It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated.
%
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the status bar of the
multifunction display.
Speed control cruise control
Function of cruise control
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value
selected by the driver.
If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the
stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking,
cruise control will resume speed regulation back
to the stored speed.
Cruise control is operated using the correspond‐
ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any
speed above 19 mph (30 km/h) up to the maxi‐
mum speed.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Cruise control is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in lane.
Displays on the multifunction display
The status of cruise control and the stored
speed are shown in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
137
1
Cruise control is selected
2
Speed is saved, cruise control is deactivated
3
Speed is saved, cruise control is activated
%
The segments between the stored speed and
the end of the segment display light up in
the speedometer.
System limits
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. Take particular
note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By
doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak‐
ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐
ing and wearing too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐
tions:
R
In traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on
winding roads.
R
On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
the drive wheels to lose traction and the
vehicle could then skid.
R
If you are driving when visibility is poor.
Operating cruise control
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to stored
speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is
lower than your current speed, the vehicle
decelerates.
#
Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements:
R
ESP
®
must be activated, but not intervening.
R
The driven speed is at least 19 mph
(30 km/h).
R
The transmission is in position h.
#
To activate cruise control: press rocker
switch 1 up.
138
Driving and parking
#
To activate cruise control: press rocker
switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-).
The current speed is stored and maintained
by the vehicle.
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (RES).
The last stored speed is called up and main‐
tained by the vehicle.
If the last stored speed has previously been
deleted, the currently driven speed is stored.
%
When you switch off the vehicle, the last
speed stored is cleared.
#
To increase/reduce speed: press rocker
switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the
pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
5 mph (10 km/h).
or
#
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
#
Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+).
#
To deactivate cruise control:
press rocker switch 3 down (CNCL).
#
To deactivate cruise control: press rocker
switch 1 down.
%
If you brake, deactivate ESP
®
or if ESP
®
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the
set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in
front are detected, the set distance is main‐
tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a
halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐
ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and
the set speed. The speed (in the range between
19 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h))
and the distance to the vehicle in front are set
and saved on the steering wheel.
Other features of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC:
R
Adjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel efficient, com‐
fortable or dynamic) (/ page 113)
R
Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if
the turn signal indicator is switched on to
change to the overtaking lane.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for keeping a safe dis‐
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed
and for braking in good time.
Driving and parking
139
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
ambient light.
R
The windshield in the area of the camera is
dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered.
R
If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R
In parking garages or on roads with steep
uphill or downhill gradients.
R
If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐
erating can cause one or several wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
these situations.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐
ation or braking by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐
erate or brake in the following cases, for
example:
R
If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
R
If the stored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slower than the
currently driven speed.
R
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects.
#
Always carefully observe the traffic con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
#
Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient deceleration by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and
acoustic warning.
#
In these cases, adjust your speed and
keep a sufficient distance.
#
Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if detection
function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react or has a limited reaction:
R
when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes
140
Driving and parking
R
to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
R
to complex traffic conditions
R
to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor
intervene in such situations.
#
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been started.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
R
ESP
®
is activated and is not intervening.
R
The transmission is in position h.
R
All the doors are closed.
R
The check of the radar sensor system has
been successfully completed (vehicle travel‐
ing faster than 12 mph (20 km/h))
R
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being
used to park the vehicle or to exit from a
parking space.
R
The vehicle does not skid.
#
To activate/deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC: press button 1.
#
To activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: press rocker switch 3 up (SET
+) or down (SET-), or press rocker switch 4
up (RES). Remove your foot from the acceler‐
ator pedal.
The current speed is stored and maintained
by the vehicle.
or
#
To activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC with a stored speed: press
rocker switch 4 up (RES). Remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
#
To pull away with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
brake pedal and activate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC.
#
Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
or
#
Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
firmly.
The functions of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Driving and parking
141
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being
activated when you leave the driver's
seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
is being braked by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
#
Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away
before you leave the driver's seat.
#
To deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: press rocker switch 4 down
(CNCL).
#
To increase/reduce speed: press rocker
switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the
pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to the pressure point and hold.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
5 mph (10 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) and hold beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 5 mph (10 km/h).
#
To increase or reduce the specified dis‐
tance from the vehicle in front: press
rocker switch 2 up or down.
Overview of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC displays in the instrument clus‐
ter
Assistant display
1
Vehicle in front
2
Distance indicator
3
Set specified distance
142
Driving and parking
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC status dis‐
play
1
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected,
set specified distance (number of segments
below the vehicle)
2
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC deactiva‐
ted, speed stored
3
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed stored, no vehicle detected (gray vehi‐
cle symbol)
4
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed stored, vehicle detected (green vehi‐
cle symbol)
Speedometer
The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom‐
eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front is less
than the stored speed, the segments in the
speedometer light up. The deactivation of Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera‐
tions to the stored speed and the distance to be
maintained, are displayed in the control feed‐
back of the multifunction display on a single line.
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short
time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
R
The transmission is in position h or k.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll
away.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds the vehicle and it can roll away.
#
Therefore, swiftly move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐
cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
HOLD function
HOLD function
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐
still without requiring you to depress the brake
pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐
bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains
with the driver.
Driving and parking
143
System limits
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
assistance when driving and is not a sufficient
means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling
away when stationary.
R
The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being activated when you
leave the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD
function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle
can roll away in the following situations:
R
If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply.
R
If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
#
Always deactivate the HOLD function
and secure the vehicle against rolling
away before leaving the vehicle.
*
NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched
on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐
tain situations:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
HOLD function
R
Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit‐
uations:
#
During towing
#
In a car wash
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is stationary.
R
The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened.
R
The engine is running or has been automati‐
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐
vated.
R
The transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function
#
Depress the brake pedal and after a short
time quickly depress further until the ë
display appears in the multifunction display.
#
Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function
#
Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or
#
Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐
play disappears from the multifunction dis‐
play.
The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐
ing situations:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
R
The transmission is switched to position j.
144
Driving and parking
R
The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
the transmission position j or by the electric
parking brake:
R
The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened.
R
The vehicle is switched off.
R
There is a malfunction in the system or the
power supply is insufficient.
RACE START
Function of RACE START
RACE START enables optimal vehicle accelera‐
tion from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-
grip road surface is required, the tires and vehi‐
cle must also be in good condition.
%
RACE START is only available after the vehi‐
cle has been broken in (/ page 104).
%
RACE START may not be used on normal
roads. RACE START must only be activated
and used on dedicated race circuits, not on
public roads.
Be sure to read the safety notes and infor‐
mation on ESP
®
(/ page 132).
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and having
an accident from wheels spinning
When you use RACE START, individual wheels
could spin and you could lose control of the
vehicle.
Depending on the ESP
®
mode selected, there
is an increased risk of skidding and having an
accident.
#
Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
Activating RACE START
Requirements:
R
The doors, the hood and the tailgate are
closed.
R
The engine is running and the transmission
and engine are at normal operating tempera‐
ture.
R
The steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
R
The vehicle is on level ground.
R
The vehicle is stationary, the brake pedal is
depressed (left foot) and the parking brake is
released.
R
The transmission is in position h.
R
One of the drive programs C, B or
I is selected (/ page 113).
#
Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
The engine speed increases.
%
If the activation conditions are not fulfilled,
RACE START cannot be activated. The RACE
START Not Possible See Operator's Manual
message appears in the multifunction dis‐
play.
#
The RACE START Release brake to start mes‐
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
145
%
In this phase you can adjust RACE START
depending on the road conditions: you can
vary the engine speed by pulling on one of
the steering wheel paddle shifters. The seg‐
ments in the multifunction display flicker
rapidly.
%
If the brake pedal is not released after a
short while, RACE START is canceled. The
RACE START Canceled message appears in
the multifunction display.
#
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐
tion. The RACE START Active message
appears in the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle rea‐
ches a speed of approximately 31 mph
(50 km/h).
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal during RACE
START or if any of the activation conditions are
no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Canceled
message appears in the multifunction display.
%
After using it several times in short succes‐
sion, RACE START is unavailable until a cer‐
tain distance has been driven.
Function of the AMG steering-wheel buttons
The AMG steering-wheel buttons include two
additional control elements on the steering
wheel.
You can assign two vehicle functions of your
choice to the left control element. You can
change between the available functions by
pressing display buttons 2 repeatedly. The cur‐
rently selected functions are displayed in display
buttons 2.
The following functions are available:
R
ESP
®
(/ page 132)
R
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
(/ page 148)
R
AMG Performance exhaust system
(/ page 109)
R
ECO start/stop function (/ page 108)
R
Manual gearshifting (/ page 118)
R
Rear wing (/ page 147)
R
Front and rear view camera (/ page 152)
If you have assigned a function to one of display
buttons 2, you can operate this function with
corresponding button 1.
The assignment of display buttons 2 remains
stored even after a new engine start, but the
operating status of the respective function is
reset to the basic setting.
You can change between the drive programs
with stabilizer bar actuator 3. The selected
drive program appears in display button 4. By
pressing display button 4, you can directly
146
Driving and parking
access the drive program = (Individual)
(/ page 113).
Rear wing
Function of the rear wing
The rear wing improves the vehicle's driving sta‐
bility and automatically retracts and extends
while the vehicle is in motion.
Vehicles with the AMG Aerodynamic package are
equipped with a fixed rear wing (/ page 148).
Depending on which drive program has been
selected, the rear wing automatically extends at
a speed greater than 44 mph (70 km/h).
Depending on the drive program, the rear wing
automatically retracts below a speed of approx‐
imately 50 mph (80 km/h).
You can retract and extend the rear wing man‐
ually for cleaning (/ page 147).
Extending and retracting the rear wing for
cleaning
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when extending and retracting the rear
wing manually
When you extend or retract the rear wing
manually, body parts may become trapped.
#
Ensure that there are no people in the
sweep of the rear wing when extending
or retracting the rear wing.
#
If someone becomes trapped during
retraction of the rear wing, press the
display button again immediately.
The rear wing will then extend again.
*
NOTE Damage to the rear wing when
washing the vehicle in a car wash
If the rear wing is extended, it may be dam‐
aged when the vehicle is washed in a car
wash.
#
Only extend the rear wing if washing the
car by hand.
#
Before entering a car wash, ensure that
the rear wing is retracted.
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
The tailgate is closed.
#
To extend: press display button 1.
Driving and parking
147
#
To retract: press and hold display button 1.
The rear wing will extend or retract.
Display button symbol 2 and its color indi‐
cate the following positions of the rear wing:
R
rear wing retracted (blue)
R
rear wing extended (red)
R
rear wing extending or retracting (yellow)
The different positions of the rear wing are also
shown on the instrument cluster.
Adjusting the fixed rear wing
Requirements
A socket wrench and a releasable, medium-
strength bolt lock are to hand.
%
Vehicles with the AMG Aerodynamic package
are equipped with a fixed rear wing. The
position of this rear wing is not adjustable.
The rear wing improves the rear axle output and,
therefore, the vehicle's driving stability. You can
move the rear wing into an inclined and a flat
position.
When you move the rear wing into the inclined
position, the rear axle output and the air resist‐
ance increase.
#
Unscrew bolts 1 with a socket wrench.
#
Tilt the rear wing as far as it will go, upwards
into an inclined position, or downwards into a
flat position.
#
Equip bolts 1 with a releasable, medium-
strength bolt lock and tighten them.
Specified tightening torque: 7. 5 lb-ft
(10 Nm).
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
Function of AMG adaptive sport suspension
system
AMG adaptive sport suspension system is an
electronically controlled damping system for
improved driving comfort and increased driving
safety.
The damping is adjusted individually to each
wheel and depends on the following factors:
R
the driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road condition, e.g. bumps
R
the individual selection of the drive program:
A (Comfort), C (Sport) or B (Sport
+)
%
The setting can also be set using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch. To do this, the
same suspension setting must be selected
for AMG adaptive sport suspension system
and the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
%
When the vehicle is started again, the "Com‐
fort" setting is activated automatically.
148
Driving and parking
Selecting the AMG adaptive sport suspen‐
sion system setting
You can select from three different suspension
settings:
R
COMFORT ensures a comfortable suspen‐
sion setting. Select this suspension setting if
you prefer a comfortable driving style.
R
SPORT ensures a firmer suspension setting.
Select this suspension setting when employ‐
ing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding
country roads.
R
SPORT PLUS ensures a very firm suspension
setting.
#
Press display button 1.
The display button shows currently selected
suspension setting 2:
R
ä C (blue): COMFORT
R
ä S (yellow): SPORT
R
ä S+ (red): SPORT PLUS
The selected suspension setting is shown in
the multifunction display as a message:
R
AMG Suspension System COMFORT
R
AMG Suspension System SPORT
R
AMG Suspension System SPORT +
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking assistance system with ultrasound. It
monitors the area around your vehicle using mul‐
tiple sensors 1 on the front bumper and on the
rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows
Driving and parking
149
you the distance between your vehicle and a
detected obstacle visually and audibly.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐
roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐
ing and parking remains with you. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in/exiting parking spaces.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display (vehi‐
cles without front and rear view camera)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display (vehi‐
cles with front and rear view camera)
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects an obsta‐
cle in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window
with the appropriate warning display appears in
the media display at speeds below approx‐
imately 6 mph (10 km/h).
The color segments show the distance between
the sensors and the obstacle detected:
1
Yellow warning display: obstacles at a dis‐
tance of between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and
3.3 ft (1.0 m)
2
Orange warning display: obstacles at a
medium distance between approx. 1.0 ft
(0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m)
3
Red warning display: obstacles at a very
short distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or
less
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational
and no object is detected, no segments are
shown in the warning display.
%
If the entire system fails, the internal seg‐
ments of the warning display are shown in
red and the é symbol appears in the mul‐
tifunction display in the instrument cluster.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
the warning display fades out.
In the standard setting, an intermittent warning
tone sounds from a distance of approximately
1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx‐
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A
continuous warning tone sounds from a distance
of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn
early setting, you can set the warning tone in
the multimedia system so that it will sound ear‐
150
Driving and parking
lier at a greater distance of approximately 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) (/ page 152).
%
The Warn early setting is always active at
the rear of the vehicle.
System limits
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐
rily take into account the following obstacles:
R
Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects.
R
Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading
ramps of trucks.
As a result of additional accessories (e.g. license
plate bracket or bicycle rack) the actual distance
to an obstacle may not correspond to the dis‐
tance measured by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
under certain conditions.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
Otherwise, they may not function correctly.
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them.
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
*
NOTE Risk of an accident from objects
at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
certain objects at close range.
#
When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐
cle, pay particular attention to any
objects which are above or below the
sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars.
The vehicle or other objects could oth‐
erwise be damaged.
If indicator lamp 1 is not lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit
or the é symbol appears in the multifunction
display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not
active.
#
Press button 2.
%
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started.
Driving and parking
151
Adjusting the warning tones of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Camera & Parking
5
Set Warning Tones
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones
#
Select Warning Tone Volume.
#
Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones
#
Select Warning Tone Pitch.
Set a value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning
tones
You can specify whether the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence
when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐
cle.
#
Select Warn Early.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout
You can specify whether the volume of a media
source in the multimedia system is to be
reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives
an audible warning.
#
Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Front and rear view camera
Function of the front camera and rear view
camera
The front camera and rear view camera support
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC and help you to
avoid obstacles when maneuvering.
When automatic operation of the rear view cam‐
era is activated in the multimedia system, the
image from the rear view camera is shown auto‐
matically next to the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display when reverse gear is engaged .
The front camera view can be called up using
button 1 or using the softkeys in the multime‐
dia system.
%
You can also switch between the front cam‐
era and rear view camera views using the
AMG steering-wheel buttons (/ page 146).
152
Driving and parking
%
If the rear view camera is active and you
shift from reverse gear to the drive position,
the view automatically switches from the
rear view camera to the front camera.
The front camera and rear view camera are only
an aid. They are not a substitute for your atten‐
tion to the surroundings. The responsibility for
safe maneuvering and parking remains with you.
Make sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects etc., in the maneuvering area while
maneuvering and parking.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
You can switch between various views in the
multimedia system, not just between the front
camera and rear view camera.
1
Front camera, wide-angle view
2
Front camera, standard view
3
Rear view camera, standard view
4
Rear view camera, wide-angle view
Dynamic guide lines in the camera image show
the path the vehicle will take with the steering
wheel in its current position. This helps you to
orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when
maneuvering.
1
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2
Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4
Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
The guide lines in the media display show the
distances to your vehicle. The distances dis‐
played only apply to road level.
Driving and parking
153
System limits
The cameras will not function or will only parti‐
ally function in the following situations:
R
There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night.
R
The respective camera lens is obstructed,
dirty or fogged up. Observe the notes on
cleaning the cameras (/ page 299).
R
Cameras, or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed, are damaged. In
this event, have the cameras, their positions
and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories (e.g. license plate bracket or bicycle
rack).
%
The display contrast may be impaired due to
incident sunlight or other light sources. In
this case, pay particular attention.
%
Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
Switching rear view camera automatic mode
on/off
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
maneuvering range. Pay attention to your sur‐
roundings and be ready to brake at all times.
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Camera & Parking
5
Auto. Rear View Cam.
#
Switch the function on O or off ª.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐
nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati‐
gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the
part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-
rested and attentive driver. On long journeys,
take regular breaks in good time that allow for
adequate recuperation.
You can choose between two settings:
R
Standard: normal system sensitivity.
R
Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention
level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐
ted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐
tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take
a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐
play. You can acknowledge the message and
take a break where necessary. If you do not take
a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you
will be warned again after a minimum of
15 minutes.
154
Driving and parking
You can have the following status information for
ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance
menu of the on-board computer:
R
The length of the journey since the last
break.
R
The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
System Suspended message appears.
If a warning is given in the Instrument Display,
the multimedia system offers to search for a rest
area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐
tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐
ted and deactivated in the multimedia system.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û
symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
Instrument Display when the engine is running.
ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
when the engine is re-started. The last selected
sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph
(60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all in the following situations:
R
If you have been driving for less than approx‐
imately 30 minutes.
R
If the road condition is poor (uneven road
surface or potholes).
R
If there is a strong side wind.
R
If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
R
If the time has been set incorrectly.
R
In active driving situations, if you change
lanes and vary your speed frequently.
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness
assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐
tinuing the journey in the following situations:
R
If you switch off the engine.
R
If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking
a break).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
ATTENTION ASSIST
Setting options
#
Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting a rest area
#
Select Suggest Rest Area.
#
Activate O or deactivate the function ª.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or
increasing lack of attention, it suggests a
rest area in the vicinity.
Driving and parking
155
#
Select a suggested rest area: you are gui‐
ded to the selected rest area.
Traffic Sign Assist
Function of Traffic Sign Assist
Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul‐
tifunction camera 1. It assists you by display‐
ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric‐
tions in the instrument cluster.
Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data
stored in the navigation system, it can update
the display in the following situations without
detecting traffic signs:
R
When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. on a
freeway entry or exit road.
R
When a village or city boundary which is
stored in the digital map is passed.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in
wet conditions).
%
Traffic signs are only displayed with the
restriction indicated by an additional sign in
the following cases:
R
The traffic signs must be observed with
the restriction.
R
The system is unable to clearly determine
whether the restriction applies.
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for keeping a safe distance from the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking
in good time.
Warning when the maximum permissible
speed is exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do
this, you can specify in the multimedia system
by how much the maximum permissible speed
can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You
can specify whether the warning is to be just a
visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
Display in the Instrument Display
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit
1
Permissible speed
2
Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3
Additional sign with restriction
156
Driving and parking
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐
tries. If it is unavailable, display 1 is shown in
the speedometer.
%
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum speed from any of the available
sources, no speed limit is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, if there are
highly variable shade conditions or in rain,
snow, fog or heavy spray.
R
If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R
If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐
tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐
ged up, damaged or covered.
R
If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
to dirt or snow, or because they are covered
or due to insufficient lighting.
R
If the information in the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
R
If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
on construction sites or in adjacent lanes.
R
If you turn sharply, when passing traffic signs
outside the camera's field of vision.
Setting Traffic Sign Assist
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Traffic Sign Assist
Displaying detected traffic signs in the
media display
#
Select Display in COMAND.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Blind Spot Assist
Function of Blind Spot Assist
At speeds above approximately 18 mph
(30 km/h), Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral,
rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up
to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly
next to your vehicle. Below 18 mph (30 km/h),
the system is not active and vehicles in the mon‐
itoring range are not detected.
If Blind Spot Assist is activated, the warning
lamp in the outside mirror lights up yellow at
speeds of up to 18 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the
warning lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is
operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range at speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), the
warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in
the lateral monitoring range and you switch on
the turn signal indicator in the corresponding
direction, a warning tone sounds once and the
warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes red. If
the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all
Driving and parking
157
other detected vehicles are indicated only by the
flashing of the red warning lamp.
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
given.
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind
Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles
approaching and overtaking you at a greatly
different speed.
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn
drivers in this situation.
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is not a substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is suf‐
ficient distance to the side for other road users
and obstacles.
System limits
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
R
The sensors are dirty or covered.
R
Poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
snow or spray.
R
Narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles, are within the
monitoring range.
R
If the lanes are very narrow or very wide,
especially if vehicles are not driving in the
middle of their lane.
Warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐
ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, for example trucks, for a
prolonged time.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
gear is engaged.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Blind Spot Assist
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
your vehicle by means of multifunction camera
1. It serves to protect you against unintention‐
158
Driving and parking
ally leaving your lane. You will be warned by
means of a vibration in the steering wheel.
You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐
ing wheel in the following circumstances:
R
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings.
R
A front wheel passes over the lane markings.
Whether a warning is issued and when this
occurs also depends on the selected sensitivity
setting (standard or adaptive).
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk
of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving
style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot
take into account road, weather or traffic condi‐
tions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in your lane.
Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed
range between 40 mph (60 km/h) and 120 mph
(200 km/h).
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, if there are
highly variable shade conditions or in rain,
snow, fog or heavy spray.
R
If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections.
R
If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐
tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐
ged up, damaged or covered.
R
If there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present for one
lane, e.g. around roadworks.
R
If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐
ered.
R
If the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
R
If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
R
If the roadway is very narrow and winding.
Sensitivity of Lane Keeping Assist
With the Standard or Adaptive setting, you can
influence when the warning vibration of Lane
Keeping Assist takes place.
In both the Standard and Adaptive settings, no
warning vibration occurs in the following situa‐
tions:
R
You have switched on the turn signal indica‐
tor.
R
A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
In the Adaptive setting, there will also be no
warning vibration in the following situations:
R
The vehicle is accelerated or braked consid‐
erably.
R
You steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lane quickly.
R
You cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Driving and parking
159
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar
systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar
systems can lead to damage on the vehicle.
When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be
guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed
vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may
swerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐
mitted towing methods (/ page 315) and the
instructions for towing with both axles on the
ground (/ page 316).
160
Driving and parking
Instrument Display overview
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to an
instrument display malfunction
If the Instrument Display has failed or mal‐
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐
tems.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, park the vehicle immediately and
safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cock‐
pit
1
Speedometer
2
Digital speedometer
3
Gear display
4
Example: area for additional values
5
Coolant temperature display
6
Multifunction display
7
Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐
tor
%
Further display content can be shown on dis‐
play 4 for additional values (/ page 164).
The segments on speedometer 1 indicate the
system status for the following:
R
Cruise control (/ page 137)
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 139)
*
NOTE Engine damage due to excessively
high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range.
#
Do not drive with the engine in the over‐
revving range.
The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the
engine when the red mark on the tachometer
(overrevving range) is reached.
During normal operating conditions, coolant
temperature display 5 may rise to the red
mark.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
161
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
Overview of the buttons on the steering
wheel
1
¤ Back/Home button (press and hold),
on-board computer
2
Touch Control, on-board computer
3
Control panel for cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC
4
Control panel for multimedia system:
£ Voice Control System
ß Displays favorites
VOL: control knob, adjusts the volume or
switches the sound off 8 (press)
6 Makes/accepts a call
~ Rejects/ends a call
5
ò Calls up the home screen
6
Touch Control multimedia system
7
% Back button
Operating the on-board computer
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
162
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are currently driving when operat‐
ing the on-board computer.
%
The on-board computer displays will appear
on the multifunction display (/ page 165).
The on-board computer is operated using left-
hand Touch Control 2 and the left-hand back/
home button 1.
When the on-board computer is being operated,
different acoustic signals will sound as operating
feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached
or when you are scrolling through a list.
The following menus are available:
R
Service
R
DriveAssist
R
Performance
R
Trip
R
Navigation
R
Radio
R
Media
R
Phone
R
Designs
The menus can be called up from the menu bar
on the multifunction display.
#
To call up the menu bar: press the back
button on the left 1 until the menu bar is
displayed.
%
Vehicles without Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call
up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
#
To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or
right on the left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To call up a menu or confirm a selection:
press left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To scroll through displays or lists on the
menu: swipe upwards or downwards on left-
hand Touch Control 2.
#
To call up a submenu or confirm a selec‐
tion: press left-hand Touch Control 2.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
163
#
To exit a submenu: press back button on
the left 1.
Setting the design
On-board computer:
4
Designs
The following designs can be selected:
R
Supersport
R
Sport
R
Classic
#
To select a design: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The Instrument Display will be shown in the
selected design.
Setting the area for additional values
G-meter (example)
1
Area for additional values
2
Index points
#
To select display content: swipe to the
right on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control to select display content.
When display content is selected, area for
additional values 1 will briefly be highligh‐
ted.
Index points 2 will display the selected list
item.
The following content can be displayed in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
R
Tachometer/date
R
G-Meter
R
Engine data
R
AMG TRACK PACE
R
Warm-up
R
Trip computer
R
Navigation
164
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Overview of displays on the multifunction
display
1
Outside temperature
2
Time
3
Display section
4
Transmission position
5
Drive program
Further displays on the multifunction display:
Z
Gearshift recommendation (/ page 119)
é
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 151)
¯
Cruise control (/ page 137)
ç
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 139)
ê
Active Brake Assist (/ page 137)
Ã
Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 158)
è
ECO start/stop function
ë
HOLD function (/ page 143)
_
Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 91)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected
instructions and traffic signs (/ page 156).
Adjusting the instrument lighting
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
#
Select Instr. Cluster Lighting.
#
Set a brightness value.
The brightness of the Instrument Display will
be adapted.
Menus and submenus
Calling up functions on the service menu of
the on-board computer
On-board computer:
4
Service
#
To select a function: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Functions on the Servicemenu:
R
Message memory (/ page 362)
R
Tires:
-
Check the tire pressure with the tire pres‐
sure monitor (/ page 327)
-
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(/ page 328)
R
ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date
(/ page 287)
Instrument Display and on-board computer
165
R
Vehicles with a Widescreen Cockpit: Cool-
ant: coolant temperature display
Calling up displays on the Assistance menu
On-board computer:
4
DriveAssist
The following displays are available on the Assis‐
tance menu:
R
Assistant display
R
Attention level (/ page 154)
#
To switch between the displays: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
Status displays on the assistant display:
R
Û ATTENTION ASSIST switched off
R
Light lane markings: Lane Keeping Assist
enabled
R
Green lane markings: Lane Keeping Assist
active
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays
(/ page 139)
Calling up displays on the Performance
menu
On-board computer:
4
Performance
#
To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Displays on the Performance menu:
R
Warm-up
R
SETUP
R
G-Meter
R
Engine data
R
Vehicles without AMG TRACK PACE: RACE‐
TIMER (/ page 168)
166
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Warm-up (example)
1
Boost pressure
2
Engine oil temperature
3
Transmission oil temperature
If the engine or transmission is not at normal
operating temperature, the multifunction display
will show temperature 2 or 3 in blue. Avoid
using the full engine power output during this
time.
SETUP in Mercedes-AMG GT vehicles (example)
1
Drive system setting:
Reduced/Moderate/Sport/Dynamic/Race
2
Suspension tuning:
Comfort/Sport/Sport+
3
Exhaust system:
Balanced/Powerful
4
ESP
®
:
On/Sport/Off
5
AMG Dynamics:
Basic/Advanced/Pro/Master
6
Transmission position:
D/M
G-meter (example)
While the vehicle is in motion, the G-meter
shows the forces that are exerted on the vehicle
occupants both laterally and in the direction of
travel. The maximum values appear in red in the
coordinate system.
#
To reset the G-meter: press the left-hand
Touch Control.
#
Select Yes.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
167
Engine data (example)
1
Current power output
2
Current torque
When current power 1 or current torque 2
achieves the maximum value, the digital value is
briefly stationary. The bar display will continue.
Displaying and starting RACE TIMER on the
Performance menu
On-board computer:
4
Performance
The following functions are possible in the RACE
TIMER:
R
Selecting displays and starting
R
Stopping
R
Starting a new lap
R
Displaying lap statistics
R
Resetting
1
Lap
2
Lap time
RACE TIMER is intended only for use on designa‐
ted race tracks. Do not use the function on pub‐
lic roads.
#
To select a display and start: swipe up or
down on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Select Start and press the left-hand Touch
Control.
#
To stop: select Stop and press the left-hand
Touch Control.
168
Instrument Display and on-board computer
#
To start a new lap: after the first stored lap,
press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Select New Lap.
A maximum of 32 laps may be stored.
Example: RACE TIMER
1
Lap
2
Elapsed time
3
Average speed
4
Distance covered
#
To display the lap statistics: after at least
two stored laps, press the left-hand Touch
Control.
#
Select Lap List.
The lap statistics will be displayed.
#
Display the statistics for the next lap by swip‐
ing up or down on the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing text
1.
#
To reset: stop RACE TIMER and press the
left-hand Touch Control.
#
Select Reset and press the left-hand Touch
Control.
All laps will be deleted.
Calling up displays on the Trip menu
On-board computer:
4
Trip
Standard display (example)
1
Trip distance
2
Total distance
Instrument Display and on-board computer
169
Trip computer (example)
1
Total distance
2
Driving time
3
Average speed
4
Average fuel consumption
%
You can view information about the journey
in the left-hand area of the Instrument Dis‐
play.
#
To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Displays on the Trip menu:
R
Standard display
R
Range and current fuel consumption
If there is only a small amount of fuel left in
the fuel tank, the display will show a vehicle
being refueled instead of the range.
R
Trip computer From Start and From Reset
R
Digital speedometer
Resetting values on the Trip menu of the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Trip
%
The spelling on the main menu displayed
may differ. Therefore, observe the menu
overview for the instrument display
(/ page 162).
You can reset the values of the following func‐
tions:
R
Trip distance
R
Trip computer From Start and From Reset
#
To select the function to be reset: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Select Yes.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If you press and hold the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol, the values of the function will be reset
immediately.
170
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Calling up navigation instructions on the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Navigation
Example: no change of direction announced
1
Distance to the next change of direction
2
Distance to the next destination
3
Estimated arrival time at next destination
4
Current road
Example: change of direction announced
1
Distance to the change of direction
2
Road to which the change of direction leads
3
Change-of-direction symbol
4
Recommended lane (white)
5
Possible lane
6
Lane not recommended (dark gray)
Further possible displays on the Navigation
menu:
R
Direction of Travel: display of direction of
travel and road currently being traveled on.
R
New Route... or Calculating Route...: a new
route is being calculated.
R
Road Not Mapped: the road is unknown, e.g.
for newly built roads.
R
No Route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
R
Off Map: the map for the current location is
not available.
R
Area of Destination Reached: you have
reached the area of destination.
R
O: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
#
To exit the menu: press the back button on
the left.
In the Navigation menu, you can also start navi‐
gation to one of the previous destinations:
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To select a destination: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Route guidance will start.
If route guidance has already been activated,
a request will appear asking whether you
wish to end the current route guidance.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
171
#
Select Yes.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Route guidance will start.
Selecting radio stations using the on-board
computer
On-board computer:
4
Radio
1
Memory preset
2
Channel name
3
Name of track
4
Name of artist
When you select a station from the memory pre‐
sets, the preset will appear next to the station
name. When you select a saved station in the
frequency range, an asterisk will appear next to
the station name.
#
To select a radio station: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Selecting the frequency range or memory
preset
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To select the frequency range/station
preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Operating media playback using the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Media
1
Media source
2
Track number and current track
3
Name of artist
4
Name of album
#
To change tracks on an active media
source: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
172
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Changing a media source
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To select a media source: swipe upwards
or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Dialing telephone numbers using the on-
board computer
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
When using the phone, you must observe the
legal requirements for the country in which you
are currently driving.
Requirements:
R
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system.
On-board computer:
4
Phone
The most recent telephone calls (dialed,
received and missed calls) are displayed on the
Phone menu.
#
To select an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If there is only one telephone number
saved to an entry: the telephone number is
selected.
#
If there are multiple telephone numbers
saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand touch control to
select the desired telephone number.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The telephone number will be dialed.
The following displays may appear instead of the
telephone numbers dialed:
R
Please Wait...: the application is starting. If a
Bluetooth
®
connection to the mobile phone
is not established, the menu for authorizing
and connecting a mobile phone will be dis‐
played on the multimedia system
(/ page 240).
R
Updating data...: the call list is being upda‐
ted.
R
Importing Contacts...: contacts are being
imported from the mobile phone or a storage
medium.
Accepting/rejecting an incoming call
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select 6 (Accept)
or ~ (Reject).
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
173
You may accept/reject the call using the 6
or ~ button on the steering wheel.
174
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Notes on operating safety
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the trunk/load compartment.
For your own safety, always observe the follow‐
ing points when operating mobile communica‐
tions equipment and especially your voice con‐
trol system:
R
Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐
try in which you are driving.
R
While driving, only operate mobile communi‐
cations equipment and your voice control
system when the traffic conditions permit it.
You may otherwise be distracted from the
traffic conditions and cause an accident,
injuring yourself and others.
Voice Control System
175
R
If you use the voice control system in an
emergency your voice can change and your
telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can
thereby be unnecessarily delayed.
R
Familiarize yourself with the voice control
system functions before starting the journey.
R
Comply with the loading guidelines
(/ page 80).
Operation
Overview of operation of the Voice Control
System on the multifunction steering wheel
The Voice Control System is operational approx‐
imately thirty seconds after the ignition is
switched on.
1
Press the rocker switch up: £ starts the
Voice Control System
2
Press the control knob: 8 switches the
sound off or on (ends the Voice Control Sys‐
tem)
Turn the control knob up/down: increases/
decreases the volume
3
Press the rocker switch up: 6 makes/
accepts a call
Press the rocker switch down: ~ rejects/
ends a call (ends the Voice Control System)
Conducting a dialog with the Voice Control
System
#
To start or continue a dialog: on the multi‐
function steering wheel, press the £
rocker switch up.
You can say a voice command after an
acoustic signal.
#
To correct an entry: say the Correction
voice command.
#
To select an entry from the selection list:
say the line number or the contents.
#
To browse the selection list: say the Next
or Back voice command.
#
To interrupt the dialog: say the Pause voice
command.
#
To cancel the dialog: say the Cancel voice
command.
176
Voice Control System
Operable functions
You can use the Voice Control System to operate
the following equipment depending on the fea‐
tures:
R
Telephone
R
Text messages
R
Navigation
R
Address book
R
Radio
R
Audio (memory card, Media Interface, USB
and Bluetooth
®
audio)
R
Vehicle
Overview of types of voice command
A distinction is made between the following
voice commands:
R
Global voice commands can be said at any
time and regardless of the current applica‐
tion, e.g. the voice commands Navigate to,
Call or Text message to.
R
Application-specific voice commands are
only available for the active application.
Once the Voice Control System is started an
autocue is shown. Apart from the available voice
commands for the application currently active,
this also cites example voice commands for
other applications which are not active. In this
way, you will be familiar more quickly with the
available voice commands. The list can be scrol‐
led or it can be operated by speech or the con‐
troller/touchpad.
Notes on the language setting
You can change the language of the Voice Con‐
trol System via the system language settings. If
the set system language is not supported by the
Voice Control System, English will be selected.
The Voice Control System is available in English,
French, Portuguese and Spanish.
Using the Voice Control System effectively
Features of audible help functions
You receive information and help for the follow‐
ing topics:
R
Optimum operation: say the brief instruc-
tion voice command.
R
Current application: on the multifunction
steering wheel, press the £ rocker switch
up and say the Help voice command.
R
Continued dialog: say the Help voice com‐
mand during a voice dialog.
R
Specific function: say voice commands for
the desired function, e.g. Help telephone.
Notes on how to improve speech quality
If the Voice Control System does not understand
you:
R
only operate the Voice Control System from
the driver's seat.
R
say the voice commands coherently and
clearly, but do not exaggerate the words.
Voice Control System
177
R
avoid loud noises that cause interference
while making a voice command entry, e.g.
the blower.
A voice tag in the address book is not recog‐
nized:
R
only create sensible address book entries in
the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter sur‐
name and first name in the correct field.
R
do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary
spaces or special characters.
If a station list entry is not recognized:
R
say the Read out station list voice command.
Essential voice commands
Overview of switch voice commands
Switch voice commands can be used to open
certain applications. The voice command selec‐
tion can be used regardless of the application
that is currently active.
Switch voice commands
Voice command Function
Navigation
To switch to navigation mode
Map
To switch to map display
Address book
To switch to address book
Telephone
To switch to telephone mode
Text message
To switch to text messages
Radio
To switch to radio mode
Media
To switch to media mode
178
Voice Control System
Voice command Function
USB
To switch to USB
Memory card
To switch to memory card
Internet application <Name>
To start a Mercedes-Benz online application. The application must be called up by touch once prior
to use.
Mercedes-Benz Apps
To switch to Mercedes-Benz Apps
Connect
To switch to Internet mode
Vehicle menu
To switch to vehicle settings
System settings menu
To switch to system settings
Overview of navigation voice commands
Using navigation voice commands, you can enter
POIs or conventional addresses as well as
directly change important navigation settings.
Voice Control System
179
Navigation voice commands
Voice command Function
Navigate to <Address/POI/Contact>
Universal search for all types of destinations. A search is conducted in the address book contacts,
the navigation database and on the Internet (POIs). The order of the details, e.g. city, street or
house number, can be changed.
Address in <Country>
Destination entry in a desired country, e.g. address in France
Home
Starts navigation to home address
Work
Starts navigation to your workspace
POI <POI>
Destination entry for a POI, e.g. the POI Brandenburg Gate. A search is performed in the navigation
database and on the Internet.
POI online search <POI>
Conducts a POI search on the Internet only
Navigate to contact <Name>
Destination entry to a contact in the address book
180
Voice Control System
Voice command Function
Enter country
Enter city
Enter district
Enter street
Enter intersection
Enter house number
Enter ZIP code
Enters a country/city/district/street/intersection/house number/ZIP code
Nearest restaurant
Nearest parking lot
Nearest rest area with restrooms
Nearest gas station
Searches for nearby restaurants, parking lots, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations
Restaurant along the route
Parking along the route
Rest area with restrooms along the route
Gas stations along the route
Searches for restaurants, parking options, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations along the
route
Voice Control System
181
Voice command Function
Restaurant at destination
Parking at destination
Rest area with restrooms at destination
Gas station at destination
Searches for restaurants, parking options, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations at the desti‐
nation
Last destinations
Selects a destination from the list of last entered destinations
Alternative routes
Switches route guidance to another route
Start route guidance
Starts route guidance after entering a valid destination
Cancel route guidance
Cancels route guidance
Guidance instructions on
Guidance instructions off
Switches the route guidance voice output on/off
Show traffic map
Hide traffic map
Switches the traffic map on/off
Switch on POI symbols
Switch off POI symbols
Switches the POI symbols display on the map on/off
182
Voice Control System
Overview of telephone voice commands
You can use the telephone voice commands to
make phone calls or search through the address
book.
Telephone voice commands
Voice command Function
Call <Name>
Makes a phone call. All address book names are available.
Search for contact <Name>
Searches for and displays a contact. All address book names are available.
Outgoing calls
Displays the last call
Redial
Selects the last phone number dialed
Overview of radio voice commands
Radio voice commands can also be used when
the radio application is running in the back‐
ground.
Voice Control System
183
Radio voice commands
Voice command Function
Station <Name>
To call up receivable or saved stations
<Frequency>
To enter a frequency directly
Next station
To switch to the next available station
Previous station
To switch to the previous station
Save station
To save a station in the station list
Show station list
To display the names of all receivable stations
Read out station list
To listen to the names of all receivable stations
Traffic information on
Traffic information off
To switch the traffic information service on/off
Radio info on
Radio info off
To switch information about the current station on/off
184
Voice Control System
Overview of media player voice commands
Media player voice commands can also be used
when the media player is running in the back‐
ground.
Media player voice commands
Voice command Function
Play <Tracks>
Play <Albums>
Play <Artists>
Play<Composers>
Play <Genres>
Play <Playlists>
The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur‐
ing the search.
Media search <Track>
Media search <Albums>
Media search <Artists>
Media search <Composers>
Media search <Genres>
Media search <Playlists>
The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur‐
ing the search.
Voice Control System
185
Voice command Function
Show all albums
Show all artists
Show all composers
Show all genres
Show all tracks
Show all playlists
Available albums, artists, composers, genres, tracks or playlists are searched for.
Next track
To select the next track
Previous track
To select the previous track
Random track list on
Random track list off
To switch the random track list on/off
Overview of message voice commands
Text messages can be created, edited and lis‐
tened to using the message voice commands.
186
Voice Control System
Message voice commands
Voice command Function
Text message to <Name>
To create a message. All address book names are available.
Reply
To reply to a message
Forward text message
To forward a message
Overview of vehicle voice commands
You can use the vehicle voice commands to
directly call up the corresponding menus for the
vehicle settings.
Vehicle voice commands
Voice command Function
Display and styles menu
To show display settings
Assistance menu
To display assistance settings
Climate control menu
To display climate control settings
Light menu
To display light settings
Voice Control System
187
Voice command Function
Outside temperature
To display the outside temperature
Engine data
To display engine data
Consumption menu
To display consumption
Vehicle data
To display vehicle data
188
Voice Control System
Overview and operation
Overview of the multimedia system
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Equipment with touchpad
1
Touch Control
Multimedia system button group on the
steering wheel (/ page 162)
2
Media display
3
Press the rocker switch up or down: increa‐
ses or decreases the volume (/ page 195)
4
Display button shows volume, current vol‐
ume when setting the volume or mute
Press the display button: switches the multi‐
media system on/off
5
Touchpad
Equipment with controller
1
Touch Control
Multimedia system button group on the
steering wheel (/ page 162)
2
Media display
Multimedia system
189
3
Press the rocker switch up or down: increa‐
ses or decreases the volume (/ page 195)
4
Display button shows volume, current vol‐
ume when setting the volume or mute
Press the display button: switches the multi‐
media system on/off
5
Touchpad or controller
Notes on the media display
*
NOTE Scratches on the display
The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss
surface. There is a risk of it becoming
scratched.
#
Avoid touching the display.
#
Observe the notes on cleaning.
Observe the notes on caring for the interior
(/ page 301).
Automatic temperature-controlled switch-
off feature: if the temperature is too high, the
brightness is initially reduced automatically. The
display may then switch off completely for a
while.
%
If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it
may be difficult to read the display.
Central control elements overview
Touchpad equipment
1
Touch Control
2
Touchpad
190
Multimedia system
Controller equipment
1
Touch Control
2
Controller
Touch Control
Operating Touch Control
#
To call up main functions: press button 1.
or
#
Press and hold button 3.
#
To call up favorites: press button 1.
#
Swipe down on Touch Control 2.
#
To open a list: press Touch Control 2.
#
To close a list: press button 3.
or
#
Swipe right on Touch Control 2.
#
To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left
or right on Touch Control 2.
#
Press Touch Control 2.
#
To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
w Input
5
Touch Control Sensitivity
#
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
Operating the controller
Requirements:
R
The multimedia system is equipped with a
controller.
Multimedia system
191
1
% button
Press briefly: returns to the previous display
Press and hold: calls up main functions
2
Controller
3
© button
Calls up main functions and favorites
Controller operating options:
#
Turn 3 counter-clockwise or clockwise.
#
Slide 1 left or right.
#
Slide 4 up or down.
#
Slide 2 diagonally.
#
Press 7 briefly or press and hold.
Touchpad
Operating the touchpad
Requirements:
R
The multimedia system is equipped with a
touchpad.
1
% button
Pressing briefly: returns to the previous dis‐
play
2
D button
Calls up the control menu of the last active
audio source
3
© button
192
Multimedia system
Calls up main functions and favorites
4
Touchpad
You can navigate in menus and lists via touch-
sensitive surface 4 by using a single-finger
swipe.
#
To open or close lists: swipe left or right.
#
To select the menu item: swipe up, down,
left or right.
#
Press touchpad 4.
#
To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Use the following functions with a two-finger
swipe:
#
To call up main functions and favorites:
swipe down with two fingers. The swipe must
start in the upper area of the touchpad.
#
To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
#
To call up the control menu of the last
active audio source: swipe up with two fin‐
gers. The swipe must start in the lower area
of the touchpad.
Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
w Input
#
Select Touchpad Sensitivity.
#
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
#
To set the pressure sensitivity: switch
Touchpad Tap on O or off ª.
If the function is switched on O, a tap on
the touchpad is enough to select a menu
item.
Handwriting recognition: switching the read-
aloud function on/off
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
õ Audio
5
System Feedback
#
Switch Read Out Handwriting Recognition on
O or off ª.
Activating/deactivating haptic operating
feedback on the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
w Input
The function supports you when making entries
on the touchpad and when selecting menus.
#
Switch Haptic Operating Feedback on O or
off ª.
When the function is activated, a tactile feed‐
back in the form of a vibration is effected
when the touchpad is operated.
Selecting a station and track using the
touchpad
#
Press the D button on the touchpad.
or
#
Swipe up with two fingers. The swipe must
start in the lower area of the touchpad.
The control menu appears for the audio
source that was last selected.
#
Use one finger to swipe up or down.
Radio: the previous or the next station is set.
Media source: the previous or the next music
track is selected.
Multimedia system
193
#
To hide the control menu: swipe down with
two fingers. The swipe must start in the
upper area of the touchpad.
Favorites
Overview of favorites
Favorites offer you quick access to frequently
used applications. It is possible to create 20
favorites in total.
The following functions are available:
R
add pre-defined favorites from the follow‐
ing categories (/ page 194):
-
Navigation
-
Entertainment
-
Phone
-
Connect
-
Vehicle
-
System Settings
R
add your own favorites (/ page 194)
R
rename favorites (/ page 194).
R
move favorites (/ page 195).
R
delete favorites (/ page 195).
R
reset all favorites (/ page 195)
Calling up favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards once.
Navigating means:
R
Swiping on the Touch Control or the
touchpad
Leaving the favorites menu
#
Press the © button.
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards twice.
The Favorites menu appears.
#
Select New Favorite.
The categories are displayed.
#
Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
#
Select a favorite.
#
Store the favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Example: adding your own favorites
#
Select Vehicle.
#
Select Full Screen: Consumption.
#
Press and hold the © button until the
favorites are displayed.
#
Store the favorite at the desired position.
If No function available for saving. is shown, the
selected function cannot be added.
Renaming favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards once.
#
Select a favorite.
#
Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
194
Multimedia system
#
Select Rename.
#
Enter the characters.
#
To confirm the entry: select ¡.
Moving favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards once.
#
Select a favorite.
#
Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
#
Select Move.
#
Move the favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Deleting favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards once.
#
Select a favorite.
#
Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
#
To delete: select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
#
To restore all favorites: select Reset All.
A prompt appears.
#
Select Yes.
The favorites are reset to the factory set‐
tings.
Switching the sound on/off
#
To mute: press volume control 1.
The 8 symbol appears in the status line
of the media display.
You will also hear traffic announcements and
navigation announcements even when the
sound is muted.
#
To switch on: change the media source or
turn volume control 1.
Adjusting the volume
Setting with the volume control on the multi‐
function steering wheel
#
Turn volume control 1.
The volume of the current radio or media
source is set. The volume of other audio
sources can be adjusted separately.
Multimedia system
195
Adjust this in the following situations:
R
during a traffic announcement
R
during a navigation announcement
The volume of the navigation announce‐
ment changes in accordance with the vol‐
ume of the current media source.
R
during a telephone call
R
when entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Setting with the rocker switch on the multi‐
media system
#
Press rocker switch 1 up or down.
The volume is increased or reduced.
When adjusting the volume, the display but‐
ton to the left of the rocker switch shows the
current volume.
Setting in the menu
#
Select System in the multimedia system.
#
Select Audio.
#
Select a volume setting.
#
Set the volume.
Entering characters
Using the character input function
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
196
Multimedia system
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Use the character input function in the following
situations, for example:
R
Renaming a favorite
R
Entering a POI or address
R
Making a phone call
The following functions are available:
R
Selecting a character in the character bar
R
Writing a character on the touchpad
Character input can be started with a control
element and resumed with another.
The multimedia system is equipped with either a
touchpad or controller.
#
On the Touch Control and controller (if
available): select the characters in the char‐
acter bar.
Depending on the target entry, the following
characters are available:
R
The full set of characters is shown
R
Only those characters which are useful
for the current input string are shown
Other characters are grayed out.
#
On the touchpad (if available): select the
characters in the character bar.
or
#
Write the characters on the touch-sensitive
surface of the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition supports you by
means of character suggestions and a read-
aloud function.
Examples of character entry:
R
Renaming a favorite
R
Entering a POI or an address using free or
step-by-step search
R
Entering a web address
Entering characters on the touchpad
Requirements:
R
The entered or selected character should be
read out: the handwriting recognition read-
aloud function is switched on (/ page 193).
Example: renaming favorites
#
Call up the "Renaming favorites" function
(/ page 194).
#
To enter a character: use your finger to
write characters on the touchpad.
The character is entered in the input line. If
different interpretations are possible, charac‐
ter suggestions are displayed.
Multimedia system
197
#
To select a character suggestion: swipe up
or down on the touchpad.
#
Resume character input.
#
To enter a space: swipe right when the cur‐
sor is located in the input line.
#
To delete a character: swipe left when the
cursor is located in the input line.
#
To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.
#
To finish character entry: swipe upwards.
or
#
Press the % button.
Example: entering a destination (navigation)
#
Enter the POI or address (/ page 214).
System settings
Display
Configuring display settings
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
G Display and Designs
Setting the display brightness
#
Select Display Brightness.
#
Select a brightness value.
Switching the display off/on
#
Off: select Display Off.
#
On: press a button, %, for example.
Display design
#
Select Day/Night Design.
#
Select Automatic, Day Design or Night
Design.
Additional display area
Depending on the vehicle, various items of addi‐
tional information can be shown. The additional
display area comprises the left-hand or right-
hand third of the display.
#
Select Additional Disp. Area.
The following display content can be selected:
R
Dynamic
R
Navigation Map
R
Consumption
R
Time and Date
Time and date
Setting the time and date automatically
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
#
Deactivate ª Manual Time Adjustment.
The time and date are set automatically for
the selected time zone and summer time
option.
%
The correct time is required for the following
functions:
R
Route guidance with time-dependent
traffic guidance.
R
Calculation of expected time of arrival.
198
Multimedia system
Setting the time zone
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Time Zone:
The list of countries is displayed.
#
Select a country #.
Depending on the country, time zones are
displayed.
#
Select a time zone.
The time zone set is displayed after Time
Zone:.
Setting summer time
The Automatic Daylight Saving Time and Day-
light Saving Time options cannot be selected in
all countries.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
Automatically
#
Switch Automatic Daylight Saving Time on
O or off ª.
Manually
#
Deactivate ª Automatic Daylight Saving
Time.
#
Select Daylight Saving Time.
#
Select On or Off.
Setting the time and date format
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Set Format
#
Set the date and time format #.
Setting the time manually
Requirements:
R
The Manual Time Adjustment function is
switched on.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Set Time
#
Set the hours.
#
Navigate to the right to set the minutes.
#
Set the minutes.
#
Confirm changes when exiting the menu.
The date is set automatically via GPS.
Bluetooth
®
Information about Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
technology is a standard for short-
range wireless data transfer up to approximately
32.8 ft (10 m).
You can use Bluetooth
®
to connect your mobile
phone to the multimedia system and use the fol‐
lowing functions, for example:
R
Hands-free system with access to the follow‐
ing options:
-
contacts (/ page 244)
-
call lists (/ page 246)
-
text message (/ page 247)
R
Internet connection (/ page 259)
R
Listening to music via Bluetooth
®
audio
R
Transferring business cards (vCards) into the
vehicle
Multimedia system
199
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
%
Internet connection via Bluetooth
®
is not
available in all countries.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
®
Requirements:
R
Deactivate Bluetooth
®
: Apple CarPlay™ is not
active.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
#
Activate O or deactivate ª Bluetooth
®
.
If Android Auto is active, a prompt appears ask‐
ing whether Bluetooth
®
should be deactivated.
#
Select Yes.
Android Auto is closed and Bluetooth
®
is
deactivated.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi connection overview
You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with
a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or
other network devices.
The following connection options are available:
R
Wi-Fi connection
The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capable
device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or
a tablet PC is established.
R
Multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot
Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook
can be connected, for example.
To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐
lowing methods:
R
WPS PIN
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a PIN.
R
WPS PBC
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made by pressing a button (push button).
R
Security key
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a security key.
Setting up Wi-Fi
Requirements:
R
The device to be connected supports one of
the three means of connection described
(/ page 200).
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
#
Switch Wi-Fi on O or off ª.
If Wi-Fi is deactivated ª, communication via
Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also
means that a connection to the HERMES
communication module cannot be estab‐
lished. Then functions such as dynamic route
guidance with Live Traffic Information are not
available.
Connecting the multimedia system with a
device via Wi-Fi
This function is available if a HERMES communi‐
cation module is not installed.
200
Multimedia system
The type of connection established must be
selected on the multimedia system and on the
device to be connected.
%
The connection procedure may differ
depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐
tions that are shown in the display. Further
information (see the manufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
#
Select Internet Settings.
#
Select Search for Wi-Fi Networks.
Using a security key
#
Select a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#
Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
#
Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐
tem.
#
Confirm the entry with ¡.
%
All devices support a security key as a
means of connection.
Using a WPS PIN
#
Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PIN Input.
The multimedia system generates an eight-
digit PIN.
#
Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
#
Confirm the entry.
Using a button
%
This function is only available in a Wi-Fi fre‐
quency of 2.4 GHz.
#
Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PBC.
#
Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options
on the device to be connected.
#
Press the WPS button on the device to be
connected.
#
Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Device has already been connected:
#
To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi
network in the list.
#
Activate ¥ Connect AutomaticallyO.
#
To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the
list.
#
Select ¥ Connect.
The connection is established again. These
functions are possible when the device has
already been connected to the Wi-Fi network.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements:
R
For connection by pressing a button: this
function is only available in a Wi-Fi frequency
of 2.4 GHz.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-
Fi hotspot
The type of connection established depends on
the device to be connected. The function must
be supported by the multimedia system and by
the device to be connected. The type of connec‐
tion established must be selected on the multi‐
media system and on the device to be connec‐
ted.
Multimedia system
201
#
Select Set Up Hotspot.
#
Highlight Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
Generating a WPS PIN
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PIN Genera-
tion.
#
Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and confirm.
Connecting using a WPS PIN
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PIN Input.
#
Select Enter WPS PIN.
#
Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
#
Select Continue.
Connecting using a button
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PBC.
#
Press the WPS button on the device to be
connected or select Connect.
#
Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Connecting using a security key
#
Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
A security key is displayed.
#
Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the
SSID MB Hotspot XXXXX.
#
Enter the security key which is shown in the
media display on the device to be connected.
#
Confirm the entry.
Generating a new security key:
#
Select Set Up Hotspot.
#
Select Generate Security Key.
A connection will be established with the
newly created security key.
#
To save a security key: select Save.
When a new security key is saved, all existing
Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If
the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐
lished, the new security key must be entered.
Managing COMAND Touch devices
Requirements:
R
The COMAND Touch app is installed on the
external device (e.g. tablet or smartphone).
R
Wi-Fi is activated (/ page 200) and the mul‐
timedia system is configured as a Wi-Fi hot‐
spot (/ page 201).
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
COMAND Touch
Connecting and authorizing a new device
#
Select Authorize a New Device.
#
Select Connect New Device.
#
Enter the security key in the external device.
The Please start COMAND Touch on your
device and follow the instructions. message
appears.
#
Select Continue.
#
Accept the connection request from the new
device.
#
Enter the PIN shown on the external device.
The device is authorized.
202
Multimedia system
Authorizing a connected device
#
Select Authorize a New Device.
The devices already connected are displayed.
#
Select Continue Using Connected Devices.
The Please start COMAND Touch on your
device and follow the instructions. message
appears.
#
Select Continue.
#
The connection request from the device
Accept.
#
Enter the PIN shown on the external device.
The device is authorized.
De-authorizing the device
#
Select an authorized device from the list.
A prompt will appear asking whether you
would like to de-authorize the selected
device.
#
Select Yes.
The device is de-authorized.
Activating/deactivating child safety lock
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Parental Control
Locking an external device
#
Select an external device.
#
Select Lock.
The device connected via the COMAND
Touch app is locked O or unlocked ª.
System language
Notes on the system language
This function allows you to determine the lan‐
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
announcements. The selected language affects
the characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all lan‐
guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐
tion announcements will be in English.
Setting the system language
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Language
#
Set the language.
Setting the distance unit
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
% Units
#
Select km or mi.
#
In the multifunction display of the Instrument
Display, switch the Additional Speedometer
display on O.
Data import and export
Data import/export function
The following functions are possible:
R
Transferring data from one system or vehicle
to another system or vehicle.
R
Creating a backup copy of your personal data
and loading it again.
Multimedia system
203
R
Protecting your personal data against unwan‐
ted export with PIN protection.
%
Please note that the NTFS file system is not
supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐
mended.
Importing/exporting data
*
NOTE Loss of data due to premature
removal
#
Do not remove the data storage
medium when data is being exported.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is stationary.
R
The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has
been started.
R
The SD card is inserted (/ page 267) or the
USB device is connected (/ page 268).
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
System Backup
#
Select Import Data or Export Data.
Importing
#
Select a data storage medium.
A prompt appears asking whether you really
wish to overwrite the current data. If data
originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐
nized during data reading.
The multimedia system is restarted once the
data has been imported.
%
Current vehicle settings can be edited after
the import.
Exporting
If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐
ted.
#
Enter the four-digit PIN.
#
Select a data storage medium.
The data is exported. The data export may
take several minutes.
Activating/deactivating PIN protection
Requirements
To unlock the PIN:
R
There is an Internet connection.
R
A Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
R
The Personalization service is active
(/ page 205).
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
PIN Protection
Setting the PIN
#
Select Set PIN.
#
Enter a four-digit PIN.
#
Enter the four-digit PIN again.
If both PINs match, PIN protection is active.
Changing the PIN
#
Select Change Settings.
#
Enter the current PIN.
#
Select Change PIN.
#
Set a new PIN.
204
Multimedia system
Activating PIN protection for data export
#
Select Change Settings.
Confirm with the PIN.
#
Select Protect Data Export.
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Unblocking the PIN
If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three
times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a
single-use password sent to you via the
Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the
PIN protection.
#
Select Unblock PIN.
#
Enter the single-use password.
PIN protection is reset, and you can set a
new PIN.
%
Alternatively, you can have PIN protection
reset at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.
User profile
Setting a user profile
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
g Personalization
Displaying a user profile when starting
If this function is active, a prompt appears when
starting the system asking which user profile to
use.
#
Select Display Profile Selection after Start.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Selecting a user profile
#
Select Guest Profile or individual profile #.
%
Some settings from the user profile are only
loaded when the vehicle is stationary or
when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic synchronization
Each time the ignition is switched off or on, the
individual user profiles are synchronized on the
multimedia system and on the server. This
ensures that the latest user profiles are availa‐
ble.
#
Select Automatic Synchronization.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
%
For more information about importing/
exporting user profiles (/ page 205).
Creating a user profile
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
g Personalization
5
Create Profile
#
Enter a name.
#
Select a.
The following information is saved in the user
profile, for example:
R
System settings
R
Settings in the TV tuner's channel list
R
Navigation and traffic information
The settings differ depending on the vehicle
equipment.
Importing/exporting user profiles
Requirements:
R
There is an Internet connection .
Multimedia system
205
R
A Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
R
The Personalization service is active.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
g Personalization
5
Manual Export/Import
This function is not available in all countries.
Only individual profiles can be imported or
exported.
The individual profiles are always collectively
imported or exported.
#
Import: select Import Profiles from Server.
The The profile data import overwrites all
existing profile data. Do you want to con-
tinue? message appears.
#
Select Yes.
User profiles are imported.
#
Export: select Export Profiles to the Server.
User profiles are exported.
%
Certain settings, such as address book
entries or previous destinations from the
navigation system, are not exported.
Setting user profile options
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
g Personalization
#
Highlight a profile.
#
Select ¥ options.
The following options are available:
R
Rename
R
Delete
R
Reset
%
The guest profile cannot be deleted or
renamed.
Software update
Information on software updates
The multimedia system provides a message
when an update is available.
Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐
ous updates:
Software update
Source of the
update
Update type
Updates via mobile
phone
Navigation map, sys‐
tem updates, Digital
Operator's Manual
Updates via an exter‐
nal storage medium,
e.g. a USB flash drive
Navigation maps
%
Updates via mobile phone require an active
Internet connection for the vehicle. This is
not available in all countries. For further
information on connecting to the Internet,
see (/ page 259).
Advantages of updating software
Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol‐
ogy is up-to-date.
In order to constantly improve the quality of our
services you will receive future updates for your
multimedia system, the Mercedes me connect
services and your vehicle's communication mod‐
ule. These will conveniently be sent to you via
206
Multimedia system
the mobile phone connection in your vehicle
and, as an option, installed automatically. You
can monitor the status of your updates on the
Mercedes me portal and find information about
potential innovations.
Your advantages at a glance:
R
Conveniently receive software updates via
the mobile phone network
R
Improves the quality and availability of
Mercedes me connect services
R
Keeps your multimedia system and communi‐
cation module up-to-date
Further information about software updates can
be found at http://me.mercedes-benz.com
Performing a software update
Requirements:
R
There is an Internet connection
(/ page 259).
R
For automatic updates: your vehicle has a
permanently installed communication mod‐
ule.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Software Update
Automatic update
#
Switch Automatic Online Update on O.
Updates are performed.
The current status of the updates is dis‐
played.
Manual update
#
Deactivate ª Automatic Online Update.
#
Select an update from the list and start the
update.
Activating the software update
#
Restart the system.
Function of important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for
the security of your multimedia system's data.
Please install these updates, or else the security
of your multimedia system cannot be ensured.
%
If automatic software updates are activated,
the system updates will be downloaded auto‐
matically (/ page 207).
As soon as an update is available for download,
a corresponding message appears on the media
display.
You have the following selection options:
R
Download
The update will be downloaded in the back‐
ground.
R
Details
Information about the pending system
update is displayed.
R
Later
The update can be downloaded manually at a
later time (/ page 207).
If the download is completed and the update is
ready for installation, you will be informed of this
after the next ignition cycle, for example.
%
Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location
before starting the installation.
Requirements for the installation:
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
The engine is not running.
Multimedia system
207
R
Notes and warnings have been read and
accepted.
R
The parking brake is applied.
If all requirements are met, the update will be
installed. The multimedia system cannot be
operated while the update is being installed and
vehicle functions are restricted.
If errors should occur during the installation, the
multimedia system automatically attempts to
restore the previous version. If restoration of the
previous version is not possible, a symbol
appears on the multimedia system display.
Please consult a qualified specialist workshop to
resolve the problem.
Reset function
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Reset
Personal data is deleted, for example:
R
Station presets
R
Connected mobile phones
#
Select Yes.
If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears
asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac‐
tory settings during a reset.
#
Select Yes.
#
Enter the current PIN.
The PIN is reset.
or
#
Select No.
The current PIN stays the same after reset‐
ting.
%
If you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate the
PIN protection for you.
A prompt appears again asking whether you
really wish to reset.
#
Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory
settings.
AMG TRACK PACE
General information
With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteris‐
tics on race tracks can be analyzed and opti‐
mized. You can drive previously stored race
tracks (e.g. Hockenheimring) or new tracks can
be recorded and stored. The driven lap times are
stored for every track. These can be analyzed
and compared to other lap times to achieve the
best possible race results. Additionally, accelera‐
tion and braking procedures can be measured
and stored.
Please note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on
closed off routes outside the public traffic area.
Adapt your driving style to your personal per‐
formance and environmental conditions. As the
driver, you are solely responsible for driving your
vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating
the application.
208
Multimedia system
Setting Track Race
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
TRACK PACE
5
Track Race
Recording a track
#
Select New track.
#
At the desired starting point, select Start.
The track recording starts at this point. Dur‐
ing track recording, sectors can be set to
determine intervals.
#
To finish track recording, select Stop or cross
the starting line again.
#
Enter the weather and the track name.
Searching by track name
#
Select All tracks.
#
Select ª Search.
#
Enter the track name.
Tracks with the searched name are dis‐
played.
Measuring the time on the track
#
Select Timekeeping.
An overview of nearby tracks appears.
The distance and direction to the starting
line of the track is displayed.
#
Select the desired track.
If you have already driven on this track, you
can select a driven time as a reference time.
Timekeeping begins automatically when the
starting line has been crossed.
%
When Zoom is selected, the track display
can be switched from 2D to 3D.
Displaying the analysis
#
Select Lap times.
An overview of all the driven times appears.
#
Select a track.
The following data is displayed:
R
Lap and sector times
R
Average and top speed
R
Driver
R
Vehicle
R
Date
R
Weather
#
Select a desired lap.
The analysis is displayed.
1
Parameter 1 (e.g. speed)
2
Parameter 2 (e.g. steering angle)
3
Speed trend (Parameter 1)
4
Steering angle trend (Parameter 2)
5
Time difference between lap A and B (only
when two laps are selected).
%
The following values can be set for parame‐
ters 1 and 2, for example:
R
Speed
R
Longitudinal/lateral acceleration
Multimedia system
209
R
Steering angle
R
Engine speed
R
Engine oil/tire temperature
Based on the analysis you can check and opti‐
mize driving characteristics for any position on
the track.
Exporting tracks or races (USB)
#
Select All tracks.
An overview of all stored tracks and races
appears.
#
Highlight desired tracks or races.
#
Select Ü Options.
#
Select Export.
The selected tracks or races can be exported
to a USB storage device connected to the
vehicle.
Editing tracks and recordings
#
Select All tracks.
#
Highlight the desired track.
#
Select Ü options.
#
Select Rename or Delete.
or
#
Select a track.
#
Highlight the desired recording.
#
Select Ü options.
#
Select Weather or Delete.
Setting Drag Race
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
TRACK PACE
5
Drag Race
Measuring acceleration
#
Select Acceleration.
Measurement begins when the vehicle accel‐
erates. Measurement is incremental, in steps
of 30 mph (50 km/h) up to a maximum of
180 mph (300 km/h) or up to the set maxi‐
mum speed.
Measurement can be stopped early by
selecting Stop or by stopping the vehicle.
Quarter-mile race
#
Select Quarter Mile.
The time measurement runs until a mile has
been traveled or a previously set distance
(e.g. 1/4 mile, 1/3 mile or 1/2 mile) has
been reached.
%
The possible values for setting the end dis‐
tance are determined by the system and
cannot be freely chosen.
Measurement can be stopped early by selecting
Stop or by stopping the vehicle.
Manual start for acceleration and quarter-
mile race
#
Select Acceleration or Quarter Mile.
#
Select Manual start.
Three red traffic lights appear one after the
other. The reaction time measurement starts
when they change to green at the same time.
The reaction time is displayed as soon as you
drive off. If you drive off too early, the mes‐
sage Jump start. will appear and acceleration
or quarter mile measurement will be can‐
celed.
210
Multimedia system
Measuring braking
#
Select Braking.
#
Select Start Record.
Measurement is incremental, in steps of
30 mph (50 km/h) to a standstill. If the brak‐
ing procedure is started e.g. at a speed of
99 mph (160 km/h), measurement starts as
soon as 90 mph (150 km/h) has been
reached.
Storing and calling up measurement values
When a measurement has been completed or
canceled, the measured time can be stored.
#
After a measurement, select Save measure-
ment? .
The stored measurements can be displayed via
the History menu item.
Editing measurements
#
Select History.
#
Highlight the desired measurement.
#
Select Ü options.
#
Select Weather or Delete.
%
The measurements can be displayed by cate‐
gory, e.g. acceleration measurements, by
applying a filter.
Calling up the telemetry display
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
TRACK PACE
5
Telemetry
The telemetry display shows current vehicle data
as a digital value and as a diagram. Up to four
parameters can be selected that are to be
shown in the display.
For example:
R
Engine speed
R
Wheel angle
R
Speed
R
Steering angle
#
Set the desired parameters.
#
Set the time.
The set parameters are evaluated in the dia‐
gram for the time set.
%
The time can range from a minimum of
30 seconds to a maximum of 20 minutes.
Configuring AMG TRACK PACE
Requirements
To use the TRACK PACE app:
R
The TRACK PACE app is installed on the
mobile end device.
R
The mobile end device is connected to the
multimedia system via Wi-Fi.
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
TRACK PACE
5
Options
Setting driver profiles
#
Select Driver Profile.
#
Create a new driver profile.
or
#
Select an existing driver profile.
The driver profile is activated.
Multimedia system
211
%
Tracks, laps and times driven are assigned to
the active driver profile while driving. For an
exact evaluation of your driving style, you
should always drive with an active driver pro‐
file.
Displaying driver profile statistics
#
Select Driver Profile.
#
Select the desired profile.
The following information is displayed for the
selected driver profile:
R
Driving time
R
Distance driven
R
Number of Track Races, Drag Races and
laps driven
R
Maximum speed
Connecting a mobile device via the TRACK
PACE app
The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record
videos and to synchronize them with stored
tracks.
#
Select the TRACK PACE app.
Already authorized devices are displayed in
the list.
#
Select Authorize new device.
Available devices are displayed.
#
Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to
be connected and follow the instructions.
#
Confirm the authorization prompt.
#
Enter the code displayed on the device.
The device is authorized.
or
#
Select a device that is already authorized.
The device is de-authorized.
Setting acoustic feedback
#
Select Acoustic feedback.
The following settings are available:
R
Loud
R
Medium
R
Quiet
R
Off
#
Select a setting.
Activating/deactivating additional informa‐
tion
#
Activate O or deactivate ª Display help.
When additional information is activated, popups
provide information on the individual menus.
#
Confirm popups with OK or select Do not dis-
play.
Calling up information
#
Select Info.
The following information is displayed:
R
Software version
R
Memory used
R
Total number of tracks saved
R
Total number of races driven
212
Multimedia system
Navigation
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Open the application in the multimedia sys‐
tem.
The map appears and shows current vehicle
position 1.
%
If a climate control setting is changed, a cli‐
mate bar appears briefly.
Showing/hiding the navigation menu
Requirements:
R
The map displays the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
To show: swipe left on the touchpad or the
Touch Control.
or
#
Slide the controller to the left.
#
To hide: swipe right on the touchpad or the
Touch Control.
Multimedia system
213
or
#
Slide the controller to the right.
%
To show or hide lower menu levels, swipe or
slide to the left or right as many times as
necessary.
Destination entry
Entering a POI or address
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Requirements:
R
For the online search: Mercedes me con‐
nect is available.
R
You have a user account for the Mercedes
me portal.
R
The service is available.
R
The service has been activated at an author‐
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Show the navigation menu.
#
Select ª Enter Destination .
The state or province in which the vehicle is
located is set 1.
There are two available methods of destination
entry:
R
Free search 2
R
Search step-by-step 3
Method 1: free search
#
Enter the POI or address in 2. The entries
can be made in any order.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
214
Multimedia system
Enter these address elements, for example:
R
City, street, house number
R
Street, city
R
ZIP code
R
POI name
R
POI category, e.g. Gas Station
R
City, POI name
#
To switch to handwriting recognition:
select v 5.
#
Write the character on the touchpad.
%
The function is available when a touchpad is
installed.
#
To switch to character selection: press the
% button.
or
#
Press the touchpad.
#
To delete an entry: select % 4 (if avail‐
able).
Use the following options:
R
Press briefly: deletes the last character
entered or the last suggestion adopted.
R
Press and hold: deletes the entire entry.
#
To set the language: select B 8.
#
Select the language.
%
This function is useful for countries in which
several character sets are supported. An
example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and
Latin characters.
#
To call up the online search function:
select Online Search 6.
Once an Internet connection is established, a
list appears. It shows online destinations
related to the previous entry.
Online destinations are provided by the Inter‐
net service provider.
#
Select the online destination.
or
#
Enter the online destination or a 3 word
address in the input line.
%
Enter a 3 word address (/ page 219).
Online search is not available in all coun‐
tries.
#
To call up the list: press the % button.
or
#
If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
ted, navigate upwards.
#
Select the destination in the list.
#
To adopt a destination: select 7 Select
Destination .
If there are several listings for a destination,
a list appears.
#
Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
Method 2: search step-by-step
#
Press % button.
or
#
If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
ted, navigate upwards.
The character bar is hidden. City or ZIP is
highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for
POI, are available.
#
Select City or ZIP.
The character bar appears.
Multimedia system
215
#
Enter the city or the ZIP code.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
The address entries can be made in any
order, for example:
R
City or ZIP, Street, House No.
Enter an intersecting street, if available.
R
Street, City or ZIP
R
POI, e.g. Gas Station, City or ZIP
%
During destination entry, use the following
functions:
R
Switch to handwriting recognition.
R
Switch to character selection.
R
Delete an entry.
An entry, e.g. POI, can be deleted with
£ in a step-by-step search. Navigate
to the left to do so.
R
Call up the online search function (if
available).
R
Call up a list.
The functions are described in the free
search.
#
To change the state/province: select the
state or the province.
#
Enter the state or the province. You only
need to enter the first character.
#
Select the state or the province in the list.
#
To change the country: select the country.
#
Enter the country. You only need to enter the
first character.
#
Select the country on the list.
#
To adopt a destination: select Select Desti-
nation.
If there are several listings for a destination,
a distance-orientated list appears.
#
Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
Selecting previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
#
Select Previous Destinations.
#
Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
or
#
If favourites have been saved already
(/ page 229), select From My Favorites.
#
Select the favourite.
The destination address is shown.
Selecting a POI
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
POIs
#
Select the category.
or
#
Select All Categories and the category.
If route guidance is not active: the search
begins in the vicinity of the current vehicle
216
Multimedia system
position. The list is sorted by distance in
ascending order.
The POIs show the following information:
R
name of POI
R
linear distance to the POI
R
the direction of the linear distance to the
POI (arrow) is displayed when searching
for the vehicle's current position
#
Select the POI.
#
Route guidance is active: select the search
position prior to choosing a POI (see exam‐
ple).
#
If intermediate destinations are set, these
can also be selected as the search position
after selecting Near Destination.
Filtering displays for POIs
#
Enter the search term in ª Search:.
The results list shows relevant POIs.
#
Select ¡.
The first POI in the list is highlighted.
#
Select the POI.
Example: setting the search position for the
parking category during active route guid‐
ance
#
Select In the Vicinity, Near Destination or
Along the Route.
The list shows the located POIs or opens an
overview of the route destination after
selecting Near Destination.
#
Select the POI.
#
Select Near Destination: select the inter‐
mediate destination or the destination.
Starting an automatic gas station search
Requirements:
R
The automatic gas station search is activated
O (/ page 223).
Driving situation
Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the
fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level.
The Reserve Fuel Do you want to start a search
for surrounding gas stations? message is shown.
#
Select Yes.
The automatic gas station search begins. The
available gas stations along the route or in
the vicinity of the vehicle's current position
are displayed.
#
Select the gas station.
The address of the gas station is displayed.
#
If route guidance is not active, select Start
Route Guidance.
The selected gas station is set as the desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.
or
#
If route guidance is active, select Start New
Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point.
Start New Route Guidance: the selected gas
station is set as a new destination. The previ‐
ous destinations and intermediate destina‐
tions are deleted. Route guidance to the gas
station begins.
Set as Next Way Point: the selected gas sta‐
tion is set as the next intermediate destina‐
tion. Route guidance begins.
Multimedia system
217
#
If there are already four intermediate des‐
tinations: select Yes in the prompt.
The selected gas station is entered into posi‐
tion 1 of the intermediate destinations menu.
Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route
guidance begins.
Entering an intermediate destination
Requirements:
R
A destination is entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Points and Info
#
Select Search for Way Point.
#
Enter the intermediate destination as a POI
or address (/ page 214).
#
Select the intermediate destination.
#
Select Set as Destination.
or
#
Select an intermediate destination using
ª Enter Destination during route guid‐
ance.
#
Select Set as Next Way Point after entering
the destination.
Editing intermediate destinations
Requirements:
R
The destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Points and Info
#
To call up the map: highlight the destination
or the intermediate destination.
#
Select ¥ Map .
#
Move the map (/ page 233).
#
Select destination on the map (/ page 220).
#
To change the order of destinations: high‐
light the destination or the intermediate des‐
tination.
#
Select ¥ Move .
#
Move the intermediate destination to the
desired position.
#
Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
#
To delete a destination: highlight the desti‐
nation or the intermediate destination.
#
Select ¥ Delete.
Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐
nations
Requirements:
R
The destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Points and Info
#
Select Start New Route Guidance.
The route is calculated with the set inter‐
mediate destinations.
Selecting a contact for destination entry
Requirements:
R
A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system (/ page 240).
R
Contacts have been downloaded
(/ page 244).
218
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
Contacts
#
Select the contact.
The contact details are displayed.
#
Select the address.
The Please Wait... message appears.
The search is carried out first online and then
in the multimedia system database.
#
Select the destination.
Filtering displays for contacts
#
Enter a name or telephone number, for exam‐
ple, into the search field.
#
Select ¡.
The first contact in the list is highlighted.
#
Select the contact.
#
Select the address.
Entering geo-coordinates
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
Geo-coordinates
#
Enter geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐
tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and
seconds.
The map shows the position.
#
Confirm the entry.
#
To calculate a route: select Start Route
Guidance.
#
If a route has already been created, select
Start New Route Guidance or Set as Way
Point.
Entering the destination as a 3 word address
Requirements:
R
Searching for a destination using 3 word
addresses is possible in the online search
(/ page 214).
R
There is an Internet connection.
%
Searching for a destination using 3 word
addresses is not possible in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
ª Enter Destination
#
Select Online Search.
#
Enter the destination address as a 3 word
address. Separate each of the words with a
full stop.
The search results are displayed.
#
Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
%
3 word addresses from what3words are an
alternative addressing system for multilin‐
gual georeferencing of global locations with
a resolution of three meters. Using this grid,
locations on the Earth's surface are included
which do not have a building address such
as street and house number, for example.
The Empire State Building has this language
dependent 3 word address:
R
English: parade.help.bleat
R
French: commun.verbe.bisquer
Multimedia system
219
R
Spanish: suertes.diga.pesca
3 word addresses are unique, easy to
remember and suffice for most routine appli‐
cations.
You can convert addresses to 3 word
addresses and back again:
R
at the website http://what3words.com
R
in the what3words apps
Selecting a destination on the map
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
#
Select Map Menu.
or
#
If the map is displayed in full screen mode,
press the central control element.
The map menu appears.
#
Select "move map" in map menu 2
(/ page 232).
#
Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
or touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller in any direction.
The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
tion under the crosshair. The more you move
your finger away from the starting position
on the touchpad, the faster the map moves.
#
Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
If several destinations are located around the
crosshair, a list shows the available POIs and
roads.
If a destination is located exactly on the
crosshair, the destination address is dis‐
played.
#
Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown.
Setting the map orientation to 2D or 3D
#
Highlight Map Orientation: 2D/3D.
#
Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the
controller.
The map will be displayed in the selected
map orientation.
Showing traffic messages in the vicinity of
the map
#
Select Traffic Messages for the Vicinity.
The map appears.
#
Swipe left or right on the touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller to the left or right.
The previous or next traffic incident is high‐
lighted on the map. Information on the traffic
incident is displayed.
%
Traffic reports are not available in all coun‐
tries.
Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map
#
Select POIs in the Vicinity.
#
Swipe left or right on the touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller to the left or right.
The previous or next POI is highlighted on the
map. The name or the address is shown.
#
To filter the display by POI category:
swipe down on the Touch Control or the
touchpad.
220
Multimedia system
or
#
Slide the controller down.
#
Select the POI category.
%
User Defined allows personal POI symbols to
be selected (/ page 233).
Route
Calculating a route
Requirements:
R
The destination has been entered.
R
The destination address is shown.
#
If route guidance is not active, select Start
Route Guidance.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows the route. Route guidance
then begins.
or
#
If route guidance is active, select Start New
Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point.
Start New Route Guidance: the selected des‐
tination address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the new destination begins.
Set as Next Way Point: the selected destina‐
tion address is set as the next intermediate
destination. Route guidance begins.
Taking alternative routes into consideration
#
Select an alternative route (/ page 223).
Other menu functions
#
To save the destination: select ¥ Store
in "Previous Destinations".
#
To display on the map: select ¥ Map.
#
To call a telephone number: select
¥ Call (if available).
#
To call up an Internet address: select
¥ www (if available).
Selecting a route type
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
#
Select Route Settings.
#
Select the route type.
If route guidance is active, the new route is
calculated with the new route type.
If route guidance is not active, the next route
is calculated with the new route type.
You can choose from the following route types:
R
Eco Route
An economical route is calculated. The jour‐
ney time may be somewhat longer than for
quicker routes.
The symbol for the current vehicle position is
displayed in green.
R
Fast Route
A route with a quick journey time is calcula‐
ted.
R
Short Route
A route with a short driving distance is calcu‐
lated.
Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance can be
switched on O or off ª for these route types.
If Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance is switched
Multimedia system
221
on, Ask in the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance can
be selected.
The Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance and Ask in
the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance settings are
not available in every country.
The settings enable the following:
R
Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance
The route is calculated with the currently set
route type.
Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are
taken into account.
Live Traffic Information is not available in all
countries.
R
Ask in the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance
A prompt appears when a new route is detec‐
ted with a shorter journey time based on traf‐
fic reports. You can continue to use the cur‐
rent route or use the dynamic route instead.
Selecting route options
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
5
Avoid Options
Avoiding areas
#
Select Areas (/ page 235).
Avoiding highways, ferries, motorail trains,
tunnels, unpaved roads
#
Select O or deselect ª avoid option.
Using toll roads
#
Select Use Toll Roads.
#
Select Cash or Electronic Billing or Off.
The route takes into account roads that
require the payment of a usage fee (toll).
If Off is selected, toll roads are not taken into
account.
The selected route options cannot always be
implemented. Therefore, a route may include a
ferry, for instance, even though the avoid Ferries
option is enabled. A message appears and you
will hear a corresponding message.
Using carpool lanes
#
Select Number of Occupants in the Vehicle.
#
Select number.
When using carpool lanes, observe the appli‐
cable legal requirements as well as any con‐
ditions pertaining to when and where such
lanes may be used. Carpool lanes may only
be used if certain conditions are met.
These route options are not available in every
country.
Selecting notifications
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Announcements
#
Switch an announcement on O or off ª.
You can choose from the following announce‐
ments:
R
Announce Traffic Warnings
This function is not available in all countries.
R
Announce Street Names
222
Multimedia system
The multimedia system announces the
names of the roads that will follow the
upcoming change of direction.
This function is not available in all countries
and languages.
Displaying destination information
Requirements:
R
A destination is entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Select Way Points and Info.
The following information is displayed:
R
Intermediate destinations and destination
The route can also include up to four
intermediate destinations.
R
Name, address
R
Remaining driving distance
R
Time of arrival
Selecting an alternative route
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
#
Select Alternative Route.
The routes are displayed in accordance with
the setting made in the route settings.
The currently selected route is shown with a
dark blue line.
#
Select the alternative route.
Switching the automatic gas station search
on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
#
Switch Reserve Fuel on O or off ª.
Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level
is reached, a prompt appears asking whether
you want to start searching for gas stations.
Using automatic gas station search
Requirements:
The automatic gas station search is activated O
(/ page 223).
The prompt Reserve Fuel Do you want to start a
search for surrounding gas stations? appears.
#
Select Yes.
The automatic gas station search begins. The
available gas stations along the route or in
the vicinity are displayed.
#
Select the gas station.
#
When there is no route, the gas station is set
as the destination.
or
#
When there is a route, the gas station is set
as the next intermediate destination.
Starting the automatic service station
search
Requirements:
R
ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest Rest
Area function are activated (/ page 155).
Driving situation
The ATTENTION ASSIST Do you want to search
for a rest area? message is shown.
Multimedia system
223
#
Select Yes.
The service station search starts. The availa‐
ble service stations along the route or in the
vicinity of the vehicle's current position are
displayed.
#
Select the service station.
The service station address is displayed.
#
If route guidance is not active, select Start
Route Guidance.
The selected service station is set as a desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.
or
#
If route guidance is active, select Start New
Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point.
Start New Route Guidance: the selected
service station is set as a new destination.
The previous destination and all intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the service station begins.
Set as Next Way Point: the selected service
station is set as the next intermediate desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.
Route guidance
Notes on route guidance
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated.
The road and traffic rules and regulations always
have priority over multimedia system driving
instructions.
The following driving instructions can be used:
R
Navigation announcements
R
Route guidance displays
R
Lane recommendations
If you do not follow the driving instructions or if
you leave the calculated route, a new route is
calculated automatically.
Driving instructions may differ from the actual
road and traffic conditions if:
R
The route is diverted
R
The direction of a one-way street has been
changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey as well as the prevailing traffic condi‐
tions.
The route may differ from the ideal route due to
the following:
R
Roadworks
224
Multimedia system
R
Incomplete digital map data
Notes on GPS reception
The correct function of the navigation system
depends amongst other things on GPS recep‐
tion. In certain situations GPS reception can be
impaired, defective or even not possible, e.g. in
tunnels or in parking garages.
Changing direction overview
There are three phases when changing direction:
R
Preparation phase
If there is enough time between the changes
of direction, the multimedia system prepares
you for the upcoming change of direction. A
navigation announcement is issued, e.g.
"Prepare to turn right".
The map appears in full-screen mode.
R
Announcement phase
The multimedia system announces the
upcoming change of direction, e.g. by
announcing "Turn right in 300 ft (100 m)".
The display is split into two parts. The map is
displayed on the left; on the right, there is a
detailed image of the intersection or a 3D
image of the upcoming change of direction.
R
Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the immi‐
nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing
"Now turn right".
The display is split into two parts.
The vehicle has successfully changed direc‐
tion when the light-color bar on the right
drops down to 0 feet (0 m) and the current
vehicle position symbol has reached the
highlighted change-of-direction point.
When the change of direction is complete,
the map appears in full-screen mode.
%
Changes of direction are also shown in the
Instrument Display.
Lane recommendations overview
This display appears for multi-lane roads.
If the digital map contains the relevant data, the
multimedia system can display lane recommen‐
dations for the next two changes of direction.
Multimedia system
225
1
Recommended lane
2
Possible lane
3
Lanes not recommended
The following lanes are displayed:
R
Recommended lane 1
In this lane, you will be able to complete both
the next change of direction and the one
after that.
R
Possible lane 2
In this lane, you will only be able to complete
the next change of direction.
R
Lane not recommended 3
In this lane, you will not be able to complete
the next change of direction without chang‐
ing lane.
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added.
%
Lane recommendations can also be shown in
the Instrument Display.
Overview of destination reached
Once the destination is reached, you will see the
Í checkered flag. Route guidance is finished.
When an intermediate destination has been
reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐
tion flag with the number of your Î inter‐
mediate destination. After this, route guidance is
continued.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
Requirements:
R
Route guidance is active.
#
To switch off: press the volume control on
the multifunction steering wheel during a
navigation announcement (/ page 195).
The Voice Guidance has been deactivated.
message appears.
or
#
Show the navigation menu (/ page 213).
#
Select ! Voice Guidance .
The symbol changes to #.
#
To activate: select # Voice Guidance .
The current navigation announcement is
played.
%
In the following situations, navigation
announcements are switched on automati‐
cally:
R
A new route guidance is started.
R
The route is recalculated.
%
You can add and call up this function as a
favorite under Voice Guidance On/Off.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
during a phone call
#
Select System.
226
Multimedia system
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Switch Voice Guidance During Call on O or
off ª.
Adjusting the volume of navigation
announcements
Requirements:
R
Route guidance is active.
#
On the multifunction steering wheel or
on the multimedia system: turn the volume
control on the multifunction steering wheel
during a navigation announcement.
or
#
During a navigation announcement press the
volume rocker switch on the center console
up or down (/ page 195).
%
In the following situations, the volume is
raised to the maximum volume or lowered to
the minimum volume:
R
A new route guidance is started.
R
The route is recalculated.
%
The minimum volume can be individually set
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
#
Via system settings: select System.
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Select Voice Guidance Volume.
#
Set the volume.
#
To switch audio fadeout on/off during
navigation announcements: select System.
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Switch Audio Fadeout During Voice Guidance
on O or off ª.
Repeating navigation announcements
Requirements:
R
A route has already been created.
R
Route guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Select ! Voice Guidance .
#
Select # Voice Guidance .
The current navigation announcement is
repeated.
%
You can add and call up this function as a
favorite under Repeat Voice Guidance.
Canceling route guidance
Requirements:
R
A route has already been created.
R
Route guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Select % Cancel Route Guidance.
Overview of route guidance to an off-road
destination
An off-road destination is within the digital map.
The map contains no roads that lead to the des‐
tination.
Multimedia system
227
You can enter geo-coordinates or a three word
address for off-road destinations on the map.
Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐
ble with navigation announcements and displays
on roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐
tem.
Shortly before you reach the last known position
on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the
direction arrow" announcement. The display
shows a direction arrow and the linear distance
to the destination.
Overview of route guidance from an off-road
location to a destination
Off-road position: the current vehicle position is
located within the digital map on roads that are
not available.
When route guidance begins the following dis‐
plays appear:
R
The Road Not Mapped message is shown.
R
A direction arrow showing the linear direc‐
tion to the POI.
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Overview of off-road status during route
guidance
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐
ferences between the data on the digital map
and the actual course of the road. In such cases,
the multimedia system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle's current position on
the digital map. The vehicle is off-road.
When the vehicle is off-road, the following dis‐
plays are shown:
R
the Road Not Mapped message
R
a direction arrow showing the linear direction
to the POI
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Destination
Saving the current vehicle position
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
If the map is displayed in full screen mode,
press the central control element.
The map menu appears.
#
Select 1 on the map menu (/ page 232).
The current vehicle position is saved to the
"Previous destinations" memory.
Storing a map position
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
The map is in full-screen mode.
#
Select "move map" in map menu 2
(/ page 232).
#
Select a position on the map.
If multiple entries are available for a map
position, a list appears.
#
Highlight an entry.
228
Multimedia system
#
Select ¥ Store in "Previous Destina-
tions" .
The map position is saved to the "Previous
destinations" memory.
Editing the previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
Previous Destinations
#
Highlight one of the previous destinations.
#
To save as a favorite: select ¥ Save My
Favorite .
The favorites are displayed.
#
Move the favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
#
To save as "Home" address: select ¥
Save as "Home" .
#
To save as "Work" address: select ¥
Save as "Work" .
#
To delete a single or all destinations:
select ¥ Delete or Delete All.
A prompt appears.
#
Select Yes.
#
To display destination information: select
¥ Details.
Using external destinations
External destinations can be received from the
following sources:
R
Mercedes-Benz Apps
R
Door-to-door navigation with Companion app
(USA)
%
Received destinations are saved in the previ‐
ous destinations.
A prompt appears on the media display.
#
A destination has been received without
picture information: select Yes.
#
If route guidance is not active, select Start
Route Guidance.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows the route. Route guidance
then begins.
or
#
If route guidance is active, select Start New
Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point.
Start New Route Guidance: the received des‐
tination address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the new destination begins.
Set as Next Way Point: the received destina‐
tion address is set as the next intermediate
destination. Route guidance begins.
#
A destination has been received with pic‐
ture information: select Start Route Guid-
ance.
Route guidance starts.
Route guidance with current traffic reports
Traffic information overview
Traffic reports are received using Live Traffic
Information and are used for route guidance.
This service is unavailable in some countries.
Multimedia system
229
There may be differences between the traffic
reports received and the actual road and traffic
conditions.
Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐
tion:
R
Current traffic reports are received via the
Internet connection.
R
The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐
lar intervals.
R
The subscription information shows the sta‐
tus (/ page 230).
Information on the vehicle's position is regularly
sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐
dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded
to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐
fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are
sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor
for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the
quality of the traffic reports.
If you do not wish to transmit your vehicle posi‐
tion, you can have this service deactivated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Displaying subscription information
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic
Information.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
The subscription expiration date is automatically
displayed:
R
one month before the expiration date.
R
one week before the expiration date.
R
on the expiration date.
#
To display manually: select Live Traffic Sub-
scription Info.
Depending on the status, one of the following
messages appears:
R
the period of validity for the subscription
is displayed.
R
the subscription has expired.
%
The subscription can be extended:
R
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
via an MB Info call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center
Displaying the traffic map
Requirements:
R
For Live Traffic Information: the vehicle is
equipped with a communication module fea‐
turing an activated, integrated SIM card.
R
When the vehicle is started, the communica‐
tion module automatically establishes an
Internet connection. Traffic information is
made available shortly afterwards.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Menu
#
Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the Touch Control, the
controller or the touchpad.
The map menu appears.
#
Activate º O.
The traffic map shows the following information,
for example:
R
traffic incidents, for example:
230
Multimedia system
-
roadworks
-
road blocks
-
warning messages
The symbols for traffic incidents are dis‐
played in color (on the route) or gray (off the
route).
R
traffic flow information:
-
traffic jam (red line)
-
slow-moving traffic (orange line)
-
heavy traffic (yellow line)
-
free-flowing traffic (green line)
R
display for traffic delays on the route lasting
at least one minute
R
warning message symbols:
-
Ô symbol
-
additional road safety notes when
approaching a traffic incident, e.g. the
end of a traffic jam
If the vehicle approaches a danger area
on the route, a warning message is dis‐
played on the map. A warning message
may also be issued (/ page 232).
Displaying traffic incidents
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Activate O Traffic Incidents.
Roadworks, road blocks, local area reports
(e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis‐
played.
Activating free flow and traffic display
#
Activate O Free Flowing Traffic and Traffic
Delays.
%
The traffic delay is displayed for the current
route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or
longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying details
#
Displays the traffic map (/ page 230).
#
Moves the map (/ page 233).
#
When a traffic report symbol is under the
crosshair, press on the central control ele‐
ment.
The traffic report details are displayed.
or
#
Press on the central control element.
#
Select Information on Traffic Reports.
The map shows the traffic report symbols in
the vicinity.
Traffic report information is displayed in the
status line:
R
Traffic report symbol
R
Reason for the traffic report, e.g. traffic
congestion
R
Warning message (highlighted in red)
#
To select a traffic report symbol: select
Next or Previous.
#
Press on the central control element.
The traffic report details are displayed.
Multimedia system
231
Issuing hazard warnings
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Announcements
#
Activate O Announce Traffic Warnings.
Warning messages are issued and tailbacks
which pose a risk are announced.
Map and compass
Map and compass overview
1
Saves the current vehicle position
2
Moves the map
3
Selects the map orientation and map view
4
Selects the function depending on the equip‐
ment:
• Sends a hazard warning via Car-to-X.
• Filters the display of POIs in the vicinity
according to POI category
5
Switches the display of personal POI sym‐
bols on the map on or off
6
Switches one of the following displays on or
off depending on the equipment:
• Weather information
• Satellite map
• Traffic incidents
7
Switches the traffic map display on or off
The map and satellite images are shown in globe
projection. This allows for a realistic map display
in all map scales. The map uses elevation model‐
ing.
Depending on the map data, important buildings
in many cities are depicted realistically on the
map in small map scales (e.g. 1/32 mi (20 m),
1/16 mi (50 m)). Other buildings are shown as
models.
%
You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (/ page 203).
232
Multimedia system
If online information is available, fuel prices and
the availability of parking spaces in parking
garage are displayed, for example.
%
Requirements:
R
Mercedes me connect is available.
R
You have a user account for the
Mercedes me portal.
R
The service has been activated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
%
The online information is not available in all
countries.
If Display in COMAND is activated in Traffic Sign
Assist (/ page 157), speed limits and overtak‐
ing restrictions are displayed on the map.
%
Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of the respective companies and
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
locations of these companies. The use of
such logos on the map does not indicate
approval of, support of or advertising by
these companies for the navigation system
itself.
Setting the map scale
Requirements:
R
The map is shown.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
%
You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (/ page 203).
Moving the map
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Menu
#
Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the central control ele‐
ment.
The map menu appears.
#
Select "Move map" in map menu 2
(/ page 232).
Selecting the map orientation
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Menu
#
Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the central control ele‐
ment.
The map menu appears.
#
In map menu 3 , select N, 2D or
3D(/ page 232).
R
N: the 2D map view is displayed so that
north is always at the top.
R
2D: the 2D map view is aligned to the
direction of travel.
R
3D: the 3D map view is aligned to the
direction of travel.
Selecting POI symbols
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Select POI Symbols.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Multimedia system
233
Standard displays symbols of predefined cat‐
egories on the map.
User Defined allows you to personally select
the symbols for the available categories.
None switches the display off.
#
Select a setting.
#
User Defined: select categories.
The POI symbols of the selected categories
are displayed O or not displayed ª.
Selecting the display of text information in
the map
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Text Information
#
Select text information.
Current Street shows the street you are cur‐
rently driving on at the bottom of the display.
When the map is moved, the following infor‐
mation appears under the crosshair:
R
Street name
R
POI name
R
Area name
Geo-coordinates displays the following infor‐
mation:
R
Longitude and latitude
R
Elevation
The elevation shown may deviate from
the actual elevation.
R
Number of satellites from which a signal
can be received
When the map is moved, this information
does not appear.
Climate Control displays the current climate
control settings.
None switches the display off.
Displaying the next intersecting street
Requirements:
R
Route guidance is not active.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
#
Activate O Next Intersecting Street.
The name of the next intersecting street will
be displayed at the upper edge of the display.
Displaying the map version
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
#
Select Map Version.
#
Select Details.
%
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Overview of avoiding an area
You can define areas along a route that you
would like to avoid.
The route can include an area that is to be avoi‐
ded in the following situations:
R
the destination is located in an area that is to
be avoided
R
if freeways are located within the area that is
to be avoided
Freeways are always taken into account for
the route.
R
there is no sensible alternative route
234
Multimedia system
Avoiding a new area
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
5
Avoid Options
5
Areas
#
Select Avoid New Area.
#
To search for an area via the map: select
Using Map.
#
Move the map
or
#
To search for an area using an address:
select Address Entry.
#
Enter the address.
#
Select Select Destination.
The map appears.
Changing an area
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
5
Avoid Options
5
Areas
#
Highlight an area in the list.
#
Select ¥ Edit.
Moving the area on the map
#
Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
or touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller in any direction.
Changing the size of the area
#
To start: press the Touch Control, the touch‐
pad or the controller.
#
To change: swipe up or down on the Touch
Control or the touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller up or down.
#
To stop: press the Touch Control, the touch‐
pad or the controller.
Taking the area for the route into account
#
Avoid O an area in the list.
If route guidance is active, a new route is cal‐
culated.
If there is no route yet, the setting is carried
over to the next route guidance.
Deleting one or all areas
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
5
Avoid Options
5
Areas
#
Highlight an area in the list.
#
Select ¥ Delete or ¥ Delete All.
#
Confirm the prompt with Yes.
One or all areas are deleted.
Map data update overview
Updating at the authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
The digital maps generated by the map software
become outdated in the same way as conven‐
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can
only be provided by the navigation system in
conjunction with the most up-to-date map data.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You can receive updates to the digital map there.
Multimedia system
235
Online map update
The online map update service from Mercedes
me connect can be used to update map data.
%
The online map update service is not availa‐
ble in all countries.
The following options are available for the
update:
R
the automatic map update updates map data
for one region.
For automatic map updates Automatic
Online Update must be activated in the sys‐
tem settings (/ page 207).
R
the manual map update updates map data
for several or all regions.
Further information on the online map update is
available at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or at http://www.mercedes.me.
Further information on updates: http://
manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/
en_GB/index.html.
Overview of map data
Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐
tory. Depending on the country, map data for
your region is either pre-installed or the map
data is supplied on a data storage medium.
If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐
led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you
do not need to enter the activation code.
For map data that you have purchased in the
form of a data storage medium, you must enter
the accompanying activation code.
%
If you save the map data on a data storage
medium with the online map update service,
no entry is required. The activation code is
stored on the data storage medium during
the downloading process.
Observe the following when entering the activa‐
tion code:
R
The activation code can be used for one vehi‐
cle
R
The activation code is not transferable
R
The activation code has six digits
In the event of the following problems, please
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
The multimedia system does not accept the
activation code
R
You have lost the activation code
Displaying the compass
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
#
Select Compass.
The compass display shows the following
information:
R
the current direction of travel with bear‐
ing (360° format) and compass direction
R
longitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
R
height (rounded)
R
number of GPS satellites from which a
signal can be received
Setting the map scale automatically
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
The map scale is set automatically depending on
your driving speed.
For journeys in cities with detailed city models, a
map view from the driver's perspective is used.
236
Multimedia system
#
Switch Auto Zoom on O or off ª.
%
The automatically selected map scale can be
changed manually for a short time. The set‐
ting is reset automatically after a few sec‐
onds.
Displaying the satellite map
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Switch Satellite Map on O or off ª.
or
#
If satellite map display 6 is available in the
map menu, switch it on O or off ª
(/ page 232).
Switched on O: satellite maps are displayed
in map scales of 2 mi (2 km) or less.
Switched off ª: satellite maps are not dis‐
played in map scales from 2 mi (2 km) to
10 mi (10 km).
%
Satellite maps for these map scales are not
available in all countries.
Displaying weather information
Requirements:
R
Mercedes me connect is available.
R
You have a user account for the Mercedes
me portal.
R
The service is available.
R
The service has been activated at an author‐
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Activate Weather Information O.
or
#
If weather information display 6 is available
in the map menu, activate O(/ page 232)
it.
Current weather information is displayed on
the navigation map, e.g. temperature or
cloud cover.
%
Weather information is not available in all
countries.
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
(navigation)
Calling up information on navigation
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Navigation Info
#
Select the topic.
Telephone
Telephony
Notes on telephony
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
Multimedia system
237
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
Further information can be obtained from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
238
Multimedia system
Telephone menu overview
1
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
2
Signal strength of the mobile phone network
for the currently connected and selected
mobile phone
3
Battery status of the currently connected
and selected mobile phone
4
¢ (telephone ready) or w (call active)
5
Contacts (/ page 244)
6
Recent Calls (/ page 246)
7
Text Message
8
One mobile phone connected: Active Call.
Two mobile phones connected: changes view
between telephone 1 and 2 or Active Call
9
Devices (/ page 240)
A
Options
Symbols 1 to 4 are not shown until after a
mobile phone has been connected to the multi‐
media system. The symbols depend on your
mobile phone and your mobile phone network
provider.
Multimedia system
239
Bluetooth
®
profile overview
Bluetooth
®
profile
of the mobile phone
Function
PBAP (Phone Book
Access Profile)
Contacts are auto‐
matically displayed in
the multimedia sys‐
tem
MAP (Message
Access Profile)
Message functions
can be used
Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐
ephony operating modes are available:
R
A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system via Bluetooth
®
(/ page 240).
R
Two mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(two
phone mode) (/ page 241).
Information on telephony
The following situations can lead to the call
being disconnected while the vehicle is in
motion:
R
There is insufficient network coverage in the
area
R
You move from one GSM or UMTS transmit‐
ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no
communication channels are free
R
The SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
R
A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged
into the network with the second SIM card at
the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD
Voice
®
for improved speech quality. A require‐
ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
mobile phone network provider of the person
you are calling support HD Voice
®
.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may fluctuate.
Connecting a mobile phone (Bluetooth
®
tel‐
ephony)
Requirements:
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the multimedia
system (/ page 200).
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
Searching for a mobile phone
#
Select Connect New Device.
#
Select Start Search on System.
The available mobile phones are displayed. If
a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated
by the # symbol.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorization
using Secure Simple Pairing)
#
Select the mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
240
Multimedia system
#
If the codes match: confirm the code on
the mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorization by
entering a passkey)
#
Select the mobile phone.
#
Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi‐
nation as a passkey.
#
On the multimedia system: enter the pass‐
key and select a.
#
On the mobile phone: enter the passkey
again and confirm.
%
Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorized
on the multimedia system.
Authorized mobile phones are reconnected
automatically.
Connecting a second mobile phone (two
phone mode)
Requirements:
R
At least one mobile phone is already connec‐
ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
.
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
#
Select Connect New Device.
#
Select Start Search on System.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
#
Select the mobile phone.
#
Answer the How would you like to connect
the new device? prompt.
#
To replace the currently connected
mobile phone: select Phone 1.
The currently connected mobile phone is
replaced by the new mobile phone.
or
#
To connect the second mobile phone:
select Phone 2.
The new mobile phone is connected as
Phone 2. If two mobile phones have already
been connected, the second telephone is
replaced by the new mobile phone.
or
#
To use the mobile phone as an audio
source: select Audio Source (/ page 274).
%
A mobile phone can be operated both as an
audio source as well as telephone in parallel.
%
It is possible at any future point to change
the type of connection for the mobile phone
already connected and to set this as Phone
1, Phone 2 or Audio Source (/ page 241).
Functions of the mobile phone in two phone
mode
Functions overview
Mobile phone in the
foreground
Mobile phone in the
background
Full range of func‐
tions
Incoming calls
Interchanging mobile phones (two phone
mode)
Requirements:
R
The mobile phones are authorized
(/ page 240).
Multimedia system
241
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
#
In the device overview, select a mobile phone
which has already been authorized and set
as Phone 1 or Phone 2.
After interchanging the mobile phones, the
mobile phone in the foreground is replaced by
the mobile phone in the background.
1
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
2
Connects a mobile phone as Phone 1
3
Connects a mobile phone as Phone 2
4
Connects a mobile phone as Audio Source
5
Disconnecting a mobile phone(/ page 242)
6
De-authorizing a mobile phone(/ page 242)
%
If a new mobile phone is connected and
defined as Phone 1, for example, this over‐
writes the previously connected mobile
phone in the foreground of the system.
Disconnecting a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
#
Select the i symbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
The disconnection of the mobile phone takes
place without a confirmation prompt. The
mobile phone remains authorized in the sys‐
tem.
De-authorizing a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
#
Select the % symbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
#
Answer the confirmation prompt with Yes.
The mobile phone is de-authorized and
deleted from the system.
242
Multimedia system
Setting the reception and transmission vol‐
ume
Requirements:
R
A mobile phone is authorized (/ page 240).
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Phone
This function ensures optimal language quality.
#
Select Reception Volume or Transmission
Volume.
#
Set the volume.
Further information on the recommended recep‐
tion and transmission volume: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Adjusting the call and ringtone volume
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
õ Audio
5
Phone
#
Select Call Volume or Ringtone Volume.
#
Set the volume.
Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐
nition
Requirements:
R
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system (/ page 240).
Starting mobile phone voice recognition
#
Press and hold the ó button on the multi‐
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can use mobile phone voice recognition.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition
#
Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi‐
function steering wheel.
Calls
Using the telephone
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
Making a call
#
Select Numerical Keypad.
#
Enter the number.
#
Select w.
The call is made.
Accepting a call
#
Select Accept.
Rejecting a call
#
Select Reject.
Ending a call
#
Select =.
Activating functions during a call
#
To show all functions, navigate down.
The following functions are available during a
call:
R
End Call
R
Make Additional Call
R
Keyboard (show to send DTMF tones)
R
Switch Mute Mic on O or off ª.
R
Private Mode (an active call in hands-free
mode is transferred over to the telephone)
Conducting calls with several participants
Requirements:
R
There is an active call (/ page 243).
R
Another call is being made.
Multimedia system
243
Switching between calls
#
Select call #.
The selected call is active. The other call is
on hold.
Activating or ending a call on hold
#
Select Continue Call or End Call.
Conducting a conference call
#
Select Create Conference Call in the tele‐
phone menu.
The new participant is included in the confer‐
ence call.
Ending an active call
#
Select =.
%
On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Accepting/rejecting a waiting call
Requirements:
R
There is an active call (/ page 243).
If you receive a call while already in a call, a
message is displayed. An acoustic signal also
sounds.
#
Select Accept.
The incoming call is active.
If only one mobile phone is connected with
the multimedia system, the previous call will
be put on hold.
If during a call you accept a call with the
other mobile phone when in two phone mode
then the existing call is ended.
#
Select Reject.
%
This function and behavior depends on your
mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
Contacts
Information about the contacts menu
The contacts menu contains all contacts from
existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or
memory card. You can store up to 6,000 con‐
tacts.
Depending on the data source, you have the fol‐
lowing number of contacts:
R
Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries
R
Contacts loaded from the mobile phone:
3,000 entries
From the contacts menu, you can perform the
following actions:
R
Using the telephone:
-
Calling a contact (/ page 246)
-
Calling a new number (/ page 243)
R
Navigation (/ page 218)
R
Compose messages (/ page 247)
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system (/ page 240) and automatic calling up
(/ page 244) is activated, the mobile phone's
contacts are displayed in the address book.
Downloading mobile phone contacts
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Contacts
Automatically
#
Switch Synchronize Contacts Automatically
on O.
244
Multimedia system
Manually
#
Deactivate ª Synchronize Contacts Auto-
matically.
#
Select Synchronize Contacts.
Calling up contacts
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
Depending on the character set, the following
options can be used to search for contacts:
R
searching by initials
R
searching by name
R
searching by phone number
#
Enter characters into the search field.
A selection of possible contacts appears.
Entering more characters into the search
field narrows down the number of possible
selections.
#
Select the contact.
A contact can contain the following details:
R
phone numbers
R
navigation addresses
R
geo-coordinates
R
Internet address
Editing the format of a contact's name
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Contacts
5
Name Format
The following options are available:
R
Last Name, First Name
R
Last Name First Name
R
First Name Last Name
#
Select an option.
Overview of importing contacts
Contacts from various sources
Source Requirements
ò Memory cardThe SD memory card
is inserted.
ò USB device The USB device is
inserted in the USB
port.
Source Requirements
ñ Bluetooth
®
con‐
nection
If the sending of
vCards via Bluetooth
®
is supported, vCards
can be received on
mobile phones or net‐
books, for example.
Bluetooth
®
is activa‐
ted in the multimedia
system and on the
respective device
(see the manufactur‐
er's operating instruc‐
tions).
ó Mobile phone The mobile phone is
connected to the mul‐
timedia system.
Importing contacts into the contacts menu
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Contacts
#
Select Import.
#
Select an option.
Multimedia system
245
Saving a mobile phone contact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Select the mobile phone contact ó.
#
Select p.
#
Select Save to Vehicle.
The contact saved in the multimedia system
is identified by the f symbol.
Calling a contact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Enter characters into the search field.
#
Select the contact.
#
Select the telephone number.
The number is dialed.
Selecting further options in the contacts
menu
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Select a contact.
#
Select p.
Depending on the stored data, the following
options are available:
R
Call
R
Send Text Message
R
Show Website (if an Internet address has
been stored)
R
Navigate (if an address has been stored)
R
Save My Favorite
R
Send DTMF Tones (for a number with DTMF
tones)
#
Select an option.
Deleting a contact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle.
#
Search for the contact.
#
Select the contact.
#
Select p.
#
Select Delete Contact.
#
Select Yes.
Call list
Call list overview
Depending on whether your mobile phone sup‐
ports the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile or not, this
can have different effects on the presentation
and functions of the call list.
If the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile is supported, the
effects are as follows:
R
The call lists from the mobile phone are dis‐
played in the multimedia system.
R
When connecting the mobile phone, you may
have to confirm the connection for the PBAP
Bluetooth
®
profile.
If the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile is not supported,
the effects are as follows:
R
The multimedia system generates its own call
lists.
R
The call list is not synchronized with the call
lists in the mobile phone.
246
Multimedia system
Making a call from the call list
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ø Recent Calls
#
Select a number.
The call is made.
Text messages
Overview of text message functions
If the connected mobile phone supports the
MAP Bluetooth
®
profile, the text message func‐
tions can be used on the multimedia system.
You can obtain further information about set‐
tings and supported functions of Bluetooth
®
-
capable mobile phones from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Some mobile phones require further settings
after being connected to the multimedia system
(see manufacturer's operating instructions).
New messages are identified by the i sym‐
bol in the media display and an audible signal.
Depending on the mobile phone, the multimedia
system only displays new incoming text mes‐
sages or the 100 newest text messages.
Configuring the text messages displayed
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Text Message
5
Message Display
#
Select p.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
All Messages
R
New and Unread Messages
R
New Messages
R
Off (The text messages are not displayed
automatically.)
#
Select an option.
%
The setting may not be active until the
mobile phone is reconnected.
Reading text messages
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
Reading a text message
#
Select a text message.
The message text is displayed.
Using the read-aloud function
#
Select a text message.
#
Select Read Aloud.
The text message is read aloud.
Composing and sending a text message
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
#
Select Write New Text Message.
Adding a recipient
#
Select Press to Add Recipient.
#
Select the contact.
Dictating text
#
Select Press to Dictate.
Multimedia system
247
#
To start the dictation function: press on
the central control element.
The app for the dictation function is loaded.
If there was no prior Internet connection, a
connection is now established.
#
Say the message.
The dictation ends automatically after you
have finished speaking.
After the voice message has been processed,
it is shown as text.
#
To replace a message: select Replace mes-
sage.
The text that has been dictated and shown
on the display is reset and can be dictated
again.
Editing text
#
Select the word.
#
To call up the correction menu: press on
the central control element.
The following options are available:
R
Adjusting the capitalization of words (if
supported by the character set)
R
Expanding the choice of words
R
Deleting the selection
R
Recording a new dictation
#
To leave the menu: select Done.
Sending text messages
#
Select Send Text Message.
Replying to a text message
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
#
Open the text message.
#
Select p.
#
Select Reply.
Calling a text message sender
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
#
Open the text message.
#
Select p.
#
Select Call Sender.
Deleting text messages
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
#
Select p.
#
To delete a text message: select Delete.
#
Outbox
or
#
Select Drafts.
Mercedes-Benz link
Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
248
Multimedia system
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Using Mercedes-Benz Link, various functions
and selected mobile phone apps can be transfer‐
red to the media display.
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen‐
tary equipment is required for this. You can
obtain this at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.
%
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses
the Android operating system.
%
The service provider is responsible for these
apps and the services and content connec‐
ted to it.
Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with the
multimedia system
#
Connect the Mercedes-Benz Link control box
with the ç USB port of the multimedia
connection unit using a suitable connecting
cable.
%
A suitable connecting cable is available sep‐
arately at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.
Using Mercedes-Benz Link
Requirements:
R
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box is con‐
nected with the multimedia system using the
ç USB port.
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
#
Select Mercedes-Benz Link.
#
Select MB Link.
The mobile phone functions and apps are
available and shown on the media display.
You can find more information in the Mercedes-
Benz Link control box operating instructions.
Ending Mercedes-Benz Link
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Mercedes-Benz Link
#
Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
or
#
Disconnect the connecting cable between
the Mercedes-Benz Link control box and the
multimedia system.
%
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle
is stationary.
Apple CarPlay
®
Overview of Apple CarPlay
®
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
Multimedia system
249
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
iPhone
®
functions can be used via the multime‐
dia system using Apple CarPlay
®
. They are oper‐
ated using the central control element or the
Siri
®
voice-operated control system. You can
activate the voice-operated control system by
pressing and holding the ó button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
When using Apple CarPlay
®
via the voice-oper‐
ated control system, the multimedia system can
still be operated via the Voice Control System
(/ page 176).
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Apple CarPlay
®
to the multimedia sys‐
tem.
The availability of Apple CarPlay
®
may vary
according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Apple CarPlay
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
Information on Apple CarPlay
®
While using Apple CarPlay
®
various functions of
the multimedia system, e.g. telephony or the
media sources Bluetooth
®
audio and iPod
®
, are
unavailable.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting an iPhone
®
via Apple CarPlay
®
Requirements:
R
Apple
®
operating system version iOS 8.3 or
above is installed on the iPhone
®
.
R
An Internet connection is required for the full
range of functions for Apple CarPlay
®
.
R
The iPhone
®
is connected to the multimedia
system via the USB port ç using a suita‐
ble cable (/ page 268).
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Apple CarPlay
Setting automatic or manual start
A message appears when connected for the first
time.
#
Automatic start: select Automatically.
Start Automatically is activated O.
Apple CarPlay
®
will now start immediately
after the iPhone
®
is connected to the multi‐
media system using a USB cable.
#
Manual start: select Manually.
#
Select the iPhone
®
in the device list.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
A message with the data protection regulations
appears.
#
Select Accept & Start.
or
250
Multimedia system
#
Select Decline & End.
Exiting Apple CarPlay
®
#
Press the ò button on the multifunction
steering wheel, for example.
%
If Apple CarPlay
®
was not displayed in the
foreground before disconnecting, the appli‐
cation starts in the background when recon‐
nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay
®
in
the main menu.
Calling up Apple CarPlay
®
sound settings
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Apple CarPlay
5
Sound
#
Select the sound menu (/ page 284).
Ending Apple CarPlay
®
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Apple CarPlay
#
Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
or
#
Disconnect the connecting cable between
the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
stationary.
Android Auto
Android Auto overview
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Mobile phone functions can be used with
Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐
tem on the multimedia system. It is operated
using the central control element or the voice
control. You can activate the voice-operated con‐
trol system by pressing and holding the ó
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
When using Android Auto via the voice-operated
control system, the multimedia system can still
be operated via the Voice Control System
(/ page 176).
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Android Auto to the multimedia system.
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto
Apps may vary according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Multimedia system
251
Information on Android Auto
While using Android Auto, various functions of
the multimedia system, for example the media
source Bluetooth
®
audio, are not available.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto
Requirements:
R
The first activation of Android Auto on the
multimedia system must be carried out when
the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons.
R
The mobile phone supports Android Auto
from Android 5.0.
R
The Android Auto app is installed on the
mobile phone.
R
In order to use the telephone functions, the
mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐
timedia system via Bluetooth
®
(/ page 240).
If there was no prior Internet connection, this
is established with the use of the mobile
phone with Android Auto.
R
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system via the USB port ç using a
suitable cable (/ page 268).
R
An Internet connection is required for the full
range of functions for Android Auto.
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Android Auto
#
Select the mobile phone from the device list.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
A message with the data protection regulations
appears.
#
Select Accept & Start.
or
#
Select Decline & End.
Activating automatic start
#
Select Start Automatically O.
Starting manually
#
Select the mobile phone from the device list.
Exiting Android Auto
#
Press the ò button on the multifunction
steering wheel, for example.
%
If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore‐
ground before disconnecting, the application
starts in the background when reconnected.
You can call up Android Auto in the main
menu.
Calling up the Android Auto sound settings
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Android Auto
5
Sound
#
Select the tone menu (/ page 284).
Ending Android Auto
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Android Auto
#
Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
252
Multimedia system
or
#
Disconnect the connecting cable between
the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
stationary.
Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto
and Apple CarPlay
®
Overview of transferred vehicle data
When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay
®
, cer‐
tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile
phone. This enables you to get the best out of
selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is
not directly accessible.
The following system information is transmitted:
R
Software release of the multimedia system
R
System ID (anonymized)
The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐
munication between the vehicle and the mobile
phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly
generated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐
tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐
media system is reset (/ page 208).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
R
Transmission position engaged
R
Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving
R
Day/night mode of the instrument cluster
The transfer of this data is used to alter how
content is displayed to correspond to the driving
situation.
The following position data is transmitted:
R
Coordinates
R
Speed
R
Compass direction
R
Acceleration direction
This data is only transferred while the navigation
system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it
can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel
Requirements:
R
You have access to a GSM network.
R
The contract partner's GSM network cover‐
age is available in the respective region.
R
The ignition is switched on so that vehicle
data can be transferred automatically.
Multimedia system
253
#
To make a breakdown assistance call:
press button 1.
#
To make an emergency call: press SOS
button cover 3 briefly to open.
#
Press and hold SOS button 4 for at least
one second.
#
To make an MB Info call: press button 2.
An emergency call can be initiated even if a
breakdown assistance or MB Info call is active.
This has priority over all other active calls.
Calls via the overhead control panel are only
possible with an available mobile phone net‐
work.
More information on Mercedes me connect and
further services can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
using the multimedia system
Requirements:
R
You have access to a GSM network.
R
The contract partner's GSM network cover‐
age is available in the respective region.
R
The ignition is switched on so that vehicle
data can be transferred automatically.
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Call Mercedes me connect.
The call is made.
Then, you can select a service and be con‐
nected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Center.
Information on the MB Info call
An Info call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center has been initiated via the overhead con‐
trol panel or the multimedia system .
You can find information on the following topics:
R
Activation of Mercedes me connect
R
Operating the vehicle
R
Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
Other products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Center .
Information on the breakdown assistance
call
A breakdown assistance call to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the
overhead control panel (/ page 253) or the
multimedia system (/ page 254).
254
Multimedia system
For the scope of accident and breakdown man‐
agement, see "Information on Mercedes me con‐
nect accident and breakdown management"
(/ page 256).
Data is transferred during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 255).
Arranging a service appointment via a
Mercedes me call
If you have activated the maintenance manage‐
ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center. You will then receive individual recom‐
mendations regarding the maintenance of your
vehicle.
Regardless of whether you have consented to
the maintenance management service, the multi‐
media system reminds you after a certain
amount of time that a service is due. A prompt
appears asking if you would like to make an
appointment.
#
To arrange a service appointment: select
Call.
After your agreement the vehicle data is sent
and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
employee deals with your appointment. The
information is then sent to your desired
service outlet.
This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐
ment and if necessary consult about the
details.
%
If you select Later after the service message
appears, the message is hidden and reap‐
pears at a later time.
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call
The data transferred during a Mercedes me call
depends on which service is selected in the
voice control system and whether Mercedes me
connect services are activated.
If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐
ted and the data protection prompt has been
confirmed the following data is transmitted:
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Mercedes me customer identification num‐
ber
R
Reason for the initiation of the call
R
Language set in the multimedia system
R
Confirmation of the data protection prompt
If a call is made for a service appointment via
the service reminder, the following data may be
transmitted:
R
Current mileage and maintenance data
Transfer is possible assuming the required
data transfer technology is supported by the
mobile service operator and the quality of
the mobile connection is sufficient.
If accident and breakdown management is called
via the voice control system and no service has
been activated, but the data protection query
has been confirmed, the following data can also
be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Center:
R
Current location of the vehicle
%
At the time of going to press, this function is
technically not yet available but can be sup‐
ported in the future.
If the data protection prompt has been rejected
the following data is transmitted:
R
Reason for the initiation of the call
R
Rejection of the data protection prompt
Multimedia system
255
Mercedes me connect
Notes on Mercedes me connect
Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv‐
ices.
Depending on whether the services are activated
and on the vehicle equipment, you can use the
following services via the multimedia system and
the overhead control panel, for example:
R
Accident and breakdown management
(breakdown assistance call button)
R
If the service is activated: Concierge Service
(Info call button)
R
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐
matic emergency call or SOS button in the
overhead control panel)
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are availa‐
ble for you around the clock.
The Info call button, the breakdown assistance
call button and the emergency call button can be
found on the overhead control panel of the vehi‐
cle (/ page 253).
You can call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Cen‐
ter using the multimedia system (/ page 254).
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always
call the national emergency services first using
the standard national emergency service phone
numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
(/ page 257).
Information on Mercedes me connect acci‐
dent and breakdown management
The accident and breakdown management can
include the following functions:
R
Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system (/ page 257)
If necessary, the contact person at the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for‐
wards the call to Mercedes me connect
breakdown and accident management. For‐
warding the call is however not possible in all
countries.
R
Breakdown assistance by a mechanic on
location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐
cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
You may be charged for these services.
More information about Mercedes me connect
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me
portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐
nect call services
The data transferred during a Mercedes me call
depends on which service is selected in the
voice control system and which Mercedes me
connect services are activated.
Which data is transferred for the services, can
be taken from the currently valid terms of use.
These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por‐
tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can
help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall
256
Multimedia system
in no way replaces assistance provided from
dialing 911.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is
available for at least ten years starting from the
manufacturing date.
Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas
where mobile phone coverage is available from
the wireless service providers. Insufficient net‐
work coverage from the wireless service provid‐
ers may result in an emergency call not being
transmitted.
eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-
Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended,
the system relies on the transmission of data
detailed in the "Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system data transmission" section that follows
(/ page 259).
To disable eCall, a customer must visit an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department
to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod‐
ule.
Deactivation of this module prevents the
activation of any and all Mercedes me con‐
nect services. After the deactivation of
eCall, automatic emergency call and manual
emergency call will not be available.
The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐
matic emergency call can be made.
%
eCall is activated at the factory.
%
eCall can be deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in
the event ownership of the vehicle is trans‐
ferred to another owner in its deactivated
state, eCall will remain deactivated unless
the new owner visits an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the
system.
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system
eCall can help to reduce the time between an
accident and the arrival of emergency services
at the site of the accident. It helps locate an
accident site in places that are difficult to
access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped
with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON.
As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the
event of an accident.
The emergency call can be made automatically
(/ page 258) or manually (/ page 258). Only
make emergency calls if you or others are in
need of rescue.
Only make emergency calls if you or others are
in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency
call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐
uation.
Displays in the media display:
SOS READY: eCall available
SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall
is not available.
During an active emergency call, G appears
in the display.
You can find more information on the regional
availability of eCall system at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect_ecall.
%
If there is a malfunction in the emergency
call system (e.g. a malfunction with the
speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a
corresponding message appears in the mul‐
tifunction display of the instrument cluster.
Multimedia system
257
Triggering an automatic emergency call
Requirements
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
If restraint systems such as airbags or Emer‐
gency Tensioning Devices have been activated
after an accident, the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system may automatically initiate an
emergency call.
The emergency call has been made:
R
A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center.
R
A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
can transmit the vehicle position data to one
of the emergency call centers.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel
flashes until the emergency call is finished.
It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐
matic emergency call.
If no connection can be made to the emergency
services either, a corresponding message
appears in the media display.
#
Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
If an emergency call has been initiated:
R
Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call center operator.
R
Based on the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams
and/or the police to the accident site.
R
If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐
lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual emergency call
#
Press and hold the SOS button in the over‐
head control panel for at least one second.
The emergency call has been made:
R
A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center.
R
A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
can transmit the vehicle position data to one
of the emergency call centers.
R
Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call center service provider.
R
On the basis of the call, the service provider
decides whether it is necessary to call res‐
cue teams and/or the police to the accident
site.
If no connection can be made to the emergency
services either, a corresponding message
appears in the media display.
#
Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentional emergency call
#
Select ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel. Depress button for several seconds.
258
Multimedia system
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐
gency call the following data is transmitted, for
example:
R
Vehicle's GPS position data
R
GPS position data on the route (a few
(hundred meters) before the incident)
R
Direction of travel
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Vehicle drive type
R
Number of people determined to be in the
vehicle
R
Whether Mercedes me connect is available
or not
R
Whether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically
R
Time of the accident
R
Language setting on the multimedia system
Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any
questions about the collection, use and sharing
of the eCall system data, please contact MBU‐
SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-
MERC.
For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100.
Customer requests for covered information
should be submitted via the same channels.
For accident clarification purposes, the following
measures can be taken up to an hour after the
emergency call has been initiated:
R
The current vehicle position can be called up.
R
A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established
Online and Internet functions
Internet connection
Information on connecting to the Internet
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Multimedia system
259
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐
ted degree whilst driving.
Function of the communication module
On vehicles with a built-in communication mod‐
ule, the Internet connection is established via an
integrated SIM card.
To use Internet access via the communication
module the following conditions must be met:
R
The vehicle is equipped with a permanently
installed communication module.
R
Mercedes me connect is active and ready for
operation.
R
Mercedes me connect is activated for Inter‐
net access.
R
Country dependent: data volume via
Mercedes me connect is available.
If the data volume limit is reached, the availabil‐
ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited.
The data volume must be purchased via
Mercedes me connect.
%
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter to find out whether it is possible to pur‐
chase data volume in your country.
Establishing an Internet connection
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
#
For example, select z Browser.
%
The multimedia system usually establishes
the Internet connection automatically. If the
multimedia system is not connected to the
Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐
lished when an Internet application is used.
%
The availability of web browsers is country-
dependent.
260
Multimedia system
Connection status
Connection status overview
1
Display of the communication module recep‐
tion field strength
2
Display of existing connection
Displaying the connection status
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
#
Select Internet Status.
%
In the case of a connection via the communi‐
cation module the following status informa‐
tion is shown:
R
Type of network
R
Status online/offline
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps
Requirements:
R
The registration for the use of Mercedes-
Benz Apps has been completed.
R
The general terms and conditions have been
confirmed.
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Ú Mercedes-Benz Apps
#
Select an app.
%
The available features are country-depend‐
ent.
License fees may be applicable.
Operating Mercedes-Benz Apps using voice
control
Requirements:
R
The registration for the use of Mercedes-
Benz Apps has been completed.
R
The general terms and conditions have been
confirmed.
The o symbol indicates that a Mercedes-
Benz app can be used via voice control.
#
Select a Mercedes-Benz app.
The app menu is displayed.
#
To use voice control: select o Lan-
guage.
#
Say the question or command.
%
Voice control is not available in all countries
and languages.
Multimedia system
261
Web browser
Calling up a web page
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
z Enter URL
#
Enter a web address.
%
The function is country-dependent.
#
To finish the entry and call up the web‐
site: select ¬.
Showing/hiding the web browser menu
If you call up a website by selecting a link, for
example, the web browser menu is hidden.
#
To show/hide: press the % button.
%
The web browser supports video playback.
%
No websites or videos are displayed while
the vehicle is in motion.
Web browser overview
1
URL entry
2
Bookmarks
3
Web page, back
4
Web page, forwards
5
Options
6
Closes the browser
262
Multimedia system
Calling up web browser options
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
The following functions are available:
R
Refresh Page/Cancel
R
Zoom
R
Browser Settings
R
Delete Browser Data
#
Select an option.
#
Make the desired changes to the settings.
Calling up the web browser settings
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
5
Browser Settings
The following functions are available:
R
Block Pop-Ups
R
Activate Javascript
R
Allow Cookies
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Deleting browser data
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
5
Delete Browser Data
The following options are available:
R
All
R
Cache
R
Cookies
R
Entered URLs
R
Form Data
#
Select an option.
#
Select Yes.
Managing bookmarks
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
ß Bookmarks
Selecting a bookmark
#
Select an entry.
Creating a bookmark
#
Select Add New Bookmark.
#
Enter a URL and a name.
#
Select ¡.
Editing a bookmark
#
Highlight a bookmark.
#
Select p.
#
Select Edit.
#
Enter a URL and a name.
#
Select ¡.
Deleting a bookmark
#
Highlight a bookmark.
#
Select p.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Closing the browser
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
#
Select å Close Browser.
Multimedia system
263
Internet radio
Calling up Internet radio
Requirements:
R
The Internet radio service is activated.
R
The data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may
need to be purchased.
R
A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐
sion free of interference.
The services are country-dependent.
For more information, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
#
Select TuneIn Radio.
The Internet radio display appears. The last
station set starts playing.
%
The connection quality depends on the local
mobile phone reception.
Internet radio overview
1
Internet radio provider
2
Selected category
3
Display (if connected to private user
account)
4
Data transfer rate
5
Current station is stored as a favorite
6
Additional information on the current station
Selecting and connecting Internet radio sta‐
tions
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
5
è Search
#
Select a category.
#
Select a station.
The connection is established automatically.
or
#
Select Enter Address or POI.
#
Enter a station name using the entry field.
%
A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using Internet radio.
Saving/deleting an Internet radio station as
a favorite
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
#
Select a station.
264
Multimedia system
#
Press and hold the central control element
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol appears by the station
name.
#
Select ß Favorites.
The list of saved favorite stations appears.
or
#
Create an account for the online provider
(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐
media system.
Your favorites are imported to the multimedia
system.
Deleting favorites
#
Select ß Favorites.
#
Select a station.
#
Press and hold the central control element
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol by the station name disap‐
pears.
Setting Internet radio options
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
5
Z Options
The following options are available:
R
Select Stream: select the stream quality.
R
Login to TuneIn Account: log in to your
TuneIn user account.
R
Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn
user account.
#
Select an option.
Media
Audio mode
Information on the audio mode
&
WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐
dling data storage media
If you handle a data storage medium while
driving, your attention is diverted from the
traffic conditions. This could also cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only handle a data storage medium
when the vehicle is stationary.
Permissible file systems:
R
FAT32
R
exFAT
R
NTFS
Permissible data storage medium:
R
SD card
R
USB storage device
R
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
R
MTP devices
R
Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
%
Observe the following notes:
R
The multimedia system supports a total
of up to 50,000 files.
R
Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup‐
ported (32‑bit address space).
Multimedia system
265
Supported formats:
R
MP3
R
WMA
R
AAC
R
WAV
R
FLAC
R
ALAC
%
Observe the following notes:
R
Due to the large variety of available
music files regarding encoders, sampling
rates and data rates, playback cannot
always be guaranteed.
R
Due to the wide range of USB devices
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all USB devices.
R
Copy-protected music files or DRM
encrypted files cannot be played back.
R
MP3 players must support Media Trans‐
fer Protocol (MTP).
Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora‐
tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym‐
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist
Plus are either registered trademarks or trade‐
marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
266
Multimedia system
"Made for iPod", and "Made for iPhone," mean
that an electronic accessory has been designed
to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the devel‐
oper to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this
device or its compliance with safety and regula‐
tory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod, or iPhone may affect wire‐
less performance.
For the USA: iPhone
®
, iPod
®
, iPod classic
®
,
iPod nano
®
, and iPod touch
®
are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun‐
tries. Lightning™ is a trademark of Apple Inc.
For Canada: iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod
nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Notes on copyright
Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself
for playback are generally subject to copyright
protection. In many countries, reproductions,
even for private use, are not permitted without
the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make
sure that you know about the applicable copy‐
right regulations and that you comply with these.
Activating media mode
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select a media source.
Playable music files are played back.
Inserting/removing an SD card
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal‐
lowing SD cards
SD cards are small parts.
They could be swallowed and lead to chok‐
ing.
#
Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil‐
dren.
#
Seek medical attention immediately if
an SD card has been swallowed.
*
NOTE Damage due to high temperatures
High temperatures may damage the SD card.
#
Remove the SD card after use and take
it out of the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
Mem. Card
Inserting
The multimedia connection unit is located in the
stowage compartment under the armrest.
#
Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
slot until it engages. The side with the con‐
tacts must face downwards.
Playable music files are played back.
Removing
#
Press the SD card.
#
Remove the SD card.
Multimedia system
267
Overview of the audio mode
1
Active data storage medium
2
Album cover
3
Track, artist, album
4
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
Full Screen (for video playback)
A
Options
Connecting USB devices
*
NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐
tures
High temperatures can damage USB devices.
#
Remove the USB device after use and
take it out of the vehicle.
268
Multimedia system
The multimedia connection unit is found in the
stowage compartment under the armrest and
has two USB ports.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, addi‐
tional USB ports can be found in the stowage
compartment of the center console.
#
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Playable music files are played back only if
the corresponding media display is activated.
%
Use the USB port identified by ç to use
Apple CarPlay™ and Android Auto.
Selecting a track in the media playback
Multimedia system:
4
Media
Selecting a track by skipping to a track
#
To skip backwards or forwards to a
track: navigate up or down.
Selecting a track using the current track list
#
Select è.
#
Select Current Track List.
#
Select a track.
Selecting playback options
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
Z Options
Playing back similar tracks
#
Select Play Similar Tracks.
A track list with similar tracks is created and
played back.
Playback mode
#
Select Random Mode - Current Playlist.
The current track list is played in random
order.
#
Select Random Mode - Current Medium.
All tracks on the active data storage medium
are played in random order.
#
Select Normal Track Sequence.
The current track list is played in the order it
appears on the data storage medium.
Controlling media playback
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
Y Playback Control
A bar with playback controls is shown.
#
To pause playback: select and confirm
Y with the central control element.
The Ë symbol is displayed.
#
To resume playback: select and confirm
Y again with the central control element.
The Ì symbol is displayed.
To fast forward/rewind
#
Move Ë on the timeline.
To hide the playback controls
#
Press the % button.
Video mode
Switching to video mode
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select a data storage medium.
#
Search for and select video files or playlists
with video files.
Playable video files are played back.
Multimedia system
269
The multimedia system supports the following
formats:
R
MPEG
R
AVI, DivX, MKV
R
MP4, M4V
R
WMV
%
If the vehicle is traveling faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h) the video image is hidden from the
driver. If available, the channel and program
information is continuously displayed.
Due to the large variety of available video
files regarding encoders, sampling rates and
data transfer rates, playback cannot be guar‐
anteed.
Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are sup‐
ported.
Copy-protected video files or DRM (Digital
Rights Management) encrypted files cannot
be played back.
270
Multimedia system
Overview of video mode
1
Active data storage medium
2
Album cover
3
Track, artist, album
4
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
Full Screen (for video playback)
A
Options
Activating/deactivating full-screen mode
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select a data storage medium.
Playable video files are played back.
#
To activate full-screen mode: select #
Full Screen.
Multimedia system
271
#
To deactivate full-screen mode: press the
touchpad.
Changing video settings
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
Z Options
5
Picture Format
The following picture formats are available:
R
Automatic
R
16:9
R
4:3
R
Zoom
#
Select a picture format.
Adjusting the brightness manually
If the Automatic picture format is switched off,
you can adjust the brightness yourself.
#
Select Brightness.
#
Adjust the brightness.
Media search
Starting the media search
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
ª Search
Depending on the connected media sources and
files, the following categories are listed:
R
Current Track List
R
Keyword Search
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Tracks
R
Folders
R
Music Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Videos
R
Podcasts (Apple
®
devices)
R
Audiobooks (Apple
®
devices)
#
Select a category.
%
The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read in and
analyzed.
Media Interface
Information about the Media Interface
Media Interface is a universal interface for the
connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul‐
timedia system has two USB ports. The USB
ports are located in the stowage compartment
under the armrest.
Supported devices
The Media Interface allows you to connect the
following data storage media:
R
iPod
®
R
iPhone
®
R
MP3 player
R
USB devices
For details and a list of supported devices, visit
our website at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in
the "Media Interface" section.
272
Multimedia system
Switching to Media Interface
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Connect a data storage medium to the USB
port (/ page 268).
#
Select a media device.
Playable music files are played back.
Overview of Media Interface
Multimedia system
273
1
Active data storage medium
2
Album cover
3
Artist, track and album
4
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
Full Screen (video playback only)
A
Options
Bluetooth
®
audio
Information about Bluetooth
®
audio
Before using your Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
with the multimedia system for the first time,
you will need to authorize it (/ page 275).
274
Multimedia system
Bluetooth
®
audio overview
1
Active data storage medium
2
Album cover
3
Track, artist, album
4
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
Full Screen (video playback only)
A
Options
Searching for and authorizing a Bluetooth
®
audio device
Requirements:
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment (/ page 200).
R
The audio equipment supports the Blue‐
tooth
®
audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
R
The audio equipment is "visible" for other
devices.
Multimedia system
275
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
á Bluetooth Audio
Authorizing a new Bluetooth
®
audio device
#
Select ¥.
#
Select Add New Bluetooth Audio Device.
#
Select Start Search on System.
Detected audio equipment is displayed in the
device list.
#
Select a Bluetooth
®
audio device.
Authorization starts. A code is displayed on
the multimedia system and on the mobile
phone.
#
If the codes are identical, confirm on the
audio equipment.
The audio equipment is connected and play‐
back starts.
Selecting previously authorized Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
#
Select ¥.
#
Select a Bluetooth
®
audio device.
Establishing a connection from the Blue‐
tooth
®
audio equipment
The Bluetooth
®
device name of the multimedia
system is MB BLUETOOTH XXXXX.
#
Select Search from Device.
#
Start the authorization on the audio equip‐
ment (see manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐
tem and on the audio device.
#
Confirm on both devices if the codes are
identical.
The audio equipment is connected and play‐
back starts.
With some audio equipment, playback must be
initially started on the device itself so that the
multimedia system can play the audio files.
%
Device-specific information on authorizing
and connecting Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile
phones can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Activating Bluetooth
®
audio
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select á Bluetooth Audio.
The multimedia system activates the connec‐
ted Bluetooth
®
audio equipment.
Selecting the media player on the Bluetooth
®
audio device
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
ª
#
Select the Bluetooth Audio Players category.
If multiple media players are present on the
Bluetooth
®
audio equipment a list appears.
#
Select a media player.
Playback starts.
%
The function is not supported by every
mobile phone.
276
Multimedia system
Searching for a music track on the Blue‐
tooth
®
audio device
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
á Bluetooth Audio
#
Select ª.
#
Select a category.
A track list appears.
#
Select a track.
%
The function is only available when the
mobile phone and the media player selected
on the mobile phone support this function.
Disconnecting Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
á Media Sources
#
Select the i symbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
The disconnection of the mobile phone takes
place without a confirmation prompt. The
mobile phone remains authorized in the sys‐
tem.
Radio
Switching on the radio
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
#
Open the application in the multimedia sys‐
tem.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last frequency
band selected.
Multimedia system
277
Radio overview
1
Active frequency band
2
Station name or set frequency
3
Artist, title, album and radio text
4
Station list
5
Presets
6
Radio Source
7
Sound
8
Options
278
Multimedia system
Switching the HD Radio function on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Z Options
5
HD Radio
#
Switch the function on O or off ª.
%
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation.
U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and
the HD, HD Radio and "Arc" logos are propri‐
etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Setting the waveband
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
HD Radio FM HD Radio AM and SiriusXM Radio
can be selected.
#
Select a frequency band.
Selecting a radio station
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
#
Navigate up or down.
Calling up the radio station list
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
è
#
Select a station.
Searching for radio stations using station
names or direct frequency entry
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
è
5
è
#
Enter a station name or frequency.
#
Select a.
The search results are displayed.
#
Select a station.
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
ß Presets
#
Select Store Current Station in the Presets.
Editing radio station presets
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
ß Presets
Moving stations:
#
Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the
left.
Multimedia system
279
#
Select Move Highlighted Station.
#
Select a memory preset.
Deleting stations:
#
Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the
left.
#
Select Delete Highlighted Station.
#
Select Yes.
Activating/deactivating radio text
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Z Options
5
Display Radio Text Information
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Satellite radio
Information on the satellite radio
SIRIUS XM
®
satellite radio offers more than 175
digital-quality radio channels providing 100%
commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐
tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio
employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to
broadcast around the clock throughout the USA
and Canada. The satellite radio program is avail‐
able for a monthly fee. Information about this
can be obtained from a Sirius XM
®
Service Cen‐
ter and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
%
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and
its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel
names and logos are the property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
Satellite radio restrictions
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail‐
able or interrupted for a variety of reasons.
These include environmental or topographical
conditions beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC. Thus, operation at certain locations
may not be possible.
Registering satellite radio
Requirements:
R
Satellite radio equipment
R
Registration with a satellite radio provider
R
If registration is not included when purchas‐
ing the system, your credit card details will
be required to activate your account
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
#
Select Service Information.
The service information screen appears
showing the radio ID and the current sub‐
scription status.
#
Establish a telephone connection.
#
Follow the service staff's instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes.
%
You can also have the satellite service acti‐
vated online. To do so, please visit http://
www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Switching on satellite radio
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
#
Select SiriusXM Radio.
280
Multimedia system
Overview of the satellite radio
1
Active frequency band
2
Logo or cover picture for the song (if availa‐
ble)
3
Category
4
Channel name
5
Artist, track and album
6
SiriusXM Radio Channels
7
Presets
8
Radio Source
9
Sound
A
Playback Control
B
Options
Selecting a satellite radio category
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
è SiriusXM Radio Channels
5
Category
#
Select a category.
Multimedia system
281
Selecting a satellite radio channel
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
#
Navigate up or down.
Saving or deleting a satellite radio channel
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
ß Presets
#
Select Store Current Station in the Presets.
Moving a channel
#
Select Options.
#
Select Move Highlighted Station.
#
Select a memory preset.
Deleting a channel
#
Select Delete Highlighted Station.
#
Select a memory preset.
Displaying EPG information for the current
channel
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
#
Select EPG Information about Current Chan-
nel.
Setting parental control for radio
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
5
Parental Control
#
Activate the function O.
#
Determine a four-digit character sequence
and select ¡.
All channels with adult content are locked.
Unlocking a channel
#
Enter the four-digit character sequence and
select ¡.
All channels with adult content are unlocked.
Music and sport alerts function
This function enables you to program an alert for
your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events.
Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being
played and sport alerts can be saved during a
live game. You can also specify sport alerts via
the menu option. The system then continuously
searches through all the channels. If a match is
found with a stored alert, you will be informed.
Setting music and sport alerts
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
5
Alert for Artist, Song & Sporting Event
Setting a music alert
#
Select Add New Alert.
or
#
Select Manage Artist & Song Alerts.
#
Select ¥ Options.
The following options are available:
R
Mark This Entry
R
Unmark This Entry
282
Multimedia system
R
Mark All Entries
R
Unmark All Entries
R
Delete This Entry
R
Delete All Entries
#
Select an option.
#
Activate Artist & Song Alerts O.
The alert is set for the current artist or track.
If a match is found, a prompt appears asking
whether you wish to change to the station.
Setting a sport alert
#
Select Add New Alert.
or
#
Select Manage Sports Alerts.
#
Select Select New Alerts.
or
#
Select Edit Alerts.
#
Select a team from a league.
#
Activate Sports Alerts O.
Information on Smart Favorites and Tune
Start
Stations in the station presets can be added as
Smart Favorites. Smart Favorites stations are
automatically saved to temporary storage in the
background. If you change to a Smart Favorites
station, you can replay, pause or actively skip
forward or back to broadcasts which you have
missed. If Tune Start is activated and you change
to another Smart Favorites station, the music
track currently playing on the station is automat‐
ically restarted from the beginning of the track.
Adding a channel to Smart Favorites
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
#
Select the active frequency band.
#
Highlight an entry.
#
Select ¥.
#
Select Add Highlighted Channel to Smart
Favorites.
Activating/deactivating TuneStart
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Z Options
5
TuneStart
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Controlling playback
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Y Playback Control
You can pause the playback of the current sta‐
tion or skip forward or backward in the timeline.
This leaves live mode to access the internal tem‐
porary storage.
#
To pause playback: select Ë.
#
To return to live mode: navigate to the end
of the timeline.
Displaying satellite radio service information
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
#
Select Service Information.
Multimedia system
283
Sound
Tone settings
Information about the sound system
The sound system has a total output of 100 W
and is equipped with four speakers. It is availa‐
ble for all functions in the radio and media
modes.
Calling up the sound menu
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
The following functions are available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance
R
Automatic Volume Adjustment
R
Other Sound Settings
#
Select a sound menu.
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐
tings
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Equalizer
#
Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass.
#
Change the settings.
Activating/deactivating automatic volume
adjustment
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Automatic Volume Adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Adjusting the balance
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Balance
#
Adjust the balance.
#
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Information about the Burmester
®
surround
sound system
The Burmester
®
surround sound system has a
total output of 640 W and is equipped with ten
speakers. It is available for all functions in the
radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu in the
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
The following functions are available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance
R
Automatic Volume Adjustment
R
Surround Sound
R
Other Sound Settings
#
Select a function.
284
Multimedia system
Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings
on the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Equalizer
#
Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass.
#
Set the desired values.
%
Recommended setting for treble, mid-range
and bass: Setting 0.
Activating/deactivating volume adjustment
in the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Automatic Volume Adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Adjusting the balance in the Burmester
®
sur‐
round sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Balance
#
Adjust the balance.
#
To exit the menu: press the % button.
%
Recommended setting for balance: Setting
0.
Switching surround sound on/off in the
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Surround Sound
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Burmester
®
high-end Surround sound sys‐
tem
Information on the Burmester
®
high-end Sur‐
round sound system
The Burmester
®
high-end Surround sound sys‐
tem has a total output of 1000 watts and is
equipped with 11 speakers. It is available for all
functions in the radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu in the
Burmester
®
high-end Surround sound sys‐
tem
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
The following functions are available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance
R
Automatic Volume Adjustment
R
VIP Seat (seat-based sound optimization)
R
Sound Profiles
R
Other Sound Settings
#
Select a sound menu.
Multimedia system
285
Adjusting the treble, mid-range and bass set‐
tings on the Burmester
®
high-end Surround
sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Equalizer
#
Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass.
#
Set the desired values.
%
Recommended setting for treble, mid-range
and bass: Setting 0.
Activating/deactivating volume adjustment
in the Burmester
®
high-end Surround sound
system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Automatic Volume Adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Adjusting the balance in the Burmester
®
high-end Surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Balance
#
Adjust the balance.
#
To exit the menu: press the % button.
%
Recommended setting for balance: Setting
0.
Adjusting the seat-based sound optimization
in the Burmester
®
high-end Surround sound
system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
VIP Seat
This setting optimizes the sound playback for the
selected seat position.
#
Activate the function O.
#
Select a seat position.
Selecting the sound profile in the
Burmester
®
high-end Surround sound sys‐
tem
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Sound Profiles
The following profiles are available:
R
Pure
R
Easy Listening
R
Live
R
Surround
#
Select a sound profile.
286
Multimedia system
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
Instrument Display provides information on the
remaining time or distance before the next
service due date.
You can hide this service display using the back
button on the left-hand side of the steering
wheel.
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may
shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following
cases:
R
Mainly short-distance driving
R
When the engine is often left idling for long
periods
R
In the event of frequent cold start phases
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such
operating conditions.
You can obtain information concerning the serv‐
icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Displaying the service due date
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
ASSYST PLUS
The next service due date is displayed.
#
To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Operating the on-board computer
(/ page 162).
Information on regular maintenance work
*
NOTE Premature wear through failure to
observe service due dates
Service work which is not carried out at the
right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
#
Always observe the prescribed service
intervals.
#
Always have the prescribed service
work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work
will need to be performed more often if the vehi‐
cle is operated under arduous conditions or
increased loads.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only
an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐
bility as regards to whether maintenance work
needs to be performed more often than speci‐
fied based on the actual operating conditions
and/or loads.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
R
regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐
ate stops
R
mainly short-distance driving
Maintenance and care
287
R
frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces
R
when the engine is often left idling for long
periods
R
operation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently
used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the
interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The
tires must be checked more frequently if the
vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐
ther information can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
can only calculate the service due date when
the battery is connected.
#
Note down the service due date displayed on
the instrument display before disconnecting
the battery (/ page 287).
Engine compartment
Opening/closing the hood
&
WARNING Risk of accident if the engine
hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
#
Never unlatch the engine hood while
driving.
#
Before every trip, ensure that the
engine hood is latched.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when opening and closing the engine
hood
When opening or closing the engine hood, it
may suddenly drop into the end position.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine hood's range of movement.
#
Only open or close the engine hood
when there are no persons in the
engine hood's range of movement.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment may continue to move or suddenly
move again even after the ignition has been
switched off, e.g. the cooler fan.
Make sure of the following before performing
tasks in the engine compartment:
#
Switch the ignition off.
288
Maintenance and care
#
Never touch the danger zone surround‐
ing moving component parts, e.g. the
rotation area of the fan.
#
Remove jewelry and watches.
#
Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from touching
component parts under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If you touch
component parts which are under voltage,
you could receive an electric shock.
#
Never touch component parts of the
ignition system or the fuel injection sys‐
tem when the ignition is switched on.
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wipers while the engine hood
is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind‐
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine
hood.
#
To open: pull lever 1 to release the hood.
Maintenance and care
289
#
Push handle 1 of the hood catch upwards
and lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm).
#
To close: lower the hood and let it fall from a
height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
#
If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open
the hood again and close it with a little more
force until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the oil
dipstick
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
The waiting time before checking the oil level
when the engine is at normal operating tempera‐
ture is two minutes.
#
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
#
Pull oil dipstick 1 out and wipe off.
290
Maintenance and care
#
Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again after
approximately three seconds.
The following measurement results are possi‐
ble:
R
Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2
and 3.
R
Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or
below.
R
Oil level too high: oil level is above 2.
#
If the oil level is too low, add 1.1 US qt
(1 liter) of engine oil.
#
If the oil level is too high, drain off excess
engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
Adding engine oil
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
#
Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening.
#
Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
nent parts before starting the vehicle.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#
Do not use engine oils or oil filters
which do not correspond to the specifi‐
cations explicitly prescribed for the
service intervals.
#
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#
Do not use additives.
#
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil
change.
*
NOTE Damage caused by adding too
much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter.
#
Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Maintenance and care
291
#
Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove
it.
#
Add engine oil.
#
Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
#
Check the oil level again (/ page 290).
Checking coolant level
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Risk of scalding from hot
coolant
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
particularly when the engine is warm. If you
open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out.
#
Let the engine cool down before open‐
ing the cap.
#
When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses.
#
Open the cap slowly to release pres‐
sure.
#
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
#
Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be in the bot‐
tom quarter of the temperature display.
#
Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to
relieve overpressure.
292
Maintenance and care
#
Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct in the following
cases:
R
If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to
marker bar 2.
R
If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to
0.6 in (1.5 cm) over marker bar 2.
#
If necessary, add coolant that has been
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Further information on coolant
(/ page 357).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system.
#
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler
opening.
#
Remove cap 1 by the tab.
#
Add washer fluid.
Maintenance and care
293
Keeping the air-water duct free
#
Keep the area between the hood and the
windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow
and leaves.
Cleaning and care
Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
reduced braking effect after washing the
vehicle
The braking effect is reduced after washing
the vehicle.
#
After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to
the traffic conditions until the braking
effect has been fully restored.
*
NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car
wash
#
Before driving into a car wash make
sure that the car wash is suitable for
the vehicle dimensions.
#
Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐
ance between the underbody and the
guide rails of the car wash.
#
Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a
car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function are deactivated.
R
the extendable rear wing is completely
retracted.
R
the side windows are completely closed.
R
the blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off.
R
the windshield wiper switch is in position g.
R
the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise
the tailgate could open unintentionally.
R
in car washes with a conveyor system: neu‐
tral i is engaged.
%
In car washes with a conveyor system: if you
would like to leave the vehicle while it is
being washed, make sure the SmartKey is
located in the vehicle. The park position j
is otherwise automatically engaged.
%
If, after the car wash, you remove the wax
from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
noise.
Information on using a power washer
&
WARNING Risk of accident when using
high-pressure cleaning equipment with
round-spray nozzles
The water jet from a round-spray nozzle (dirt
grinder) may cause damage to tires and sus‐
pension components that is not visible.
294
Maintenance and care
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly.
#
Do not use high-pressure cleaning
equipment with round-spray nozzles to
clean your vehicle.
#
Damaged tires or suspension compo‐
nents must be replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐
lowing when using a power washer:
R
Keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate
could open unintentionally.
R
Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in
(30 cm) to the vehicle.
R
Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in
(70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the
vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.
Move the power washer nozzle around whilst
cleaning. The water temperature of the
power washer must not exceed 124 °F
(60 °C).
R
Observe the information on the correct dis‐
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions.
R
Do not point the nozzle of the power washer
directly at sensitive parts such as tires, slits,
electrical components, batteries, light bulbs
and ventilation slots.
Washing the vehicle by hand
Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number
of countries, washing by hand is only permitted
in specially designated wash bays.
#
Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
#
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
#
Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and
dry using a chamois. Take care not to point
the water jet directly towards the air inlet
grille below the hood.
Maintenance and care
295
Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care
Observe the following information:
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintwork damage
Paintwork
R
Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the
treated areas afterwards.
R
Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R
Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gen‐
tly with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
R
Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and
clean water.
R
Tar stains: use tar remover.
R
Wax: use silicone remover.
R
Do not attach stickers, films or similar.
R
Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
296
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintwork damage
Matte finish
R
Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels.
R
Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engi‐
neering standards.
R
Do not use car wash programs with a final hot wax treat‐
ment.
R
Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products,
gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
R
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the notes on matte finish care in the
chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint‐
work care" (/ page 296). They also apply to
matte decorative foils.
Maintenance and care
297
Observe the following information:
Cleaning Avoiding damage to the decorative foil
R
For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without
additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
R
Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing
too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil
irreparably.
R
If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the
Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated
areas afterwards.
R
Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R
To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft,
absorbent cloth after every car wash.
R
The service life and color of decorative foils are impaired by:
-
Sunlight
-
Temperature, e.g. hot air blower
-
Weather conditions
-
Stone chippings and dirt
-
Chemical cleaning agents
-
Oily products
R
Do not use polish on matte decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect
of shining the foil-wrapped surface.
R
Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent
stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care
cannot always be completely repaired. In such
cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and
cleaning products from the manufacturer.
In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐
ferences may occur between the surfaces that
were not protected by a decorative foil after
removing a decorative foil.
%
Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
298
Maintenance and care
Notes on care of vehicle parts
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
windshield wipers are switched on while
the windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the
wiper arm.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades.
&
WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐
pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could
burn yourself.
#
Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and
supervise children especially closely in
this area.
#
Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
touching them.
Observe the following information:
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Wheels/rims
Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners.
R
Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R
To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive
the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking
it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.
Windows
Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with
a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning
agents to clean the inside of windows.
Wiper blades
Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth.Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Maintenance and care
299
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Exterior lighting
Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent,
e.g. car shampoo.
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable
for plastic lenses.
Sensors
Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the
radiator grill with a soft cloth and car shampoo.
When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of
11.8 in (30 cm).
Rear view camera
and front camera
Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. Do not use a power washer.
Extendable rear
wing
R
Extend the rear wing when washing by hand
(/ page 147).
R
Clean the rear wing with a soft car sponge and mild clean‐
ing agent, e.g. car shampoo.
R
Retract the rear wing completely after drying
(/ page 147).
Do not use a power washer.
Tailpipes
Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-
Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle.
Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
300
Maintenance and care
Notes on care of the interior
&
WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
parts breaking off after the use of sol‐
vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol‐
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous.
When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts
may break away.
#
Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐
ucts containing solvents to clean the
cockpit.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
weaken them.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to
tear or fail in an accident.
#
Never bleach or dye seat belts.
Observe the following information:
Cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Seat belts
Clean with lukewarm and soapy water.
R
Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
R
Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 176 °F
(80 °C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display
Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suit‐
able display care product (TFT/LCD).
R
Switch off the display and let it cool down.
R
Do not use any other cleaning products.
Plastic trim
R
Clean with a damp microfiber cloth.
R
For heavy soiling: use care product recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
R
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to
come in contact with the plastic trim.
Maintenance and care
301
Cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Real wood/trim ele‐
ments
R
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
R
Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and
soapy water.
R
For heavy soiling: use care product recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
Headliner
Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet
Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
Genuine leather
seat covers
R
Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R
Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec‐
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R
Do not use a microfiber cloth.
DINAMICA seat cov‐
ers
Clean with a damp cloth.Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Imitation leather
seat covers
Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Cloth seat covers
Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1% soapy water and
allow to dry.
302
Maintenance and care
Emergency
Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in front door stow‐
age compartments 1.
#
To remove: pull out the safety vest bag con‐
taining the safety vest.
#
Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest.
1
Maximum number of washes
2
Maximum wash temperature
3
Do not bleach
4
Do not iron
5
Do not tumble dry
6
Do not dry clean
7
Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard
are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
The safety vest must be replaced in the following
situations:
R
the reflective strips are damaged or dirty
R
the maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
R
the fluorescence has faded
Flat tire
Notes on flat tires
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat
tire
A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐
teristics as well as the steering and braking
of the vehicle.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
#
Do not drive on with a flat tire.
#
Change the flat tire immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
Breakdown assistance
303
#
Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat
tires).
In the event of a flat tire, the following options
are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐
ment:
R
Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐
sible to continue the journey for a short
period of time. Make sure you observe the
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
(/ page 304).
R
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair
the tire so that it is possible to continue the
journey for a short period of time. To do this,
use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 305).
R
Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you
can make a call for breakdown assistance in
the case of a breakdown (/ page 254).
R
All vehicles: change the wheel
(/ page 345).
Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire)
&
WARNING Risk of accident when driving
in emergency mode
When driving in emergency mode, the han‐
dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. when
cornering, when accelerating strongly and
when braking.
#
Do not exceed the permissible maxi‐
mum speed for MOExtended tires.
#
Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over
obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road).
This applies, in particular, to a loaded
vehicle.
#
Stop driving in the emergency mode if
you notice:
R
banging noise
R
vehicle vibration
R
smoke which smells like rubber
R
continuous ESP
®
intervention
R
cracks in tire side walls
#
After driving in emergency mode have
the rims checked by a qualified special‐
ist workshop with regard to their further
use.
#
The defective tire must be replaced in
every case.
With MOExtended tires (run-flat tire), you can
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐
ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly
visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the side
wall of the tire.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐
junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐
ing system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in
the multifunction display, proceed as follows:
R
Check the tire for damage.
R
If driving on, observe the following notes.
304
Breakdown assistance
Driving distance possible in emergency
mode after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition Driving distance pos‐
sible in emergency
mode
Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)
Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)
The driving distance possible in emergency
mode may vary depending on the driving style.
Observe the maximum permissible speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand‐
ard tire as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location
The TIREFIT kit is located on the left side of the
cargo compartment in the stowage compart‐
ment behind service flap 1.
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements:
R
Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres‐
sor available (/ page 305).
R
TIREFIT sticker available
R
Gloves available
You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐
tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly
those in the tire contact surface. You can use
TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F
(-20 °C).
&
WARNING Risk of accident when using
tire sealant.
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis‐
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
R
There are cuts or punctures in the tire
larger than those previously mentioned.
R
The wheel rim is damaged.
R
You have driven at a very low tire pres‐
sure or on a flat tire.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Breakdown assistance
305
&
WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
from tire sealant
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐
tion. Do not allow it to come into contact
with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not
swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes.
Keep the tire sealant away from children.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
#
Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately using water.
#
If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐
oughly rinse out the eyes using clean
water.
#
If tire sealant has been swallowed,
immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐
oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting and seek medical
attention immediately.
#
Change out of any clothes contamina‐
ted with tire sealant immediately.
#
If allergic reactions occur, seek medical
attention immediately.
*
NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐
tion compressor running too long
#
Do not run the tire inflation compressor
for longer than ten minutes without
interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali‐
fied specialist workshop every five years.
#
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have entered the tire.
#
Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
#
Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.
#
Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out
of the tire inflation compressor housing.
306
Breakdown assistance
#
Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of
tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.
#
Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards
into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres‐
sor.
#
Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the
faulty tire.
#
Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7.
#
Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
#
Switch on the ignition.
#
Press on and off switch 3 on the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐
ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly
rise to approximately 500 kPa 73 psi
((5 bar)).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐
sor during this phase.
#
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes.
The tire should then have attained a tire
pressure of at least 200 kPa (29 psi
(2.0 bar)).
If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the
affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐
ble to use clean water.
If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐
lene.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
200 kPa (29 psi (2.0 bar)) has not been
attained:
#
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
#
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the filling hose.
#
Drive forwards or reverse very slowly for
approximately 33 ft (10 m).
#
Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tire
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (29 psi
(2.0 bar)).
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance.
Breakdown assistance
307
Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too
low can significantly impair braking and han‐
dling characteristics.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
200 kPa (29 psi (2.0 bar)) has been attained:
#
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
#
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from driving
with sealed tires
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds.
#
Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#
Do not exceed the maximum speed
limit with a tire that has been repaired
using tire sealant.
#
Observe the maximum permissible speed for
a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph
(80 km/h).
#
Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker
to the instrument cluster in a location where
it will be easily seen by the driver.
*
NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire
sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out
from the filling hose.
#
Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal
Tire sealant contains pollutants.
#
Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
#
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
#
Pull away immediately.
#
Stop driving after approximately ten minutes
and check the tire pressure using the tire
inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (19 psi (1.3 bar)).
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached
after a brief drive, the tire is too badly dam‐
aged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire
in this instance.
Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too
low can significantly impair the braking prop‐
erties and the handling characteristics.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or
308
Breakdown assistance
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
#
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (19 psi (1.3 bar)). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar
on the driver's side or the tire pressure table
in the fuel filler flap for values.
#
To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
#
To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure
release button 1 next to manometer 2.
#
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the filling hose from the valve of the sealed
tire.
#
Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
sealed tire.
#
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor.
The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐
tle.
#
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle
and filling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12 V battery
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐
tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐
evant systems, for example the lighting sys‐
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating
safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
#
In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐
lar incident, contact a qualified special‐
ist workshop immediately.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R
Further information on ABS (/ page 131)
R
Further information on ESP
®
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries which have been tes‐
ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Breakdown assistance
309
Benz. These batteries provide increased impact
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐
aged in the event of an accident.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
ion battery
&
WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐
trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which
may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture
in the battery.
#
To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal
vehicle body before handling the bat‐
tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created
while the battery is charging and during starting
assistance.
&
WARNING Danger of chemical burns
from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.
#
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
#
Do not lean over the battery.
#
Do not inhale battery gases.
#
Keep children away from the battery.
#
Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐
oughly with plenty of clean water and
seek medical attention immediately.
All vehicles
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐
sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes
or clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular gloves, an
310
Breakdown assistance
apron and a face mask. Immediately
rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off
with clean water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
Observe the following if you do not intend to use
the vehicle over an extended period of time:
R
Activate standby mode.
R
Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat‐
tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or
consult a qualified specialist workshop to
disconnect the battery.
Notes on starting assistance and on charg‐
ing the 12 V battery
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐
tion point in the engine compartment.
*
NOTE Damaging the battery through
overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger with‐
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.
#
Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
All other vehicles
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐
tion point in the engine compartment.
*
NOTE Damaging the battery through
overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger with‐
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.
#
Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
&
WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
gen gas igniting
A battery generates hydrogen gas during the
charging process. If there is a short circuit or
sparks start to form, there is a danger of the
hydrogen gas igniting.
#
Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come
into contact with vehicle parts.
#
Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
#
When connecting and disconnecting the
battery, you must observe the descri‐
bed order for the battery clamps.
Breakdown assistance
311
#
When giving starting assistance, always
make sure that you only connect bat‐
tery terminals with identical polarity.
#
During starting assistance, you must
observe the described order for con‐
necting and disconnecting the jumper
cables.
#
Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐
tery clamps while the engine is running.
&
WARNING Risk of explosion during
charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting
assistance, the battery may release an explo‐
sive gas mixture.
#
Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking.
#
Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐
lation during the charging process and
during starting assistance.
#
Do not lean over a battery.
&
WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐
zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐
tures slightly above or below freezing point.
During starting assistance or battery charg‐
ing, battery gas may be released.
#
Always thaw a frozen battery out first
before charging it or performing start‐
ing assistance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument
cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐
zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
vehicle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a battery that has been
thawed may be dramatically shortened. The
starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐
cially at low temperatures.
It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐
tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
All vehicles
*
NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel.
#
Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting
assistance and when charging the battery:
R
Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg‐
ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps.
R
Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
parts while the jumper cable/charging cable
is connected to the battery/jump-start con‐
nection point.
R
The jumper cable/charging cable must not
come into contact with any parts which may
move when the engine is running.
312
Breakdown assistance
R
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged.
R
Keep away from fire and open flames.
R
Do not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when
charging the battery:
R
Only use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐
tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during
starting assistance:
R
Starting assistance may only be provided
using batteries with a nominal voltage of
12 V.
R
The vehicles must not touch.
R
Gasoline engines: Only accept starting
assistance if the engine and exhaust system
are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V
battery
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in position j.
R
The ignition and all electrical consumers are
switched off.
R
The hood is open.
Example: engine compartment
#
Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the
jump-starting connection point in the direc‐
tion of the arrow.
#
Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to
the positive pole of the donor battery using
the jumper cable/charging cable. Always
Breakdown assistance
313
begin with positive clamp 2 on your own
vehicle first.
#
During starting assistance: start the
engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle
speed.
#
Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐
tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle
by using the jumper cable/charging cable.
Begin with the donor battery first.
#
During starting assistance: start the
engine of your own vehicle.
#
During the charging process: start the
charging process.
#
During starting assistance: let the engines
run for several minutes.
#
During starting assistance: before discon‐
necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec‐
trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the
rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process
is complete, perform the following steps:
#
First, remove the jumper cable/charging
cable from ground point 3 and the negative
pole of the donor battery, then from positive
clamp 2 and the positive pole of the donor
battery. Begin each time with the contacts
on your own vehicle first.
#
After removing the jumper cable/charging
cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2.
Further information can be obtained at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery
#
Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(/ page 309).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Observe the following notes if you want to
replace the battery yourself:
R
Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specific vehicle require‐
ments.
The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐
ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith‐
ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is
only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith‐
ium-ion battery. For safety reasons,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use batteries which have been tested and
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R
Carry over detachable parts, such as vent
hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from
the battery being replaced.
R
Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐
nected to the original opening on the side of
the battery.
Install any existing or supplied cell caps.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could
escape.
R
Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐
nected in the same way.
314
Breakdown assistance
Tow starting or towing away
Permitted towing methods
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both
axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys‐
tems.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when towing
with steering wheel lock
You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle
if the steering wheel lock is engaged.
#
Always switch on the ignition when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow
bar.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐
ing away incorrectly
#
Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph
(50 km/h)
No No
Breakdown assistance
315
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the
ground
#
Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods (/ page 315).
#
Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged.
Observe the following points when the battery is
discharged:
R
The engine cannot be started
R
The electric parking brake cannot be
released or applied
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
ted to position i or j.
%
Vehicles with automatic transmission: If
the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
ted to position i, or the multifunction dis‐
play in the instrument cluster does not show
anything, have the vehicle transported away
(/ page 317). A towing vehicle with lifting
equipment is required for vehicle transporta‐
tion.
*
NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis‐
tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐
ing at excessively high speeds or over long
distances.
#
A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded.
#
A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
must not be exceeded.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when towing
a vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle being tow-started or towed
away is heavier than the permissible gross
mass of your vehicle, the following situations
can occur:
R
The towing eye may become detached.
R
The vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or even overturn.
#
If another vehicle is tow-started or
towed away, its weight must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of your own
vehicle.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away,
its permissible gross weight must not exceed the
permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle.
#
Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐
tification plate (/ page 351).
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do
not open the driver's door or front passenger
door, otherwise the automatic transmission
automatically shifts to position j.
#
Install the towing eye (/ page 318).
#
Fasten the tow bar.
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐
tion of the tow bar
#
Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
the towing eyes.
#
Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
(/ page 59).
316
Breakdown assistance
#
Do not activate the HOLD function.
#
Deactivate Active Brake Assist
(/ page 137).
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
#
Release the electric parking brake.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
ted safety-related functions during the
towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐
ger available in the following situations:
R
the ignition is switched off.
R
the brake system or power steering sys‐
tem is malfunctioning.
R
the energy supply or the on-board electri‐
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐
icantly more effort may be required to steer
and brake than is normally required.
#
Use a tow bar.
#
Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely, before towing the vehicle
away.
*
NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and the vehicles could be
damaged.
#
Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
#
Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 316).
#
Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in
order to load the vehicle.
#
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
%
The automatic transmission may be locked
in position j in the event of damage to the
electrics. To shift to i, provide the on-
board electrical system with power
(/ page 313).
#
Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
#
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
#
Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
#
Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
#
Make sure that the front and rear axles come
to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
Breakdown assistance
317
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to
incorrect positioning
#
Do not position the vehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehi‐
cle.
Towing eye storage location
The towing eye is located on the left side of the
cargo compartment in the stowage compart‐
ment behind service flap 1.
Installing the towing eye
#
Pull out cover 1.
#
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten.
%
Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
bumper when you remove the towing eye.
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of
the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
ess.
#
Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine
start)
*
NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
mission due to tow starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged
in the process of tow starting vehicles with
automatic transmission.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow started.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.
318
Breakdown assistance
Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐
ded.
This could result in a fire.
#
Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐
fied new fuses containing the correct
amperage.
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Electrical components or systems may be
damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐
tionality may be significantly impaired.
#
Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the
correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur‐
ther information to be observed are listed in the
fuse assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in
the cargo compartment (/ page 320).
*
NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused
by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
system or cause it to malfunction.
#
When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse
box.
#
When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐
rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
R
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
R
All electrical consumers are switched off.
R
The ignition is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
boxes:
R
Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 319)
R
Fuse box in the cargo compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel (/ page 320)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front
passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 319).
Breakdown assistance
319
Opening
#
Remove carpet 1 over the footrest.
#
Loosen screws 2 on the floor panel and
remove the floor panel.
Closing
#
Install the floor panel again.
#
Tighten screws 2.
#
Position the carpet back in place and press
down firmly.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
cargo compartment
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 319).
#
Turn the fastener on service flap 1 counter-
clockwise.
#
Open the service flap.
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on
the side of the fuse box.
320
Breakdown assistance
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐
teristics
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling
to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or
tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is
defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible to check the
wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire dam‐
age could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics. If you find no signs of damage,
have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tires
&
WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐
aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss.
As a result, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
#
Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires
immediately.
&
WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
insufficient tire tread
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced
tire grip. The tire tread is no longer able to
dissipate water.
This means that in heavy rain or slush the
risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particu‐
lar if vehicle speed is not adapted to suit the
conditions.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low,
tires may exhibit different levels of wear at
different locations on the tire contact sur‐
face.
#
Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tire
contact surface across the entire width
of all tires.
Minimum tread depth for:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
#
For safety reasons, replace the tires
before the legally prescribed limit for
the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐
ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
prior to a long journey or driving off-road:
R
Check the tire pressure (/ page 322).
R
Visually inspect tires and wheels for damage.
R
Check the valve caps.
The valves must be protected against mois‐
ture and dirt by the valve caps approved
especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R
Visual check of the tire tread depth and the
tire contact surface across the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tires is
â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in
(4 mm).
Wheels and tires
321
Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators
(arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They
are visible once a tread depth of approximately
á in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Notes on snow chains
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect mounting of snow chains
If you have mounted snow chains to the front
wheels, the snow chains may drag against
the vehicle body or chassis components.
This could cause damage to the vehicle or
the tires.
#
Never mount snow chains on the front
wheels.
#
Only mount snow chains on the rear
wheels in pairs.
*
NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from
mounted snow chains
If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels,
the wheel trims can be damaged.
#
Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before mounting snow chains.
Observe the following notes when using snow
chains:
R
Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain
information about this from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
R
For safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specifically approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains
with the same quality standard.
R
If snow chains are installed, the maximum
permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
R
Vehicles with level control: If snow chains
are installed, only drive at raised vehicle
level.
%
You can deactivate ESP
®
to pull away
(/ page 134). This allows the wheels to
spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Tire pressure
Notes on tire pressure
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient or excessive tire pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the
load and vehicle speed increase.
322
Wheels and tires
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
#
Comply with the recommended tire
pressure and check the tire pressure of
all tires including the spare wheel regu‐
larly:
R
at least once a month
R
when the load changes
R
before embarking on a longer journey
R
if operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving
#
Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
Tire pressure which is too high or too low can:
R
Shorten the service life of the tires.
R
Cause increased tire damage.
R
Adversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
insufficient tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐
heat and burst as a result.
In addition, they also suffer from excessive
and/or irregular wear, which can significantly
impair the braking properties and the han‐
dling characteristics.
#
Avoid excessively low tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause:
R
Tire defects as a result of overheating.
R
Impaired handling characteristics.
R
Irregular wear.
R
Increased fuel consumption.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from exces‐
sive tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can
burst because they are damaged more easily
by highway fill, pot holes etc.
In addition, they also suffer from irregular
wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐
ing properties and the handling characteris‐
tics.
#
Avoid excessively high tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too high can cause:
R
Increased braking distance.
R
Impaired handling characteristics.
R
Irregular wear.
R
Impaired driving comfort.
R
Susceptibility to damage.
&
WARNING Risk of accident caused by
repeated drop in tire pressure
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged.
Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires
to burst.
#
Inspect the tire for signs of foreign
objects.
Wheels and tires
323
#
Check whether the wheel or valve has a
leak.
#
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find information on tire pressure for the
vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following
labels:
R
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 329).
R
Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (/ page 324).
Observe the maximum tire pressure
(/ page 335).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure.
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: You can also check the tire pressure using
the on-board computer.
Only correct tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Conditions for cold tires:
R
The vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
R
The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C)
increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa
(0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when
checking the tire pressure of warm tires.
The tire pressure recommended for increased
load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect
the ride comfort.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable accessories on tire valve
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause a loss of tire
pressure. Aftermarket tire pressure monitor‐
ing systems will cause the tire valve to
remain open, depending on the design. This
can also result in a loss of tire pressure.
#
Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto
the tire valve.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
%
The data shown in the images is example
data.
The tire pressure table shows the recommended
tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehi‐
cle. The recommended tire pressures apply for
324
Wheels and tires
cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e.
loading and/or speed of the vehicle.
If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure,
the tire pressure information following is only
valid for those tire sizes.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different num‐
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ from this.
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim
diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and
can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 336).
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 322)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 329)
R
Maximum tire pressure (/ page 335)
Checking tire pressures manually
#
Read the tire pressure for the current operat‐
ing conditions from the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure
table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
#
Remove the valve cap of the tire to be
checked.
#
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
#
Read the tire pressure.
#
If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐
mended value, increase the tire pressure to
the recommended value.
#
If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐
mended value, release air. To do so, press
down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using
the tip of a pen for example. Then check the
tire pressure again using the tire pressure
gauge.
#
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
Further related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 322)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 324)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 329)
Wheels and tires
325
Tire pressure monitoring system
Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
&
DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect tire pressure
Every tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked when cold at least once a
month and inflated to the pressure recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer (see
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar on the driver’s side or the tire pres‐
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap
of your vehicle). If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
tire pressure table, you need to determine
the proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure indicator lamp when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, if the low tire pressure indicator
lamp lights up, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also increases fuel consump‐
tion and reduces tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and braking abil‐
ity. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi‐
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure indicator lamp.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure indicator lamp. When
the system detects a malfunction, the indica‐
tor lamp will flash for approximately a minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐
ted, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐
sons, including the installation of incompati‐
ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction warning
lamp after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop‐
erly.
The system checks the tire pressure and the tire
temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle
by means of a tire pressure sensor.
New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires,
are automatically taught-in during the first jour‐
ney they are used.
The tire pressure and the tire temperature
appear in the multifunction display
(/ page 327).
326
Wheels and tires
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the
tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned
in the following ways:
R
via display messages (/ page 391)
R
via the h warning lamp in the instrument
cluster (/ page 419)
The tire pressure monitoring system is only an
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure
suitable for the operating situation. Set the tire
pressure for cold tires using a tire pressure
gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the
current operating situation must first be taught-
in to the tire pressure monitoring system.
In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem will automatically update the new reference
values after you have changed the tire pressure.
You can, however, also update the reference val‐
ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring
system manually (/ page 328).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
the tire pressure has been set incorrectly
R
there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the
tire
R
there is a malfunction caused by another
radio signal source
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
notes on tire pressure (/ page 322)
Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Tires
One of the following displays appears:
R
Current tire pressure and tire temperature of
the individual wheels:
R
Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a
few minutes
R
Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in
process of the system is not yet complete.
The tire pressures are already being moni‐
tored.
#
Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐
mended tire pressure for the current operat‐
ing condition (/ page 324). Observe the
notes on tire temperature (/ page 322).
Wheels and tires
327
%
The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐
play may deviate from those of the tire pres‐
sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure value indicated by
a pressure gauge are higher than those
shown by the on-board computer. In this
case, do not reduce the tire pressure.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 322)
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
Requirements:
R
The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on
each of the four wheels (/ page 322).
Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in
the following situations:
R
The tire pressure has changed.
R
The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Tires
#
Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Use Current Pressures as New Refer-
ence Values? message is shown in the multi‐
function display.
#
To begin restart, press Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is
shown in the multifunction display.
Current warning messages are deleted and
the yellow h warning lamp goes out.
After you have been driving for a few
minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐
rent tire pressures are within the specified
range. The current tire pressures are then
accepted as reference values and monitored.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 322)
Radio-equipment approval of the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system
Radio equipment approval numbers
CountryRadio type approval number
Canada IC: 2546A-GG4T
IC: 2546A-DG6W2D4
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Le présent appareil est conforme
aux CNR d'Industrie Canada
applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploita‐
tion est autorisée aux deux con‐
ditions suivantes:
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit
accepter tout brouillage radioé‐
lectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
328
Wheels and tires
Country Radio type approval number
USAFCC ID: MRXGG4T
FCC ID: MRXDG6W2D4
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two con‐
ditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Loading the vehicle
Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac‐
ard
&
WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐
ded tires
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a
consequence. Overloaded tires can also
impair the steering and handling characteris‐
tics and lead to brake failure.
#
Observe the load-bearing capacity of
the tires.
#
The load-bearing capacity must be at
least half the gross axle weight rating of
the vehicle.
#
Never overload the tires by exceeding
the maximum load.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
1
Tire and Loading Information placard
Wheels and tires
329
%
The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows:
R
Maximum number of seats 2 according to
the maximum number of people permitted to
travel in the vehicle.
R
Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the
gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage.
R
Recommended tire pressures 1 for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are
valid for the maximum permissible load and
up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Please also note:
R
Information on permissible weights and loads
on the vehicle identification plate
(/ page 351).
R
Information on tire pressure in the tire pres‐
sure table (/ page 324).
Further related subjects:
R
Determining the maximum permissible load
(/ page 330)
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 322).
Determining the maximum permissible load
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur‐
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
#
Step 1: locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." ("The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.") on your vehicle's
Tire and Loading Information placard.
#
Step 2: determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be travel‐
ing in your vehicle.
#
Step 3: subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
#
Step 4: the resulting figure equals the per‐
missible cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example: If "XXX" equals 1400 lbs and there
are five occupants in your vehicle with a
weight of 150 lbs each, the maximum cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
#
Step 5: determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo that the vehicle will be
carrying. For safety reasons, this weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and lug‐
gage load capacity calculated in step 4.
330
Wheels and tires
Even if you have calculated the total load care‐
fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐
mum permissible gross mass and the maximum
gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not
exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle
identification plate.
#
Have your loaded vehicle – including driver,
occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle
weighbridge.
The measured values may not exceed the
maximum permissible values stated on the
vehicle identification plate.
Further related subjects:
R
Calculation example for determining the max‐
imum load (/ page 331)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 329)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 324)
R
Vehicle identification plate
Calculation example for determining the
maximum load
The following table shows examples of how to
calculate total and load capacities with varying
seating configurations and different numbers
and sizes of occupants. The following examples
use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐
cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (/ page 329).
The higher the weight of all the occupants, the
smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Step 1
Example 1Example 2
Combined maximum weight of occupants and
load (data from the Tire and Loading Information
placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg)1500 lbs (680 kg)
Wheels and tires
331
Step 2
Example 1Example 2
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
51
Distribution of the occupantsFront: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Weight of occupantsOccupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
Total weight of all occupants750 lbs (340 kg)200 lbs (91 kg)
Step 3
Example 1Example 2
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight
rating from the Tire and Loading Information
placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs
(589 kg)
332
Wheels and tires
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling
1
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(/ page 333)
2
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(/ page 334)
3
Maximum tire load (/ page 335)
4
Maximum tire pressure (/ page 335)
5
Manufacturer
6
Characteristics of the tire (/ page 336)
7
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 336)
8
Tire name
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Tire Quality Grading
In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐
portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐
ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade
their tires on the basis of the following three per‐
formance factors:
1
Tread wear grade
2
Traction grade
3
Temperature grade
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
%
The classification is not legally stipulated for
Canada, but it is generally stated.
Tread wear grade
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified test
track of the US Department of Transportation.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
Wheels and tires
333
and one-half times as well on the government
test track as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate
conditions.
Traction grade
&
DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐
quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include either accelera‐
tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
#
Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
traffic and weather conditions.
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from
wheelspin
#
Avoid wheelspin.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas‐
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces made of asphalt and
concrete.
Temperature grade
&
WARNING Risk of accident from tire
overheating and tire failure
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
#
Observe the recommended tire pres‐
sures and regularly check the tire pres‐
sure of all tires including the spare
wheel.
#
Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of per‐
formance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the requirements of the US Depart‐
ment of Transportation.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or
on the side wall of each tire produced.
334
Wheels and tires
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
The TIN is a unique identification number to
identify tires and comprises the following:
R
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire
complies with the requirements of the US
Department of Transportation.
R
Manufacturer identification code: manu‐
facturer identification code 2 contains
details of the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Further
information on retreaded tires (/ page 341).
R
Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire
size.
R
Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be
used by the manufacturer as a code to
describe specific characteristics of the tire.
R
Manufacturing date: manufacturing date
5 provides information about the age of a
tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the
calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions
state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208"
represents the 32nd week of 2008).
Information on the maximum tire load
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐
fied load limit. The maximum permissible load
can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐
er's side (/ page 329).
Specifications for maximum tire pressure
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Wheels and tires
335
Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐
fied for the tire.
Information on tire characteristics
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in side wall 1 and
under tire tread 2.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index
&
WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
#
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
#
Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
1
Preceding letter
2
Nominal tire width in millimeters
3
Aspect ratio in %
4
Tire code
5
Rim diameter
6
Load-bearing index
7
Speed rating
8
Load index
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Information about reading tire data can be
obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
336
Wheels and tires
Preceding letter 11:
R
Without: passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards.
R
"P": passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards.
R
"LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐
facturing standards.
R
"T": compact emergency spare wheels with
high tire pressure that are only designed for
temporary use in an emergency.
Aspect ratio 3
3:
Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐
cent (tire height divided by tire width).
Tire code 44 (tire type):
R
"R" radial tire
R
"D": bias ply tire
R
"B": bias belted tires
R
"ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above
149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)
Rim diameter 55:
The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter
of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified
in inches (in).
Load-bearing index 6
6:
Numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐
sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)).
The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at
least half the permissible axle load of your vehi‐
cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit.
See also:
R
Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (/ page 329)
R
Maximum tire load (/ page 335)
R
Load index
Speed rating 7
7:
Specifies the approved maximum speed of the
tire.
%
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating. You can obtain information on the
required speed rating from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
IndexSpeed rating
Qup to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Rup to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Sup to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Tup to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Hup to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Vup to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Wup to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Yup to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Wheels and tires
337
IndexSpeed rating
ZR...Y
1
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)
1
over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
1
over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index
in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to
186 mph (300 km/h).
R
If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there
is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐
imum speed is from the tire manufacturer.
R
If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7
are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of
your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To
find out the maximum speed, ask the tire
manufacturer.
All-weather tires and winter tires
IndexSpeed rating
Q M+S
2
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
2
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
2
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
2
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol
and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐
facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire
traction on snow.
Load index 88:
R
No specification given: standard load (SL)
tire
R
"XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐
forced tire
R
"Light Load": light load tire
R
"C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on
the maximum load that the tire can carry at a
certain pressure
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire structure and characteristics: describes
the number of layers or the number of rubber-
coated belts in the tire contact surface and the
tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐
ester and other materials.
Bar: metric unit for tire pressure.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-
marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
US Department of Transportation.
Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the
number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐
cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).
1
"ZR" stated in the tire code.
2
Or "M+S i" for winter tires
338
Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a
uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regard to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grading
assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐
ing specifications from the U.S. government. The
quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side
wall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐
ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified
for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐
tory.
The tire and information table contains the rec‐
ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐
imum permissible load and the maximum per‐
missible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐
ded tire pressures for cold tires under various
operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed
of the vehicle.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment: the combined weight of all standard
and optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is
installed.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR
is the maximum permissible axle load. The
actual load on an axle must never exceed the
gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight
rating can be found on the vehicle identification
plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire
identification. It specifies the speed range for
which a tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle
weight comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐
ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer
drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's
side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the
GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight
of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle
including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐
gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐
cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the
maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight
of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the
maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐
ment installed at the factory.
Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure.
6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for
tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals
1 bar.
Load index: in addition to the load-bearing
index, the load index may also be imprinted on
the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load-
bearing capacity of the tire more precisely.
Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐
ard equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air
conditioning system and optional equipment if
Wheels and tires
339
these are installed on the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage.
Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is
the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or
lbs for which a tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐
mum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on
one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐
mum axle load of one axle by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of
measurement for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying
an outward force to every square inch of the tire.
The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle
has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to
ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel
rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead
to prevent the tire from changing length on the
wheel rim.
Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread
and the tire bead.
Weight of optional equipment: the combined
weight of the optional equipment weighing more
than the replaced standard parts and more than
5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as
high-performance brakes, level control system, a
roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries,
is not included in the curb weight and the weight
of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique
identification number which can be used by a
tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example,
in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a
code that contains the maximum load-bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐
tion between the tires and the road surface.
Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars)
that are distributed over the tire contact surface.
If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear
limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution
of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐
tions in a vehicle.
Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐
nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg)
multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
340
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Notes on selecting, installing and replacing
tires
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect dimensions of wheels and tires
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are
installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen‐
sion components may be damaged.
#
Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of
the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the
correct:
R
Designation
R
Model
When replacing tires, make sure to install the
correct:
R
Designation
R
Manufacturer
R
Model
&
WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
#
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
#
Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
*
NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through
tire types and sizes that have not been
approved
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels
and accessories which have been specially
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
These tires are specially adapted to the con‐
trol systems, such as ABS, ESP
®
and
4MATIC, and marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-flat tire only for certain wheels)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐
tain AMG tires)
Certain characteristics, such as handling,
vehicle noise emissions, fuel consumption,
etc. may otherwise be adversely affected.
Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in
the tires rubbing against the body and axle
components when loaded. This could result
in damage to the tire or the vehicle.
Wheels and tires
341
Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been checked and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
*
NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐
ded tires
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires.
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐
anteed.
#
Do not use used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
*
NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires
when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tire section width.
The lower the tire section width, the greater
is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when
driving over obstacles.
#
Avoid obstacles or drive particularly
carefully.
*
NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts from the use of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: Electronic component parts are
located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools
should not be used in the area of the valve.
This could otherwise damage the electronic
component parts.
#
Have the tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
*
NOTE Damage to summer tires at low
ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could
form when driving with summer tires, caus‐
ing permanent damage to the tires.
#
At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C),
use M+S tires .
Accessory parts that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used
correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
and inquire about:
R
Suitability
R
Legal stipulations
R
Factory recommendations
&
WARNING Risk of accident with high
performance tires
The special tire tread in combination with the
optimized tire compound means that the risk
of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is
increased.
In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at
a low outside temperature and tire running
temperature.
#
Switch on the ESP
®
and adapt your
driving style accordingly.
#
Use M+S tire at outside temperatures
of less than 10 °C (50 °F).
342
Wheels and tires
Observe the following when selecting, installing
and replacing tires:
R
Only use tires and wheels of the same type
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires) and the same make.
R
Only install wheels of the same size on one
axle (left and right).
It is only permissible to install a different
wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order
to drive to the specialist workshop.
R
Only install tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
R
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: All installed wheels must be equip‐
ped with functioning sensors for the tire
pressure monitoring system.
R
At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use win‐
ter tires or all-season tire marked M+S for all
wheels.
Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym‐
bol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi‐
tions.
R
For M+S tires, only use tires with the same
tread.
R
Observe the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tires installed.
If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed,
this must be indicated by an appropriate
label in the driver's field of vision.
R
Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km).
R
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
R
When replacing with tires that do not fea‐
ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with
MOExtended tires are not equipped with a
TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle
with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires
that do not feature run-flat characteristics,
e.g. winter tires.
For more information on wheels and tires, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 322)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 329)
R
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 336)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 324)
Notes on rotating wheels
&
WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tires have different dimensions
may severely impair the driving characteris‐
tics.
The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com‐
ponents may also be damaged.
#
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐
sions.
Wheels and tires
343
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
differ:
R
Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of
the tire
R
Rear wheels wear more in the center of the
tire
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
available, rotate the tires every
3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km),
depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction
of rotation is maintained.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Changing a wheel" when doing so
(/ page 345).
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following
notes:
R
After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place.
R
Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tire-change tool kit
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit.
For more information on which tire-changing
tools are required and approved for performing a
wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
Required tire-change tools may include, for
example:
R
Jack
R
Chock
R
Lug wrench
R
Alignment bolt
The tire-change tool kit is located on the left side
of the cargo compartment in the stowage com‐
partment behind service flap 1.
344
Wheels and tires
Setting up the folding chock
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements:
R
The required tire-change tool kit is available.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire-
change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist
workshop to find out about suitable tools.
R
The vehicle is not on a slope.
R
The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
#
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
#
Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position.
#
Shift the transmission to position j.
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
#
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
#
If necessary, remove the hub cap cover
(/ page 345).
#
Raise the vehicle (/ page 346).
Installing/removing plastic hub caps
Removing
#
Remove socket 2 and lug wrench 3 from
the vehicle tool kit (/ page 344).
#
Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
#
Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2.
#
Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1
counter-clockwise and remove it.
Installing
#
Before installing, check hub cap 1 and the
wheel area for dirt, and clean if necessary.
Wheels and tires
345
#
Position hub cap 1 and turn until it is in the
right position.
#
Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
#
Position lug wrench 3 on socket 2 and
tighten hub cap 1.
Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm).
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements:
R
There are no persons in the vehicle.
R
The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 345).
Important notes on using the jack:
R
Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise
the vehicle.
R
The jack is only designed for raising and
holding the vehicle for a short time while a
wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐
nance work under the vehicle.
R
The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,
flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R
The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐
cally under the jack support point.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
R
Never place your hands or feet under the
vehicle.
R
Never lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake.
R
Do not open or close any doors or the tail‐
gate.
#
Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts
on the wheel you wish to change by about
one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com‐
pletely.
346
Wheels and tires
Position of jack support points
The jack support point is in the center between
the front and rear wheel arches (arrow).
Cover of jack support points
Before positioning the jack, you must remove
the cover for the jack support point.
#
To remove: pull the cover down until the lugs
are released from the holder.
#
Fold the cover away in a forward direction.
#
To install: fold the cover towards the body.
#
Pull the cover down and push it in until the
lugs engage.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
#
Only position the jack at the appropri‐
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The
base of the jack must be positioned
vertically under the jacking point of the
vehicle.
*
NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jack support point of the
vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐
cle raised.
#
The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐
port points.
#
Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool
kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the
jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
Wheels and tires
347
#
Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.
#
Turn crank 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits
completely on jack support point 1 and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
#
Turn crank 3 until the tire is raised a maxi‐
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
#
Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 348).
Removing a wheel
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is raised (/ page 346).
Vehicles with AMG ceramic high-perform‐
ance composite braking system:
*
NOTE Damage to the ceramic brake disk
when changing a wheel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic
brake disks: during removal and reposition‐
ing of the wheel, the wheel rim may strike
the ceramic brake disk and damage it.
#
Take particular care.
#
Ask another person for assistance or
use a second centering pin.
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
to the brake discs, since this could impair the
level of comfort when braking.
*
NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on
wheel bolts
#
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on
a dirty surface.
#
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐
pletely.
#
Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
#
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com‐
pletely.
#
Remove the wheel.
348
Wheels and tires
#
Install the new wheel (/ page 349).
Mounting a new wheel
Requirements:
R
The wheel is removed (/ page 348).
&
WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting
bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/
wheel nuts to come loose.
As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐
ing.
#
Never oil or grease the threads.
#
In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
#
Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐
aged hub threads replaced.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Observe the information on the choice of
tires (/ page 341).
For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an
arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐
tion of rotation when installing.
*
NOTE Damage to the ceramic brake disk
when changing a wheel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic
brake disks: during removal and reposition‐
ing of the wheel, the wheel rim may strike
the ceramic brake disk and damage it.
#
Take particular care.
#
Ask another person for assistance or
use a second centering pin.
#
Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
#
Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
#
Be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Changing a wheel"
(/ page 341).
#
For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts
which have been approved by Mercedes-
Benz and for the wheel in question.
*
NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel
rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
If the wheel has too much play when screw‐
ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint
can be damaged.
#
Press the wheel firmly against the
wheel hub when screwing on the first
wheel bolt.
Wheels and tires
349
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated until they are
finger-tight.
#
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
#
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
#
Lower the vehicle (/ page 350).
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
Requirements:
R
The new wheel has been installed
(/ page 349).
#
To lower the vehicle: turn the crank of the
jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
a maximum of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 to
the specified tightening torque of 133 lb-ft
(180 Nm).
&
WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐
rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque.
#
Make sure the wheel bolts or wheel
nuts are tightened to the prescribed
tightening torque.
#
If you are not sure, do not move the
vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop and have the tightening tor‐
que checked immediately.
#
Check the tire pressure of the newly moun‐
ted wheel and adjust accordingly.
#
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring
system (/ page 328).
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 322)
350
Wheels and tires
Notes on technical data
The data stated only applies to vehicles with
standard equipment. You can obtain further
information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine
number
Vehicle identification plate
Vehicle identification plate (USA only)
1
Permissible gross weight
2
Permissible front axle load
3
Permissible rear axle load
4
Vehicle model
5
VIN (vehicle identification number)
Technical data
351
Vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
1
Permissible gross weight
2
Permissible front axle load
3
Permissible rear axle load
4
Paint code
5
VIN (vehicle identification number)
The permissible gross vehicle weight is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle
weight rating is the maximum weight that can be
carried on one axle (front or rear axle).
Never exceed the permissible gross vehicle
weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating
for the front or rear axle.
VIN in front of the right-hand front seat
1
Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number)
2
Floor covering
VIN at the lower edge of the windshield
1
VIN (vehicle identification number) as label
352
Technical data
Additional plates
1
Plate with information about emissions test‐
ing, including confirmation of emissions
guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as
for California
2
Engine number stamped into the crankcase
3
VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label
at the lower edge of the windshield
Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids
&
WARNING Risk of injury from operating
fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐
ful to your health.
#
Observe the text on the original con‐
tainers when using, storing or disposing
of operating fluids.
#
Always store operating fluids sealed in
their original containers.
#
Always keep children away from operat‐
ing fluids.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal
#
Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Damage caused by the use of products that have
not been approved is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
You can identify operating fluids approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on
the container:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51 )
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating fluids
is available at the following locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation
-
At http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
Technical data
353
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
&
WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
#
Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided.
#
Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while
refueling the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#
Do not inhale fuel vapor.
#
Keep children away from fuel.
#
Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#
Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
#
If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
#
If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
#
Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel
Notes on fuel grade
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 353).
*
NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#
Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by
volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with
E10 fuel.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
R
Diesel
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
R
Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R
Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refueled with the
wrong fuel:
#
Do not switch the ignition on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
354
Technical data
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐
fur, this can produce unpleasant odors.
Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gaso‐
line with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded
regular gasoline which has at least the octane
number specified in the instruction label in the
fuel filler flap (/ page 120). This may reduce
engine performance and increase fuel consump‐
tion.
Never refuel using gasoline with a lower RON.
*
NOTE Premature wear through unleaded
regular gasoline
Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the
engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐
gevity and performance.
If unleaded premium grade gasoline is
unavailable and you have to refuel using
unleaded regular gasoline:
#
Only fill the fuel tank to half full with
unleaded regular gasoline and fill up as
soon as possible with unleaded pre‐
mium grade gasoline.
#
Do not drive at the maximum design
speed.
#
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3000 rpm.
Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐
lowing locations:
R
at a gas station
R
at a qualified specialist workshop
R
USA only: at http://www.mbusa.com
Information on additives in gasoline
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 353).
*
NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive
may lead to malfunctions occurring.
#
Only add cleaning additives recommen‐
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel
brands that have additives.
In some countries, the fuel available may not
have sufficient additives. Residue could build up
in the fuel injection system as a result. In this
case, in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Be sure to observe the notes
and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Tank content and fuel reserve
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
depending on the vehicle equipment.
Capacity
Model Total capacity
All models 19.8 gal (75.0 liters)
Model Of which reserve
All models3.2 gal (12.0 liters)
Technical data
355
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 353).
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#
Do not use engine oils or oil filters other
than those which meet the specifica‐
tions necessary for the prescribed
service intervals.
#
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#
Do not use additives.
#
Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
oil change carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Further information on engine oil and oil filters is
available at the following locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation:
-
At http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
at a qualified specialist workshop
Quality and capacity of engine oil
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Gasoline enginesMB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
All models 229.5, 229.51
The following values refer to an oil change,
including the oil filter.
Replacement amount
ModelReplacement
amount
All models1.8 gal (7.0 l)
Notes on brake fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 353).
356
Technical data
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐
tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low,
vapor pockets may form in the brake system
when the brakes are applied hard.
This causes the braking effect to be
impaired.
#
Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
You can obtain further information on brake fluid
in the following places:
R
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids
-
at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App
R
at a qualified specialist workshop
Coolant
Notes on coolant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 353).
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
#
Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze.
#
Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening.
#
Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze
from component parts before starting
the vehicle.
*
NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐
ant
#
Only add coolant that has been pre‐
mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐
tection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol‐
lowing locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for
Operating Fluids 310.1
-
At http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
*
NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐
peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the
engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐
tected against overheating and corrosion at
high outside temperatures.
#
Always use coolant approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Technical data
357
#
Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐
ating Fluids 310.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
concentrate in the engine cooling system should
be:
R
a minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C))
R
a maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 °F (-45 °C))
Coolant capacity
ModelCapacity
Mercedes-AMG GT 13.5 US qt
(12.8 liters)
Mercedes-AMG GT C14.6 US qt
(13.8 liters)
Notes on windshield washer fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 353).
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system.
#
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler
opening.
*
NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting
due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐
age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐
ing.
#
Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐
Fit.
*
NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
mixing windshield washer fluids
#
Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐
terFit with other windshield washer flu‐
ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill
level sensor may be triggered erroneously.
Recommended windshield washer fluid:
R
Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R
Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐
tion on the antifreeze container.
Mix the washer fluid with the windshield washer
fluid all year round.
Refrigerant
Notes on refrigerant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 353).
358
Technical data
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐
ant
If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐
mate control system may be damaged.
#
Only use the refrigerant R‑134a
*
NOTE Damage to the climate control
system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐
pressor oil
#
Only use refrigerant compressor oil that
has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
#
Do not mix the approved refrigerant
compressor oil with a different refriger‐
ant compressor oil.
Work on the climate control system may be car‐
ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop.
All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand‐
ard J639, must be adhered to.
The instruction label on the climate control sys‐
tem for the refrigerant type and the refrigerant
compressor oil is located on the inside of the
hood.
1
Hazard and service warning symbols
2
Refrigerant filling capacity
3
Applicable standards
4
PAG oil part number
5
GWP (Global Warming Potential) of the refrig‐
erant used
6
Refrigerant type
Symbols 1 warn of the following:
R
Possible dangers
R
The need to have service work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop only
Refrigerant filling capacity
Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil
Model Refrigerant
All models22.6 ± 0.4 oz
(640 ± 10 g)
Model PAG oil
All models4.2 ± 0.4 oz
(120 ± 10 g)
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the
following factors:
R
Tires
R
Load
R
Condition of the suspension
R
Optional equipment
Technical data
359
Opening height
Model Rear
wing
11 Opening
height
All models Retrac‐
ted
78.2 in ( 1985 mm)
Mercedes-
AMG GT C
Retrac‐
ted
78.2 in (1986 mm)
Mercedes-
AMG GT
Exten‐
ded
80.6 in (2046 mm)
Mercedes-
AMG GT S
Exten‐
ded
80.6 in (2047 mm)
Model Rear
wing
11 Opening
height
Mercedes-
AMG GT C
Exten‐
ded
80.6 in (2048 mm)
Mercedes-
AMG GT
Fixed 83.4 in (2118 mm)
Mercedes-
AMG GT S
Fixed 83.4 in (2119 mm)
Vehicle dimensions
Model Vehicle
length
All model 179.5 in
(4558 mm)
Mercedes-AMG GT C179.7 in
(4565 mm)
Model Vehicle
height
All models50.7 in
(1288 mm)
Mercedes-AMG GT 50.7 in
(1287 mm)
All models
Vehicle width including out‐
side mirrors
81.7 in
(2075 mm)
Wheelbase 103.5 in
(2630 mm)
Model Vehicle
width
All models76.3 in
(1939 mm)
Mercedes-AMG GT C78.6 in
(1996 mm)
360
Technical data
Model Turning
radius
All models37. 73 ft
(11.50 m)
Mercedes-AMG GT C Road‐
ster
37.63 ft
(11.47 m)
Weights and loads
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
R
items of optional equipment increase the
curb weight and reduce the payload.
Maximum design speeds
The following values only apply to vehicles with
the AMG Driver's Package.
Maximum design speeds
Mercedes-AMG GT
1st gear 43 mph (69 km/h)
2nd gear 68 mph (109 km/h)
3rd gear 91 mph (147 km/h)
4th gear 116 mph (187 km/h)
5th gear 146 mph (235 km/h)
6th gear 180 mph (289 km/h)
7th gear 189 mph (304 km/h)
Mercedes-AMG GT C
1st gear 45 mph (73 km/h)
2nd gear 65 mph (104 km/h)
3rd gear 87 mph (140 km/h)
4th gear 111 mph (178 km/h)
5th gear 139 mph (223 km/h)
Mercedes-AMG GT C
6th gear 171 mph (275 km/h)
7th gear 197 mph (317 km/h)
Technical data
361
Display messages
Introduction
Notes on display messages
Display messages appear on the multifunction
display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐
plified in the Operator's Manual and may differ
from the symbols on the multifunction display.
The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐
play messages in red. Certain display messages
are accompanied by a warning tone.
Please act in accordance with the display mes‐
sages and follow the additional notes in the
Operator's Manual.
For some display messages, a symbol is also
shown:
R
Õ Further information
R
¨ Hide display message
You can select the desired symbol by swiping
left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the Õ symbol to show further information
on the multifunction display. Press the ¨
symbol to hide the display message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing button ¤ or the left-hand Touch
Control. The display messages will then be
stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as
quickly as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐
den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐
play messages continuously until the cause of
the display message has been rectified.
Calling up stored display messages
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
1 Message
If there are no display messages, No Messages
will appear on the multifunction display.
#
Scroll through the display messages by swip‐
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
#
To exit the message memory: press the
¤ button.
362
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
!
÷
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*
ABS and ESP
®
are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ABS and ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
#
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
363
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ABS and ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*
ESP
®
is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
364
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
#
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
365
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
T
!
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
366
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Turn On the Ignition to
Release the Parking Brake
*
The red F (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.
#
Switch on the ignition.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
367
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Please Release Parking
Brake
*
The red F (USA only) indicator lamp or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
R
A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (/ page 129).
R
You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 130).
#
Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled.
#
Release the electric parking brake manually.
368
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Parking Brake See Opera-
tor's Manual
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
#
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
#
Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 130).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The
electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
#
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
#
Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 130).
or
#
Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 129).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
369
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
To apply:
#
Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 130).
To release:
#
Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is on and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Can‐
ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It
then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
If the battery charge level is too low:
#
Charge the battery.
To apply:
#
Switch the ignition off.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically.
370
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
If the electric parking brake should not be applied, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when
having the vehicle towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the
rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
#
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
#
Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 130).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release:
#
If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 130).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
371
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
$
(USA only)
J
(Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid Level
*There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Brake Pads See
Operator's Manual
*The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power
When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
372
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
6
SRS Malfunction Service
Required
*The restraint system is faulty (/ page 30).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Front Left Malfunction
Service Required (example)
*The corresponding restraint system is faulty (/ page 30).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
373
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Left Side Curtain Airbag
Malfunction Service
Required (Example)
*The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 30).
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in the window airbag
If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with high deceleration.
#
Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag Dis-
abled See Operator's Man-
ual
*The front passenger airbag and the knee airbag has been disabled, although an adult or a person with an adult
stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects
may be too low.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent and cannot perform its intended protective function.
374
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior,
especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
#
Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag deactivation system (/ page 41).
#
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator's
Manual
*The front passenger airbag and knee airbags are enabled while the vehicle is in motion:
R
even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the
front passenger seat
R
even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if a child restraint system is used while the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is
enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#
Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
375
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 41 ).
#
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions Currently Limited See
Operator's Manual
*Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 135).
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions Limited See Opera-
tor's Manual
*Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
*
The PRE‑SAFE
®
functions are malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
376
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Mercedes me connect
Services Limited See Oper-
ator's Manual
*Service limited.
At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.
#
Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 21).
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
G
Inoperative
*At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is
malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Radar Sensors Dirty See
Operator's Manual
*The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are:
R
Dirt on the sensors
R
Heavy rain or snow
R
Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Clean all sensors (/ page 299).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
377
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Restart the engine.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
é
ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper-
ative
*ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
Break!
*ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/ page 154).
#
If necessary, take a break.
378
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ä
Malfunction Drive at Max.
50 mph
*The AMG adaptive sport suspension system is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affec‐
ted.
#
Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h).
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's
Manual
*Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 157).
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
or
#
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
#
If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is especially dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal‐
functioning.
Blind Spot Assist Inopera-
tive
*Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
379
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Traffic Sign Assist Inopera-
tive
*Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
#
If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist Camera
View Restricted See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:
R
dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
R
heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Clean the windshield.
ë
Off
*The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met.
#
Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 143).
380
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ç
- - - mph
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.
#
Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 141).
ç
Suspended
*If you activate the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will be put
into passive mode (/ page 142).
ç
Off
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 141).
Active Distance Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 139).
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Active Distance Assist Inop-
erative
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
381
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist Now
Available
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 141).
¯
- - - mph
*Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
#
Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 138).
Cruise Control Inoperative
*Cruise control is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control Off
*Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 137).
RACE START Not Possible
See Operator's Manual
*Possible causes are:
R
The activation conditions are not met (/ page 145).
RACE START Canceled
*Possible causes are:
R
You released the accelerator pedal during RACE START.
R
You depressed the brake pedal during RACE START.
You can try RACE START again at the next start.
382
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
+
Check Coolant Level See
Operator's Manual
*The coolant level is too low.
*
NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
#
Add coolant (/ page 292).
#
Have the cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
?
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi-
cle Turn Engine Off
*The coolant is too hot.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could
come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
#
Wait until the engine has cooled down.
#
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
383
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
?
*The fan motor is defective.
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
To switch engine off, press
and hold Start/Stop but-
ton for at least 3 secs. or
press 3 times.
*You have pressed the start/stop button while driving.
#
To switch off the engine while driving, see (/ page 103).
#
12 V Battery See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.
#
Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
To charge the battery:
#
Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.
*If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
384
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
See Operator's Manual
*The battery is not being charged.
*
NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop Vehicle See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.
*
NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
385
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine
Running
*The battery charge level is too low.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#
Leave the engine running.
#
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
#
If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
8
Fuel Level Low
*The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#
Refuel.
8
Gas Cap Loose
*The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
#
Close the fuel filler cap.
#
If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
386
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine oil
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
5
Check Engine Oil Level
(Add 1 quart)
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
#
When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 291).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 356).
5
Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too high.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
387
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
5
Engine Oil Level Cannot Be
Measured
*The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
To Deselect P or N,
Depress Brake and Start
Engine
*
You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission
position.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Change the transmission position.
#
Start the engine.
Driver's Door Open &
Transmission Not in P Risk
of Vehicle Rolling Away
*
The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is engaged.
#
Engage neutral j when switching off the vehicle.
Apply Brake to Shift to 'R'
*
You have attempted to select transmission position k.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
388
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Select transmission position k.
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehi-
cle is Stationary
*
Park position j can be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary.
#
To stop, depress the brake pedal.
#
Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary.
Apply Brake to Shift from
'P'
*
You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
N Permanently Active Risk
of Rolling Away
*
While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged.
#
To stop, depress the brake pedal.
#
Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary.
#
To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.
Service Required Do Not
Shift Gears Visit Dealer
*The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed.
#
When transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans‐
mission position.
#
For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Possible
Service Required
*
The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position k cannot be selected.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
389
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Transmission Malfunction
Stop
*
The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Engage park position j.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine
Running Wait Transmission
Cooling
*The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#
Leave the engine running.
#
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Auxiliary Battery Malfunc-
tion
*The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Until then, manually select transmission position j before you switch off the engine.
#
Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
390
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
d
Transmission Oil Cooling
Malfunction
*The transmission's coolant pump is faulty. The transmission may overheat.
#
Select the Performance menu in the on-board computer and check the transmission oil temperature
(/ page 166).
#
Avoid a high load with a dynamic driving style.
#
If transmission oil temperatures are below 248 °F (120 °C), drive on to the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop.
d
Trans. Oil Overheated
Drive on with Care
*Transmission position M and the temporary manual driving program are no longer available. The engine output is
reduced depending on the overheating.
#
Let the transmission oil cool down by driving defensively until the display message goes out.
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Cur-
rently Unavailable
*There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are
being received. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable.
#
Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
391
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Inopera-
tive
*The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
&
WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss
in one or more of the tires.
Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics.
#
Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inop-
erative No Wheel Sensors
*The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
#
Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
h
Wheel Sensor(s) Missing
*There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec‐
ted tire.
#
Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
h
Check Tires
*The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.
392
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Observe the recommended tire pressure.
#
Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the tire pressure (/ page 322) and the tires.
h
Please Correct Tire Pres-
sure
*The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual
wheels is too great.
#
Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary.
#
When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 328).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
393
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
Warning Tire Malfunction
*The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire
Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways:
R
The tires can overheat and cause a fire.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Do not drive with a flat tire.
#
Observe the notes on flat tires.
Notes on flat tires (/ page 303).
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the tires.
Tires Overheated
*At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.
#
Drive more slowly.
Decrease Speed
*At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.
394
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires may burst, particularly at high speeds.
#
Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
#
Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Obtain a New Key
*The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
Replace Key Battery
*The SmartKey battery is discharged.
#
Replace the battery (/ page 54).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
395
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Key Not Detected (white
display message)
*The SmartKey is currently undetected.
#
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
#
If the SmartKey is still not recognized, start the vehicle with the SmartKey (/ page 104).
Â
Key Not Detected (red dis‐
play message)
*The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:
R
You can no longer start the engine.
R
You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
#
Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Start the vehicle with the SmartKey (/ page 104).
Â
Insert Key
*The SmartKey is not detected continuously.
Detection of the SmartKey is temporarily malfunctioning or faulty. A warning tone will also sound.
#
Insert the SmartKey in the ignition lock and turn to the desired key position.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
396
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Don't Forget Your Key
*Awarning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the
vehicle.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
d
Vehicle Ready to Drive
Switch the Ignition Off
Before Exiting
*You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
#
When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart‐
Key with you.
#
If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12V
battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only using a donor battery (starting assis‐
tance).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
397
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ù
Steering Malfunction
Increased Physical Effort
See Operator's Manual
*The power assistance for the steering is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
#
If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#
Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
#
If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#
Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Ù
Steering Malfunction Stop
Immediately See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is considerably impaired.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
398
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ù
Rear Axle Steering Malfunc-
tion Service Required
*The rear-axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.
The steering wheel may not be centered when you drive in a straight line.
#
Adapt your speed and continue driving carefully.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Ù
Rear Axle Steering Cur-
rently Unavailable
*The rear-axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Electronic Rear Axle Differ-
ential Lock Inoperative
*The electronic rear axle locking differential is inoperative.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Electronic Rear Axle Differ-
ential Lock Currently
Unavailable
*The motor of the electronic rear axle locking differential is overheating.
#
Let the electronic rear axle locking differential cool down by driving defensively.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
399
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Õ
Traction Control Inopera-
tive See Operator's Manual
*The traction control is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Ô
Spoilers Extended Caution,
Reduced Ground Clearance
*The active aerodynamic profile cannot reach the end position when retracting or extending and will reverse if possi‐
ble.
If extending or retracting of the active aerodynamic profile is blocked:
#
Ensure that the cause of the blockage has been removed.
#
Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.
#
Start the vehicle after a few minutes.
The active aerodynamic profile will move to the original position.
If the problem persists or the cause cannot be detected:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear Spoiler Control Sys-
tem Inoperative
*The rear wing cannot reach the end position during retraction and extends again if possible.
The vehicle's speed may be restricted.
If retraction of the rear wing is blocked, e.g. by ice:
#
Ensure that the cause of the blockage has been removed.
400
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.
#
Start the vehicle after a few minutes.
The rear wing will move to the initial position.
If the problem persists or the cause cannot be detected:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear Spoiler Inoperative
Limit ### mph
*The vehicle's speed is limited to the value displayed. Therefore, the rear wing cannot reach the end position during
extension and only extends as far as is possible.
If extension of the rear wing is blocked, e.g. by ice:
#
Ensure that the cause of the blockage has been removed.
#
Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.
#
Start the vehicle after a few minutes.
The rear wing will move to the initial position.
If the problem persists or the cause cannot be detected:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
C
*At least one door is open.
#
Close all doors.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
401
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
*The hood is open.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
#
Never unlatch the engine hood while driving.
#
Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Close the hood.
A
*The tailgate is open.
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#
Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
#
Never drive with the tailgate open.
#
Close the tailgate.
402
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
¥
Check Washer Fluid
*The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
#
Add washer fluid (/ page 293).
Lights
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Check Left Low
Beam (Example)
*The corresponding light source is faulty.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
%
LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the lamp have failed.
b
Malfunction See Opera-
tor’s Manual
*The exterior lighting is faulty.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
403
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Automatic Headlamp Mode
Inoperative
*The light sensor is faulty.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch On Headlamps
*You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
#
Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
b
Switch Off Lights
*You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
#
Turn the light switch to the à position.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 91).
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Now Available display message appears.
404
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Inoperative
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Camera View Restricted
See Operator's Manual
*The camera view is restricted. Possible causes are:
R
Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
R
Heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Clean the windshield.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Malfunctioning
*The hazard warning lamp switch is faulty.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the
ignition is switched on. Some indicator and
warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This
behavior is non-critical. These indicator and
warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they
light up or flash after the engine has been star‐
ted or during a journey.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
405
Instrument Display
Depending on the display setting, the positions
of the indicator lamps on the Instrument Display
may differ from the example shown.
Supersport setting
If you select the supersport display setting, the
positions of the indicator lamps on the Instru‐
ment Display will change.
Indicator and warning lamps:
L
Low beam (/ page 89)
T
Parking lamps (/ page 89)
K
High beam (/ page 90)
#!
Turn signal lights (/ page 90)
R
Rear fog light (/ page 89)
6
Restraint system (/ page 407)
ü
Seat belt not fastened (/ page 414)
$
USA: brakes (red) (/ page 407)
J
Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 407)
!
Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 407)
F
USA: electric parking brake applied
(red) (/ page 407)
!
Canada: electric parking brake
applied (red) (/ page 407)
!
ABS malfunction (/ page 407)
÷
ESP
®
(/ page 407)
å
ESP
®
OFF (/ page 407)
Æ
ESP
®
SPORT (/ page 407)
L
Distance warning (/ page 415)
Ù
Electric power steering malfunction
(/ page 420)
ä
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys‐
tem malfunction (/ page 415)
;
Check Engine (/ page 416)
#
Electrical malfunction (/ page 416)
8
Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca‐
tion indicator (/ page 416)
406
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
?
Coolant too hot/cold (/ page 416)
h
Tire pressure monitor (/ page 419)
Safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
ABS warning lamp
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*ABS is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
407
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
ESP
®
warning lamp flashes
The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
*At least one wheel and tire assembly has reached its grip limit (/ page 132).
#
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
÷
ESP
®
warning lamp lights
up
The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
408
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
å
ESP
®
OFF warning lamp
The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*
ESP
®
is deactivated.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP
®
deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivated, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The availability of further driving safety sys‐
tems is also limited.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Only deactivate ESP
®
for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated, ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
#
Have ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Observe the notes on deactivating ESP
®
(/ page 132).
Æ
ESP
®
SPORT warning lamp
ESP
®
SPORT is activated while the engine is running.
*
When ESP
®
SPORT is activated, ESP
®
will stabilize the vehicle only to a limited extent.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
SPORT is used incorrectly
When you activate ESP
®
SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
#
Activate ESP
®
SPORT only in the circumstances described below.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
409
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Observe the notes on activating ESP
®
SPORT(/ page 132).
$
Brake warning lamp (USA)
J
Brakes warning lamp (Can‐
ada)
The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*Possible causes are:
R
The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
R
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
#
Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
410
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
411
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F
Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (USA
only)
!
Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (Can‐
ada only)
!
Yellow electric parking
brake indicator lamp is mal‐
functioning
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking
brake malfunctions.
*
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
412
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
6
Restraint system warning
lamp
The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*The restraint system is faulty (/ page 30).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
413
Seat belts
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
7
Seat belt warning lamp
lights up
The red seat belt warning lamp will light up for six seconds once the engine has started.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
*The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
#
Fasten your seat belt (/ page 34).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
7
Seat belt warning lamp
flashes
The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
*The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
#
Fasten your seat belt(/ page 34).
*There are objects on the front passenger seat.
#
Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
414
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
L
Warning lamp for distance
warning function
The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
*The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
#
Be prepared to brake immediately.
#
Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 135).
ä
Suspension warning lamp
The yellow AMG adaptive sport suspension system warning lamp is lit.
*There is a malfunction in the AMG adaptive sport suspension system.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
415
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
;
Engine diagnosis warning
lamp
The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.
In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up.
#
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Electrical malfunction warn‐
ing lamp
The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit.
*There is a malfunction in the electrics.
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#
Refuel.
416
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while driving.
*There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak‐
ing.
#
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly:
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
?
Coolant warning lamp
The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*Possible causes are:
R
The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
R
The coolant level is too low
R
The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R
The radiator fan is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could
come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
417
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
or
#
Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
#
Check the coolant level (/ page 292).
#
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below the red area.
418
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Tires
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
h
Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights
up
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
*The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Observe the recommended tire pressure.
#
Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#
Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Check the tire pressure and the tires.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
419
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp
flashes
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains lit.
*The tire pressure monitoring system is defective.
&
WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss
in one or more of the tires.
Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics.
#
Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ù
Warning lamp for electric
power steering
The red warning lamp for electric power steering is lit while the engine is running.
*The power-assisted steering or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
420
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
421
1, 2, 3 ...
12 V battery
see Battery (vehicle)
A
A/C function
Switching on/off (control panel) ........... 99
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .............131
Acceleration
see Kickdown
Accident and breakdown manage‐
ment
Mercedes me connect .........................256
Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating ......................... 53
Activating/deactivating automatic
volume adjustment
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 285
Active Blind Spot Assist
Switching on/off ................................. 158
Active Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................... 135
Setting ................................................. 137
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 139
Calling up a speed ...............................141
Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 142
Function .............................................. 139
Increasing/decreasing speed ..............141
Requirements .......................................141
Steering wheel buttons ........................ 141
Storing a speed .................................... 141
Switching off/deactivating .................. 141
Switching on/activating ....................... 141
System limitations ...............................139
Active Service System PLUS
see ASSYST PLUS
Adaptive
see Lane Keeping Assist
Adaptive cruise control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Function ................................................ 91
Switching on/off ................................... 92
Additional value range
Setting display content ........................ 164
Additives .................................................. 356
Engine oil ............................................ 356
Fuel ..................................................... 355
Additives (engine oil)
see Additives
Additives (fuel)
see Fuel
Address book
see Contacts
Adjusting the balance
Burmester
®
high-end Surround
sound system ...................................... 286
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 285
Adjusting the bass, mid-range and
treble
Burmester
®
high-end Surround
sound system ...................................... 286
Adjusting the mid-range, treble and
bass
Burmester
®
high-end Surround
sound system ...................................... 286
422
Index
Adjusting the sound optimization
Burmester
®
high-end Surround
sound system ...................................... 286
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings
Burmester
®
high-end Surround
sound system ...................................... 286
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 285
After-sales service center
see ASSYST PLUS
Air bag
Reduced protection ...............................38
Air inlet
see Air-water duct
Air pressure
see Tire pressure
Air vents ................................................... 101
Adjusting (front) ................................... 101
Air vents
see Air vents
Air-recirculation mode ............................ 101
Air-water duct .......................................... 294
Keeping free ........................................294
Airbag .........................................................36
Activation .............................................. 30
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....36
Installation locations .............................36
Knee airbag ........................................... 36
Overview ............................................... 36
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....41
Protection ..............................................37
Side airbag ............................................ 36
Window curtain airbag ...........................36
Alarm
see Panic alarm
Alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Alternative route
see Route
AMG
Steering wheel control element ........... 146
Steering-wheel buttons ........................ 146
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys‐
tem
Selecting the suspension setting ......... 149
Suspension .......................................... 148
AMG ceramic high-performance com‐
posite brake system ................................ 108
AMG Performance adjustable exhaust
system ...................................................... 109
Function .............................................. 109
Operating ............................................ 109
AMG performance seat
Setting ................................................... 73
AMG Performance steering wheel .........146
AMG TRACK PACE
Configuring .......................................... 211
Drag Race ............................................ 210
General information ............................ 208
Telemetry display .................................211
Track Race ........................................... 209
Android Auto ............................................ 251
Connecting a mobile phone ................. 252
Ending ................................................. 252
Information .......................................... 252
Overview .............................................. 251
Sound settings .................................... 252
Transferred vehicle data ......................253
Animals
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 50
Index
423
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anti-theft protection
Immobilizer ............................................ 68
Anticipatory occupant protection
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
Apple CarPlay
®
........................................249
Connecting an iPhone
®
....................... 250
Ending ................................................. 251
Notes .................................................. 250
Overview ............................................. 249
Sound settings ..................................... 251
Transferred vehicle data ......................253
Ashtray
Front center console ............................. 85
Assistance
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 166
Assistance systems
see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 287
Battery disconnection periods .............288
Displaying the service due date ........... 287
Function/notes ................................... 287
Regular maintenance work .................. 287
Special service requirements .............. 287
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 68
Deactivating the alarm .......................... 69
Function ................................................ 68
ATTENTION ASSIST .......................... 154, 155
Function .............................................. 154
Setting ................................................. 155
System limitations ...............................154
Attention assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Audio mode
Activating media mode ........................ 267
Connecting USB devices ..................... 268
Copyrights ...........................................267
Information .......................................... 265
Inserting/removing an SD card ........... 267
Media search ....................................... 272
Overview ............................................. 268
Pause and playback function ...............269
Selecting a track ................................. 269
Selecting playback options .................. 269
Track list .............................................. 269
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights ........................... 90
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .......................................... 108
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/
stop function) .......................................... 108
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff ........................................... 39, 41
Function of the automatic front
passenger front airbag shutoff .............. 39
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....41
424
Index
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
Automatic mirror folding function
Activating/deactivating ......................... 98
Automatic transmission
Double-clutch function ......................... 117
Drive program display .......................... 115
Drive programs .................................... 113
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ..................... 113
E-SELECT selector lever ....................... 116
Engaging drive position ........................ 117
Engaging neutral .................................. 117
Engaging park position .........................117
Engaging reverse gear .......................... 116
Kickdown ............................................. 119
Manual gearshifting .............................118
Oil temperature (on-board computer,
Performance menu) ............................. 166
Steering wheel paddle shifters ............. 118
Transmission position display .............. 116
Transmission positions .........................116
B
BAS (Brake Assist System) .....................132
Battery
SmartKey ............................................... 54
Battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle) ...................................... 314
Charging .............................................. 313
Notes .................................................. 309
Notes (starting assistance and
charging) .............................................. 311
Replacing .............................................314
Starting assistance .............................. 313
Belt
see Seat belt
Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 157
Function .............................................. 157
Switching on/off ................................. 158
System limitations ...............................157
Bluetooth
®
............................................... 200
Activating/deactivating .......................200
Information .......................................... 199
Bluetooth
®
audio
Activating .............................................276
De-authorizing (de-registering) the
device .................................................. 277
Information .......................................... 274
Overview ............................................. 275
Searching for a track ........................... 277
Searching for and authorizing the
device .................................................. 275
Selecting a media player ......................276
Boost pressure (on-board computer,
Performance menu) ................................ 166
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Notes .................................................. 356
Brake force distribution
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 135
Brake system
ABS ...................................................... 111
Brake caliper ........................................ 112
Brake cooling ....................................... 112
Brake discs ...........................................111
Index
425
Brake fluid ............................................ 111
Brake hose ...........................................112
Brake line ............................................. 112
Brake pads ...........................................111
Notes ................................................... 111
Brakes
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 131
Active Brake Assist .............................. 135
AMG ceramic high-performance
composite brake system ......................108
BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 132
Driving tips .......................................... 105
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 135
HOLD function .....................................143
Limited braking effect (salt-treated
roads) .................................................. 105
New/replaced brakepads/brake
discs .................................................... 104
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 104
Braking assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown
Changing a wheel ................................ 345
Overview of the help functions .............. 14
Roadside Assistance .............................. 19
Tow-starting .........................................318
Towing away ......................................... 316
Transporting the vehicle ....................... 317
Breakdown
see Flat tire
Burmester
®
high-end Surround sound
system
Adjusting the balance .......................... 286
Adjusting the sound optimization ........ 286
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ............................................... 286
Automatic volume adjustment .............286
Calling up the sound menu .................. 285
Information .......................................... 285
Selecting the sound profile .................. 286
Burmester
®
surround sound system .....284
Adjusting the balance .......................... 285
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ............................................... 285
Automatic volume adjustment .............285
Calling up the sound menu .................. 284
Information .......................................... 284
Switching the surround sound on/off
.............................................................285
Buttons
Steering wheel .....................................162
C
Call list
Making a call ....................................... 247
Overview ............................................. 246
Calling up the sound menu
Burmester
®
high-end Surround
sound system ...................................... 285
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 284
Calls ..........................................................243
Accepting ............................................ 243
Activating functions during a call ......... 243
Calls with several participants .............243
Declining ............................................. 243
Ending a call ........................................ 243
Incoming call during an existing call .... 244
Making ................................................ 243
Mercedes me ...................................... 253
Camera
see Rear view camera
426
Index
Car key
see SmartKey
Car wash
see Care
Car wash (care) ....................................... 294
Care ..........................................................301
Air-water duct ...................................... 294
Automatic car wash ............................. 294
Carpet .................................................301
Decorative foil .....................................297
Display ................................................. 301
Exterior lighting ................................... 299
Headliner ............................................. 301
Matte finish ......................................... 296
Paintwork ............................................ 296
Plastic trim .......................................... 301
Power washer ...................................... 294
Real wood/trim elements .................... 301
Rear view camera ................................ 299
Rear wing (extendable) ........................ 299
Seat belt .............................................. 301
Seat cover ........................................... 301
Sensors ............................................... 299
Tailpipes .............................................. 299
Washing by hand ................................. 295
Wheels/rims ....................................... 299
Windows .............................................. 299
Wiper blades .......................................299
Cargo compartment cover
Extending/retracting .............................82
Carpet (Care) ............................................ 301
Change of address .....................................19
Change of ownership ................................ 19
Changing a wheel
Installing/removing plastic hub caps .. 345
Preparation .........................................345
Raising the vehicle .............................. 346
Changing gears ........................................ 118
Manually ..............................................118
Character entry
On the touchpad .................................. 197
Charging
Battery (vehicle) ...................................313
Child safety lock
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ............................................... 203
Child seat
Attaching (notes) ................................... 48
Basic instructions ..................................44
front-passenger seat (notes) ................. 49
Notes on risks and dangers ...................45
Securing on the front passenger seat ....50
Children
Avoiding dangers in the vehicle .............45
Basic instructions .................................. 44
Special seat belt retractor ..................... 48
Chock ....................................................... 344
Storage location ..................................344
Chock
see Chock
Cigarette lighter
Front center console ............................. 85
Cleaning
see Care
Climate control
Activating/deactivating ......................... 99
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (control panel) .........................99
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nization function (control panel) .......... 100
Index
427
Air distribution settings .......................100
Air-recirculation mode ......................... 101
Automatic control ................................ 100
Climate style function .......................... 100
Control panel for 3-zone automatic
climate control ...................................... 99
Filling capacity for PAG oil ...................359
Front air vents ..................................... 101
Note ...................................................... 99
Refrigerant .......................................... 358
Refrigerant filling capacity ...................359
Removing condensation from the
windows .............................................. 100
Setting the climate style ......................100
Ventilating the vehicle (convenience
opening) ................................................ 65
Climate style
Function .............................................. 100
Setting ................................................. 100
Cockpit .........................................................6
Overview .................................................6
Coffee cup symbol
see ATTENTION ASSIST
COMAND
see Multimedia system
COMAND Touch
Managing devices ................................ 202
Combination switch .................................. 90
Compass .................................................. 236
Computer
see On-board computer
Connection status
Displaying ............................................ 261
Overview .............................................. 261
Contacts ...................................................244
Calling up ............................................ 245
Deleting ...............................................246
Downloading (from mobile phone) ....... 244
Importing ............................................. 245
Importing (overview) ............................ 245
Information .......................................... 244
Making a call ....................................... 246
Name format .......................................245
Options ................................................ 246
Storing .................................................246
Controller
Operating ............................................. 191
Convenience closing feature .................... 65
Convenience opening ................................ 65
Cool down laps .........................................110
Coolant (engine)
Capacity .............................................. 358
Check level .......................................... 292
Notes ................................................... 357
Copyright
Licenses ................................................ 27
Trademarks ............................................ 27
Cruise control .......................................... 137
Buttons ................................................ 138
Calling up a speed ...............................138
Function .............................................. 137
Requirements: .....................................138
Selecting ............................................. 138
Setting a speed ................................... 138
Storing a speed ................................... 138
Switching off ....................................... 138
Switching on ........................................ 138
System limitations ...............................137
428
Index
Cup holder .................................................84
Installing/removing (center console) .... 84
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) .........23
Customer Relations Department .............23
D
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Data acquisition
Vehicle ................................................... 24
Data import/export ................................ 203
Function/notes ................................... 203
Importing/exporting ........................... 204
Data storage
Electronic control units .......................... 24
Online services ...................................... 26
Vehicle ................................................... 24
Date
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 198
Daytime running lamp mode
see Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights ............................. 93
Switching on/off ................................... 93
Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 69
Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declaration of conformity
Wireless vehicle components ................21
Decorative foil (cleaning instructions) .. 297
Definitions (tires and loading) ...............338
Designs
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 164
Destination .............................................. 228
Editing intermediate destinations ........ 218
Editing the previous destinations ........ 229
External ...............................................229
Saving (current vehicle position) ......... 228
Saving as global favorite ...................... 229
Storing a map position ........................ 228
Destination entry .....................................214
Entering 3 word addresses .................. 219
Entering a POI or address .................... 214
Entering an intermediate destination ...218
Entering geo-coordinates ..................... 219
Selecting a contact .............................. 218
Selecting a POI .................................... 216
Selecting from the map ....................... 220
Selecting previous destinations ...........216
Detecting inattentiveness
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection ............................21
Digital Operator's Manual .........................16
Digital speedometer ................................ 169
Dinghy towing
see Tow-bar system
Display
Care ..................................................... 301
Display (multimedia system)
Settings ...............................................198
Display (on-board computer)
Displays on the multifunction display .. 165
Display content
Setting the additional value range ....... 164
Index
429
Display message .....................................362
Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 362
Notes .................................................. 362
Display messages
¯ - - - mph .....................................382
ç - - - mph ...................................... 381
#12 V Battery See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 384
Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐
rently Limited See Operator's Man‐
ual .......................................................376
Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐
ted See Operator's Manual .................. 376
Active Distance Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....381
Active Distance Assist Inoperative ....... 381
Active Distance Assist Now Available
.............................................................382
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera
View Restricted See Operator's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 405
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....404
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera‐
tive ...................................................... 405
Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ............... 389
Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' ................... 388
éATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative ... 378
éATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
Break! .................................................. 378
bAutomatic Headlamp Mode
Inoperative .......................................... 404
Auxiliary Battery Malfunction .............. 390
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's Manual .................. 379
Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ............... 379
$Check Brake Fluid Level .............. 372
Check Brake Pads See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 372
+Check Coolant Level See Oper‐
ator's Manual ...................................... 383
5Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1
quart) .................................................. 387
bCheck Left Low Beam (Exam‐
ple) ...................................................... 403
hCheck Tires ................................. 392
¥Check Washer Fluid .................... 403
?Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off .................................... 383
Cruise Control Inoperative .................. 382
Cruise Control Off ............................... 382
!Currently Unavailable See Oper‐
ator's Manual ...................................... 363
÷Currently Unavailable See Oper‐
ator's Manual ...................................... 364
Decrease Speed .................................. 394
ÂDon't Forget Your Key .................. 397
Driver's Door Open & Transmission
Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away .. 388
Electronic Rear Axle Differential Lock
Currently Unavailable .......................... 399
430
Index
Electronic Rear Axle Differential Lock
Inoperative .......................................... 399
5Engine Oil Level Cannot Be
Measured ............................................ 388
5Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level .........387
6Front Left Malfunction Service
Required (example) .............................. 373
Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual ...............................374
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator's Manual ...............................375
8Fuel Level Low ............................ 386
8Gas Cap Loose ............................ 386
Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc‐
tioning .................................................405
!Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 364
÷Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 365
TInoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 366
GInoperative ..................................377
ÂInsert Key .................................... 396
ÂKey Not Detected (red display
message) .............................................396
ÂKey Not Detected (white dis‐
play message) .....................................396
6Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal‐
function Service Required (Example) ...374
äMalfunction Drive at Max. 50
mph ..................................................... 379
bMalfunction See Operator’s
Manual ................................................ 403
Mercedes me connect Services Limi‐
ted See Operator's Manual .................. 377
N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling
Away ................................................... 389
ÂObtain a New Key ........................ 395
çOff ...............................................381
ëOff ............................................... 380
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐
tionary .................................................389
FParking Brake See Operator's
Manual ................................................369
hPlease Correct Tire Pressure .......393
FPlease Release Parking Brake .....368
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐
tor's Manual .........................................376
RACE START Canceled ......................... 382
RACE START Not Possible See Oper‐
ator's Manual ...................................... 382
Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 377
ÙRear Axle Steering Currently
Unavailable .......................................... 399
ÙRear Axle Steering Malfunction
Service Required .................................399
Rear Spoiler Control System Inopera‐
tive ...................................................... 400
Index
431
Rear Spoiler Inoperative Limit ###
mph ..................................................... 401
ÂReplace Key Battery .................... 395
Reversing Not Possible Service
Required .............................................. 389
#See Operator's Manual ............... 385
Service Required Do Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer .......................................... 389
Ô Spoilers Extended Caution,
Reduced Ground Clearance .................400
6SRS Malfunction Service
Required .............................................. 373
ÙSteering Malfunction Increased
Physical Effort See Operator's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 398
ÙSteering Malfunction Stop
Immediately See Operator's Manual ... 398
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running
Wait Transmission Cooling .................. 390
#Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run‐
ning ..................................................... 386
#Stop Vehicle See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 385
çSuspended ..................................381
bSwitch Off Lights ......................... 404
bSwitch On Headlamps ................. 404
Tire Press. Monitor Currently
Unavailable .......................................... 391
Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ........... 392
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors .................................... 392
Tires Overheated ................................. 394
To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake
and Start Engine .................................. 388
To switch engine off, press and hold
Start/Stop button for at least 3
secs. or press 3 times. ........................ 384
Õ Traction Control Inoperative
See Operator's Manual ........................ 400
Traffic Sign Assist Camera View
Restricted See Operator's Manual ....... 380
Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐
able See Operator's Manual ................ 379
Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative .............380
dTrans. Oil Overheated Drive on
with Care .............................................391
Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 390
dTransmission Oil Cooling Mal‐
function ...............................................391
FTurn On the Ignition to Release
the Parking Brake ................................ 367
dVehicle Ready to Drive Switch
the Ignition Off Before Exiting .............. 397
hWarning Tire Malfunction ............ 394
hWheel Sensor(s) Missing .............392
Distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Distance recorder
see Trip distance
432
Index
DISTRONIC
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door
Locking (emergency key) .......................60
Opening (from the inside) ......................57
Unlocking (emergency key) ...................60
Unlocking (from the inside) ...................57
Door control panel .....................................12
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ... 334
Double-clutch function ............................ 117
Drag Race
Setting .................................................210
Drawbar
see Tow-bar system
Drinking and driving ................................ 105
Drinks holder
see Cup holder
Drive position
Engaging ..............................................117
Drive program display ............................. 115
Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
Driver's seat
see Seat
Driving lights
see Automatic driving lights
Driving safety system .............................130
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 131
Active Brake Assist .............................. 135
BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 132
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 135
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) ..... 132
Overview ..............................................131
Radar and ultrasonic sensors ...............131
Responsibility ...................................... 130
Driving system
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys‐
tem ...................................................... 148
Driving system
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
see ATTENTION ASSIST
see Blind Spot Assist
see Cruise control
see Driving safety system
see HOLD function
see Lane Keeping Assist
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
see Rear view camera
see Traffic Sign Assist
Driving tips
AMG ceramic high-performance
composite brake system ......................108
Drinking and driving ............................ 105
General driving tips .............................105
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 104
Drowsiness detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
DYNAMIC SELECT ..................................... 113
Configuring drive program I ................. 115
Displaying engine data .........................115
Displaying vehicle data ........................ 115
Drive program display .......................... 115
Drive programs .................................... 113
Function ............................................... 113
Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) .. 115
Selecting the drive program ................. 115
Showing operation feedback ................115
Index
433
E
E-SELECT selector lever ........................... 116
Engaging drive position ........................ 117
Engaging neutral .................................. 117
Engaging park position .........................117
Engaging park position automatically ...117
Engaging reverse gear .......................... 116
Function ............................................... 116
E10 ............................................................ 354
Easy entry feature
Function/notes .....................................78
Setting ................................................... 79
Easy exit feature
Function/notes .....................................78
Setting ................................................... 79
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion)
Function/notes ................................... 135
ECO start/stop function ......................... 108
Automatic engine start ........................ 108
Automatic engine stop .........................108
Method of operation ............................108
Switching off/on ................................. 109
Electric parking brake .............................128
Applying automatically ........................ 128
Applying or releasing manually ............ 130
Emergency braking .............................. 130
Releasing automatically .......................129
Emergency
Overview of the help functions .............. 14
Reflective safety vest .......................... 303
Emergency braking .................................130
Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency call system
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Emergency engine start .......................... 318
Emergency key
Locking a door ....................................... 60
Unlocking a door ...................................60
Emergency release
Tailgate .................................................. 63
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation .............................................. 30
Emotion Start
Starting the vehicle ............................. 103
Engine
ECO start/stop function ......................108
Engine number ..................................... 351
Starting (SmartKey) .............................104
Starting (start/stop button) ................ 103
Starting assistance .............................. 313
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 122
Engine data
Displaying ............................................ 115
Engine number .........................................351
Engine oil .................................................. 291
Additives .............................................356
Capacity .............................................. 356
Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick ............................................... 290
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ...............356
Notes ................................................... 113
Quality ................................................. 356
Temperature (on-board computer,
Performance menu) ............................. 166
Topping up ...........................................291
Entering characters ................................. 196
Function/notes ................................... 196
434
Index
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Activating/deactivating .......................134
ESP
®
SPORT ........................................ 132
Function/notes ................................... 132
Status display (on-board computer,
Performance menu) ............................. 166
ESP
®
SPORT
Function/notes ................................... 132
Exterior lighting
Care .................................................... 299
Exterior lighting
see Lights
Exterior mirrors ................................... 95, 96
Anti-glare mode (automatic) .................. 96
Automatic mirror folding function .......... 98
Folding in/out .......................................95
Operating the memory function ............ 79
Parking position .....................................97
Setting ................................................... 95
External device
Locking (child safety lock) ...................203
F
Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Favorites
Adding .................................................194
Calling up .............................................194
Deleting ...............................................195
Moving ................................................. 195
Overview ..............................................194
Renaming ............................................ 194
Flat tire .....................................................303
Changing a wheel ................................ 345
MOExtended tires ................................ 304
Notes .................................................. 303
TIREFIT kit ...........................................305
Flat towing
see Tow-bar system
Floor mats .................................................. 87
Foil covering
Radar and ultrasonic sensors ...............131
Free software .............................................27
Frequency band
Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 172
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .....36
Front and rear view camera ................... 152
Front camera
Function .............................................. 152
Front passenger seat
see Seat
Fuel ...........................................................355
Additives .............................................355
E10 ...................................................... 354
Fuel reserve ........................................ 355
Gasoline .............................................. 354
Quality (gasoline) ................................. 354
Refueling ............................................. 120
sulfur content ...................................... 354
Tank content ....................................... 355
Fuel consumption
On-board computer .............................169
Function seat
see Door control panel
Fuses ......................................................... 319
Before replacing a fuse ........................ 319
Fuse assignment diagram .................... 319
Fuse box in the cargo compartment ....320
Index
435
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐
well ...................................................... 319
Notes ................................................... 319
Fuses
see Fuses
G
G-meter (on-board computer, Per‐
formance menu) ...................................... 166
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ........................... 127
Opening or closing the door ................126
Programming buttons .......................... 123
Radio equipment approval numbers .... 127
Resolving problems ............................. 126
Synchronizing the rolling code .............125
Gas station search
Starting automatic search .................... 217
Switching automatic search on/off ..... 223
Using automatic search ....................... 223
Gasoline ................................................... 354
Gear display (on-board computer, Per‐
formance menu) ...................................... 166
Gearshift recommendation .....................119
Genuine parts ............................................ 17
Glide mode ............................................... 119
Glove box
Locking/unlocking ................................ 82
H
Handbrake
see Electric parking brake
Handling characteristics (unusual) ........321
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 62
Hazard warning lights ...............................91
Hazardous substances
Information ............................................ 20
Head restraint
Front (adjusting mechanically) ............... 74
Headliner (care) ....................................... 301
High beam
Switching on/off ................................... 90
High-beam flasher .....................................90
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist .....................91
Hill start assist ........................................ 143
HOLD function ......................................... 143
Function/notes ................................... 143
Switching on/off ................................. 144
Hood
Opening/closing ................................. 288
Hotspot
Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 201
I
Identification plate
Engine .................................................. 351
Refrigerant .......................................... 358
Vehicle .................................................351
Ignition
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 102
Ignition key
see SmartKey
Immobilizer ................................................ 68
Indicator lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
436
Index
Individual drive program
Configuring .......................................... 115
Selecting .............................................. 115
Inside rearview mirror
see Exterior mirrors
Inspection
see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster
see Instrument Display
Instrument cluster lighting .................... 165
Instrument Display .................................. 161
Adjusting the lighting ........................... 165
Function/notes .................................... 161
Instrument cluster ................................... 8
Setting the additional value range ....... 164
Warning/indicator lamps .................... 405
Intelligent Light System
Adaptive Highbeam Assist .....................91
Interior lighting .........................................93
Reading light .........................................93
Setting ................................................... 93
Switch-off delay time ............................. 93
Intermediate destination
Calculating a route with intermediate
destinations .........................................218
Entering ............................................... 218
Modifying ............................................. 218
Starting an automatic gas station
search .................................................. 217
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search .......................................... 223
Internet
Calling up a web page .........................262
Closing the browser ............................263
Deleting a bookmark ........................... 263
Deleting browser data .........................263
Managing bookmarks .......................... 263
Internet connection
Communication module function ........ 260
Connection status ...............................261
Displaying the connection status .........261
Establishing .........................................260
Information .......................................... 259
Restrictions ......................................... 259
Internet radio
Calling up ............................................ 264
Deleting stations .................................264
Logging out ......................................... 265
Overview ............................................. 264
Registering .......................................... 265
Saving stations .................................... 264
Selecting and connecting to a station
.............................................................264
Selecting stream .................................265
Setting options ....................................265
Terms of use ........................................265
iPhone
®
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
J
Jack
Storage location ..................................344
Jump-start connection ............................313
General notes ....................................... 311
K
KEYLESS-GO
Locking the vehicle ................................ 57
Problem .................................................59
Unlocking setting .................................. 53
Index
437
Unlocking the vehicle ............................57
Kickdown .................................................. 119
Using ....................................................119
Knee airbag ................................................ 36
L
Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling
Lamp
see Interior lighting
Lamps (Instrument Display)
see Warning/indicator lamps
Lane detection (automatic)
see Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist ........................ 158, 159
Function .............................................. 158
Sensitivity ............................................ 159
System limitations ...............................158
Language ................................................. 203
Notes .................................................. 203
Setting .................................................203
Light switch
Overview ............................................... 89
Lighting
see Interior lighting
see Lights
Lights .........................................................89
Adaptive Highbeam Assist .....................91
Adjusting the instrument lighting ......... 165
Automatic driving lights ......................... 90
Combination switch ...............................90
Hazard warning lights ............................ 91
High beam ............................................. 90
High-beam flasher .................................90
Light switch ........................................... 89
Low-beam headlamps ...........................89
Parking lights .........................................89
Rear fog lamp ........................................89
Responsibility for lighting systems ........ 89
Setting the exterior lighting switch-
off delay time ........................................93
Setting the surround lighting .................93
Standing lights ...................................... 89
Turn signals ...........................................90
Limited Warranty
Vehicle ................................................... 24
Live Traffic Information
Displaying subscription information .... 230
Displaying the traffic map ...................230
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 231
Extending a subscription ..................... 230
Issuing hazard alerts ........................... 232
Load index (tires) .................................... 336
Load-bearing capacity (tires) ................. 336
Loading
Definitions ...........................................338
Notes ..................................................... 80
Loading guidelines .................................... 80
Loading information table ......................329
Loads
Securing ................................................ 80
Locator lighting
see Surround lighting
Locking/unlocking
Activating/deactivating the auto‐
matic locking feature .............................59
Emergency key ...................................... 60
KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 57
Opening the tailgate .............................. 61
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside ............................................... 57
438
Index
Low-beam headlamps
Switching on/off ................................... 89
Lubricant additives
see Additives
Luggage
Securing ................................................ 80
Lumbar support
see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way) ...........................73
M
Maintenance
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 165
Vehicle ................................................... 19
Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Malfunction
Restraint system ................................... 30
Malfunction message
see Display message
Map .......................................... 230, 232, 233
Avoiding an area ..................................235
Avoiding an area (overview) .................234
Changing an area ................................ 235
Deleting an area .................................. 235
Displaying the compass ....................... 236
Displaying the map version .................234
Displaying the next intersecting
street ................................................... 234
Displaying the satellite map ................. 237
Displaying the traffic map ...................230
Displaying weather information ...........237
Map data ............................................. 236
Moving ................................................ 233
Overview ............................................. 232
Selecting POI symbols .........................233
Selecting text information ................... 234
Selecting the map orientation .............233
Setting the map scale .......................... 233
Setting the map scale automatically ....236
Updating .............................................235
Map and compass
Overview ............................................. 232
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ...... 296
Maximum load rating .............................. 335
Maximum permissible load
Calculation example ............................ 331
Determining ........................................ 330
Maximum speeds .................................... 361
Maximum tire pressure .......................... 335
Mechanical key
Inserting/removing ............................... 54
Media
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 172
Searching ............................................ 272
Media display
Notes ................................................... 190
Media Interface
Activating ............................................ 273
Information .......................................... 272
Overview ............................................. 273
Media mode
Activating ............................................ 267
Media playback
Operating (on-board computer) ........... 172
Media search
Starting ...............................................272
Media source
Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 172
Index
439
Memory function
Operating .............................................. 79
Outside mirrors — Calling up stored
settings .................................................79
Outside mirrors — Storing settings ........ 79
Seat — Calling up stored settings ..........79
Seat — Storing settings .......................... 79
Steering wheel — Calling up saved
settings .................................................79
Steering wheel — Saving settings ........... 79
Menu (on-board computer)
Assistance ........................................... 166
Designs ............................................... 164
Maintenance ........................................165
Media ..................................................172
Navigation ............................................ 171
Overview ............................................. 162
Performance ........................................166
Radio ...................................................172
Telephone ............................................ 173
Trip ...................................................... 169
Mercedes me calls
Arranging a service appointment ........ 255
Breakdown assistance call .................. 254
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center ................................................. 254
Making a call via the overhead con‐
trol panel ............................................. 253
MB Info call ......................................... 254
Transferred data ..................................255
Mercedes me connect
Accident and breakdown manage‐
ment .................................................... 256
Information .......................................... 256
Transferred data ..................................256
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up ............................................. 261
Using voice control .............................. 261
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐
tem ........................................................... 256
Automatic emergency call ................... 258
Information .......................................... 256
Information on data transfer ............... 259
Manual emergency call ........................ 258
Overview ............................................. 257
Mercedes-Benz Link ................................ 248
Connecting .......................................... 249
Ending ................................................. 249
Overview ............................................. 248
Using ................................................... 249
Message (multifunction display)
see Display message
Message memory .................................... 362
Messages
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 186
Messages
see Text messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
Mobile phone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
see Second telephone
see Telephone
Mobile phone voice recognition
Starting ...............................................243
Stopping ..............................................243
Model series
see Vehicle identification plate
440
Index
MOExtended tires ................................... 304
Multifunction display
Overview of displays ............................ 165
Multifunction steering wheel
Overview of buttons ............................ 162
Multifunction steering wheel
see Steering wheel
Multimedia system .................................. 189
Adjusts the volume .............................. 195
Central control elements .....................190
Configuring display settings ................198
Configuring drive program I ................. 115
Favorites ..............................................194
Overview ............................................. 189
Restoring the factory settings ............. 208
Switching the sound on/off ................. 195
Multimedia system
see Entering characters
see Touch Control
see Touchpad
N
Navigation
Calling up the Digital Operator's
Manual ................................................ 237
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 171
Showing/hiding the menu ...................213
Switching on ........................................ 213
Updating the map data ........................ 235
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 179
Navigation
see Destination
see Destination entry
see Map
see Route
see Route guidance
see Traffic information
Navigation announcements
Activating/deactivating .......................226
Adjusting the volume ...........................227
Repeating ............................................ 227
Switching audio fadeout on/off .......... 227
Navigation messages
On-board computer .............................. 171
Neutral
Engaging .............................................. 117
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .......104
O
Occupant safety
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 50
Occupant safety
see Airbag
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see Restraint system
see Seat belt
Odometer
see Total distance
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer ................................. 162
Assistance menu .................................166
Displaying the service due date ........... 287
Media menu ......................................... 172
Menu designs ...................................... 164
Index
441
Menu overview .................................... 162
Multifunction display ........................... 165
Navigation system menu ......................171
Operating ............................................ 162
Performance menu .............................. 166
Radio menu .........................................172
Service menu ...................................... 165
Telephone menu .................................. 173
Trip menu ............................................ 169
On-board diagnostics interface
see Diagnostics connection
Online services
Data storage .......................................... 26
Open-source software .............................. 27
Opening the tailgate using your foot
see HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Operating fluids
Additives (fuel) .................................... 355
Brake fluid ...........................................356
Coolant (engine) .................................. 357
Engine oil ............................................ 356
Fuel (gasoline) .....................................354
Notes .................................................. 353
Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 358
Windshield washer fluid ...................... 358
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity (wireless
vehicle components) .............................. 21
Information ............................................ 20
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ................................. 18
Operator's Manual (digital) ....................... 16
Overhead control panel
Overview ............................................... 10
P
Paint code ................................................ 351
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .........296
Panic alarm ................................................ 53
Activating/deactivating ......................... 53
Panoramic roof
Operating the roller sunblind .................68
Park position
Engaging .............................................. 117
Selecting automatically ........................ 117
Parking
see Electric parking brake
Parking aid
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. 149
Activating .............................................151
Adjusting warning tones ...................... 152
Function .............................................. 149
Switching off ........................................ 151
System limitations ...............................149
Parking brake
see Electric parking brake
Parking for an extended period .............. 130
Parking lights ............................................ 89
Parking position
Exterior mirrors ..................................... 97
Storing the position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using
reverse gear ...........................................97
Partition net
Attaching ...............................................83
442
Index
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
Payload
Calculation example ............................ 331
Determining the maximum .................. 330
Performance (on-board computer,
Performance menu) ................................ 166
Permitted towing methods .....................315
Personalization
see User profile
Pets in the vehicle .....................................50
Phone book
see Contacts
Picture formats
see Video mode
Picture settings
see Video mode
PIN protection
Activating/deactivating .......................204
Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 301
Playback options
Selecting ............................................. 269
POI
Selecting .............................................. 216
POI symbols
Selecting ............................................. 233
Power output (on-board computer,
Performance menu) ................................ 166
Power supply
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 102
Power washer (care) ...............................294
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection) .................................................43
Function ................................................ 43
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound ................................. 43
Reversing measures .............................. 44
Preventative occupant protection sys‐
tem
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
Previous destinations
Selecting .............................................. 216
Protecting the environment
Notes ..................................................... 17
Protection against theft
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Q
QR code
Rescue card ...........................................24
Qualified specialist workshop ................. 22
R
RACE START
Activating ............................................ 145
Activation conditions ........................... 145
Function .............................................. 145
RACETIMER (on-board computer, Per‐
formance menu) ...................................... 168
Racetrack operation
Information .......................................... 110
Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Damage ............................................... 131
Index
443
Radio
Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 280
Calling up the station list .....................279
Deleting channels ................................ 279
Direct frequency entry ........................ 279
Displaying information .........................280
Displaying radio text ............................ 280
Editing station presets .........................279
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 172
Moving stations ...................................279
Overview ............................................. 278
Searching for stations .........................279
Setting a channel ................................ 279
Setting the waveband .......................... 279
Storing radio stations .......................... 279
Switching on ........................................ 277
Switching the HD radio function
on/off .................................................279
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 183
Radio stations
Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 172
Range
Displaying ............................................ 169
Reading light
see Interior lighting
Real wood (Care) .....................................301
Rear axle steering ...................................107
Rear fender
Retracting/extending .......................... 147
Rear fog lamp
Switching on/off ...................................90
Rear spoiler
see Rear wing
Rear view camera ....................................152
Care .................................................... 299
Function .............................................. 152
Switching automatic mode on/off ....... 154
Rear wing ................................................. 147
Care .................................................... 299
Function/notes .................................... 147
Setting ................................................. 148
Reflective safety vest ............................. 303
Refrigerant (air conditioning system)
Notes .................................................. 358
Refueling
Refueling the vehicle ........................... 120
Reporting malfunctions relevant to
safety .......................................................... 23
Rescue card ............................................... 24
Reserve
Fuel ..................................................... 355
Reset function (multimedia system) .....208
Restoring (factory settings)
see Reset function (multimedia system)
Restraint system .......................................29
Basic instructions for children ...............44
Function in an accident .........................30
Functionality .......................................... 30
Malfunction ........................................... 30
Protection ..............................................29
Reduced protection ...............................29
Self-test ................................................. 30
Warning lamp ........................................ 30
Reverse gear
Engaging .............................................. 116
Rims (Care) .............................................. 299
Roadside Assistance ................................. 19
444
Index
Rocking free .............................................118
Roll away protection
see HOLD function
Roller sunblind
Panoramic roof ...................................... 68
Route ................................................ 221, 223
Calculating ...........................................221
Displaying destination information ...... 223
Planning ...............................................218
Selecting a type ................................... 221
Selecting an alternative route .............223
Selecting notifications ......................... 222
Selecting options ................................ 222
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search .......................................... 223
Switching the automatic gas station
search on/off ...................................... 223
Using automatic gas station search .... 223
With intermediate destinations ............ 218
Route guidance ........................................ 224
Canceling ............................................ 227
Changing direction .............................. 225
Destination reached ............................ 226
From an off-road location .................... 228
Lane recommendations ....................... 225
Notes ................................................... 224
Off-road ............................................... 228
To an off-road destination ...................227
Run-flat characteristics
MOExtended tires ................................ 304
S
Safety systems
see Driving safety system
Satellite map ............................................ 237
Satellite radio
Activating/deactivating TuneStart ....... 283
Adding a channel to Smart Favorites ... 283
Deleting a channel ...............................282
Displaying EPG information .................282
Displaying service information ............ 283
Information .......................................... 280
Information about Smart Favorites
and TuneStart ...................................... 283
Logging in ............................................ 280
Moving a channel ................................ 282
Music and sport alerts function .......... 282
Overview .............................................. 281
Pause and playback function ...............283
Restrictions ......................................... 280
Selecting a category ............................ 281
Selecting a channel .............................282
Setting music and sport alerts ............ 282
Setting the parental control ................. 282
Storing a channel ................................ 282
Switching on .......................................280
SD card
Inserting/removing .............................267
Seat ............................................................ 70
4-way lumbar support ............................ 73
Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 72
Correct driver's seat position ................ 70
Operating the memory function ............ 79
Setting ................................................... 70
Setting options ...................................... 12
Seat belt ..................................................... 31
Care .....................................................301
Fastening ............................................... 34
Protection ..............................................31
Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating ......................... 35
Function ................................................ 35
Index
445
Seat belt warning
see Seat belts
Seat belts ...................................................35
Activating/deactivating seat belt
adjustment ............................................ 35
Reduced protection ...............................32
Releasing ...............................................35
Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 35
Warning lamp ........................................ 35
Seat cover (Care) .....................................301
Seat heating
Activating/deactivating ......................... 75
Seat ventilation
Switching on/off ................................... 76
Second telephone .................................... 241
Connecting .......................................... 241
Features ...............................................241
Selecting a gear
see Changing gears
Selecting the sound profile
Burmester
®
high-end Surround
sound system ...................................... 286
Selector lever
see E-SELECT selector lever
Self-test
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff ............................................ 41
Sensors (Care) ......................................... 299
Service center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service interval display
see ASSYST PLUS
Service station search
Starting automatic search ................... 223
Setting a speed
see Cruise control
Setting summer time .............................. 199
Setting the date format .......................... 199
Setting the distance unit ........................ 203
Setting the map scale
see Map
SETUP (on-board computer, Perform‐
ance menu) .............................................. 166
Shift paddles
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Shifting gears
Gearshift recommendation .................. 119
Short messages
see Text messages
Side airbag .................................................36
Side windows ............................................. 64
Closing .................................................. 64
Closing using the SmartKey ................... 65
Convenience closing feature .................65
Convenience opening ............................ 65
Opening ................................................. 64
Opening with the SmartKey ................... 65
Problem ................................................. 66
Size designation (tires) ........................... 336
SmartKey ................................................... 52
Acoustic locking verification signal ....... 53
Battery .................................................. 54
Energy consumption .............................. 53
Features ................................................ 52
Key ring attachment .............................. 54
Mechanical key ...................................... 54
Overview ............................................... 52
446
Index
Panic alarm ........................................... 53
Problem ................................................. 56
Starting the vehicle ............................. 104
Unlocking setting .................................. 53
SmartKey functions
Deactivating .......................................... 53
Smartphone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
see Telephone
Snow chains ............................................ 322
Socket (12 V)
Armrest ................................................. 86
Cargo compartment .............................. 86
Software update ...................................... 206
Important system updates ...................207
Information .......................................... 206
Performing .......................................... 207
Sound
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound ................................. 43
Wheels and tires ..................................321
Sound
see Burmester
®
surround sound system
see Sound settings
Sound settings ........................................284
Adjusting the balance .......................... 284
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ............................................... 284
Automatic volume adjustment .............284
Calls up the sound menu ..................... 284
Information .......................................... 284
Special seat belt retractor ........................48
Specialist workshop ..................................22
Speech dialog system
see Voice Control System
Speed index (tires) ..................................336
Speedometer
Digital .................................................. 169
Sports exhaust
see AMG Performance adjustable
exhaust system
Standard
see Lane Keeping Assist
Standing lights .......................................... 89
Start/Stop button
Emotion Start ...................................... 103
Parking the vehicle .............................. 122
Starting the vehicle ............................. 103
Switching on the power supply or
ignition ................................................ 102
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting
see Vehicle
Starting assistance
see Jump-start connection
Starting-off aid
see Hill start assist
Station
Deleting ............................................... 279
Direct frequency entry ........................ 279
Moving ................................................ 279
Searching ............................................ 279
Setting ................................................. 279
Storing .................................................279
Station list
Calling up ............................................ 279
Index
447
Station presets
Editing ................................................. 279
Modifying ............................................ 279
Steering wheel .........................................162
Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 77
Adjusting (manually) .............................. 76
Buttons ................................................ 162
Operating the memory function ............ 79
Steering wheel paddle shifters ............... 118
Stowage areas
see Stowage compartment
Stowage compartment .............................. 81
Armrest .................................................. 81
Center console ...................................... 81
Door ...................................................... 81
Glove box ...............................................81
Stowage compartments
see Stowage compartment
Sulfur content .........................................354
Sun visor
Operating ..............................................98
Surround lighting ...................................... 93
Setting ................................................... 93
Suspension
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys‐
tem ...................................................... 148
Components ........................................ 113
Measurements .....................................113
Selecting the suspension setting ......... 149
Settings ................................................ 113
Switch-off delay time
Exterior .................................................. 93
Interior .................................................. 93
Switching the surround sound on/off
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 285
Synchronization function
Switching on/off (control panel) .........100
System settings
Activating/deactivating PIN protec‐
tion ...................................................... 204
Reset function (multimedia system) ....208
Setting the distance unit ..................... 203
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 198
Setting the time zone .......................... 199
Setting the time/date format .............. 199
System settings
see Bluetooth
®
see Data import/export
see Language
see Software update
see Wi-Fi
T
Tailgate .......................................................61
Closing .................................................. 62
Emergency release ................................ 63
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ...........................62
Opening .................................................61
Opening dimensions ............................359
Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 299
Tank content
Fuel ..................................................... 355
Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 355
Technical data
Information .......................................... 351
Vehicle identification plate .................. 351
Telemetry display
Calling up .............................................211
448
Index
Telephone .........................................173, 239
Activating functions during a call ......... 243
Call and ringtone volume .....................243
Calls with several participants .............243
Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐
key) ...................................................... 240
Connecting a mobile phone (Secure
Simple Pairing) .................................... 240
De-authorizing a mobile phone ............ 242
Disconnecting a mobile phone ............ 242
Importing contacts .............................. 245
Importing contacts (overview) .............245
Incoming call during an existing call .... 244
Information .......................................... 240
Interchanging mobile phones ...............241
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 173
Mobile phone voice recognition ........... 243
Notes ................................................... 237
Operating modes ................................. 240
Reception and transmission volume .... 243
Telephone menu overview ...................239
Telephone operation ............................ 243
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 183
Telephone number
Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 173
Telephony operating modes
Bluetooth
®
Telephony .......................... 240
Telephony operating modes
see Second telephone
Temperature
Engine oil (on-board computer, Per‐
formance menu) .................................. 166
Transmission oil (on-board computer,
Performance menu) ............................. 166
Temperature grade .................................. 333
Text messages ......................................... 247
Calling a message sender .................... 248
Changing folders .................................248
Composing .......................................... 247
Configuring the displayed text mes‐
sages ................................................... 247
Deleting ...............................................248
Drafts ..................................................248
Notes ................................................... 247
Options ................................................ 248
Outbox .................................................248
Read-aloud function .............................247
Reading ...............................................247
Replying ...............................................248
Sending ............................................... 247
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 186
Time
Manual time setting ............................. 199
Setting summer time ........................... 199
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 198
Setting the time zone .......................... 199
Setting the time/date format .............. 199
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ............334
Tire and Loading Information placard ... 329
Tire characteristics ................................. 336
Tire inflation compressor
see TIREFIT kit
Tire information table .............................329
Tire labeling .............................................333
Characteristics .................................... 336
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................334
Load index ...........................................336
Index
449
Load-bearing capacity ......................... 336
Maximum tire load .............................. 335
Maximum tire pressure ....................... 335
Overview ............................................. 333
Speed rating ........................................ 336
Temperature grade .............................. 333
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 333
Tire size designation ............................336
Traction grade .....................................333
Tread wear grade .................................333
Tire load (maximum) ...............................335
Tire pressure ................................... 324, 325
Checking (manually) ............................ 325
Checking (tire pressure monitoring
system) ................................................ 327
Maximum ............................................ 335
Notes .................................................. 322
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................328
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 326
Tire pressure table ...............................324
TIREFIT kit ...........................................305
Tire pressure monitor ............................. 328
Restarting ............................................ 328
Tire pressure monitoring system
Checking the tire pressure .................. 327
Function .............................................. 326
Tire pressure table .................................. 324
Tire Quality Grading ................................ 333
Tire temperature
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 326
Tire tread .................................................. 321
Tire-change tool kit
Overview .............................................344
TIREFIT kit ................................................ 305
Storage location ..................................305
Using ................................................... 305
Tires
Characteristics .................................... 336
Checking .............................................321
Checking the tire pressure (man‐
ually) ................................................... 325
Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
sure monitoring system) ......................327
Definitions ........................................... 338
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................334
Flat tire ................................................ 303
Installing .............................................. 349
Load index ...........................................336
Load-bearing capacity .........................336
Maximum tire load .............................. 335
Maximum tire pressure ....................... 335
MOExtended tires ................................ 304
Noise ................................................... 321
Notes ................................................... 112
Notes on installing ...............................341
Overview of tire labeling ......................333
Removing ............................................ 348
Replacing .....................................341 , 345
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................328
Rotating ............................................... 343
Selection .............................................341
Snow chains ........................................ 322
Speed rating ........................................ 336
Storing ................................................ 344
Temperature grade .............................. 333
Tire and Loading Information placard
.............................................................329
Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 322
450
Index
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 326
Tire pressure table ...............................324
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 333
Tire size designation ............................336
TIREFIT kit ...........................................305
Traction grade .....................................333
Tread wear grade .................................333
Unusual handling characteristics .........321
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit
Torque (on-board computer, Perform‐
ance menu) .............................................. 166
Total distance .......................................... 169
Displaying ............................................ 169
Touch Control ...........................................191
On-board computer ............................. 162
Operating ............................................. 191
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 191
Touchpad .................................................. 192
Activating/deactivating haptic oper‐
ation feedback .....................................193
Operating ............................................ 192
Reading the handwriting recognition
aloud ................................................... 193
Selecting a station and track ...............193
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 193
Tow-bar system .......................................160
Tow-starting ............................................. 318
Towing away ............................................. 316
Towing eye
Installing .............................................. 318
Storage location ................................... 318
Towing methods .......................................315
Track
Selecting (audio mode) ....................... 269
Track Race
Setting .................................................209
Traction grade ......................................... 333
Traffic information .................................. 229
Displaying the traffic map ...................230
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 231
Extending a Live Traffic Information
subscription ........................................ 230
Issuing hazard warnings ...................... 232
Live Traffic Information ....................... 230
Overview ............................................. 229
Traffic map
see Map
Traffic Sign Assist ...................................156
Function/notes ................................... 156
Setting ................................................. 157
System limitations ...............................156
Transferred vehicle data
Android Auto ....................................... 253
Apple CarPlay
®
.................................... 253
Transmission position display ................ 116
Transporting
Vehicle .................................................317
Tread wear grade ..................................... 333
Trim element (Care) .................................301
Trip
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 169
Trip computer
Displaying ............................................ 169
Resetting ............................................. 170
Trip distance ............................................ 169
Displaying ............................................ 169
Index
451
Resetting ............................................. 170
Trip odometer
see Trip distance
Trunk lid
see Tailgate
Turn signal indicator
see Turn signals
Turn signals ............................................... 90
Switching on/off ................................... 90
U
Units of measurement
Setting .................................................203
Unlocking setting ...................................... 53
USB devices
Connecting .......................................... 268
User profile .............................................. 205
Creating .............................................. 205
Importing/exporting ...........................205
Options ................................................ 206
Setting ................................................. 205
Using the telephone
see Calls
V
Vehicle ...................................................... 104
Correct use ........................................... 23
Data acquisition ..................................... 24
Data storage .......................................... 24
Diagnostics connection .........................21
Equipment ............................................. 18
Limited Warranty ...................................24
Load on assemblies ............................. 110
Locking (automatically) ......................... 59
Locking (from the inside) ....................... 57
Locking (KEYLESS-GO) ..........................57
Locking/unlocking (emergency key) .....60
Lowering ............................................. 350
Maintenance .......................................... 19
Parking for an extended period ............ 130
Problem notification .............................. 23
QR code rescue card ............................. 24
Qualified specialist workshop ................22
Raising ................................................ 346
Rocking free .........................................118
Starting (Emotion Start) ...................... 103
Starting (SmartKey) .............................104
Starting (start/stop button) ................ 103
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 122
Towing .................................................160
Unlocking (from the inside) ...................57
Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................57
Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 65
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 187
Vehicle data
Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) .............115
Maximum speeds ................................. 361
Transferring to Android Auto ............... 253
Transferring to Apple CarPlay
®
............ 253
Turning radius ...................................... 359
Vehicle height ...................................... 359
Vehicle length ...................................... 359
Vehicle width ....................................... 359
Weights ................................................ 361
Wheelbase ...........................................359
Vehicle data storage
Event data recorders .............................26
Multimedia system/Mercedes me
connect .................................................26
Vehicle dimensions ................................. 359
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
452
Index
Vehicle identification plate ..................... 351
Paint code ............................................ 351
VIN ...................................................... 351
Vehicle key
see SmartKey
Vehicle maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation
Outside the USA or Canada ...................19
Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 305
TIREFIT kit ...........................................305
Towing eye ...........................................318
Ventilating
Convenience opening ............................ 65
Vents
see Air vents
Video mode .............................................. 272
Activating ............................................ 269
Activating/deactivating full-screen
mode ................................................... 271
Overview ..............................................271
Settings ............................................... 272
VIN ............................................................ 351
Identification plate ............................... 351
Seat ..................................................... 351
Windshield ........................................... 351
Vision
Removing condensation from the
windows .............................................. 100
Voice command types (Voice Control
System) .................................................... 177
Voice Control System .............................. 176
Application specific voice commands
.............................................................177
Audible help functions .........................177
Global voice commands .......................177
Improving speech quality .....................177
Language setting ................................. 177
Media player voice commands ............ 185
Message voice commands .................. 186
Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐
ing) ...................................................... 176
Navigation voice commands ................ 179
Operable functions .............................. 177
Operating safety .................................. 175
Radio voice commands ........................ 183
Switch voice commands ...................... 178
Telephone voice controls .....................183
Text message voice commands ...........186
Types of voice commands .................... 177
Vehicle voice commands .....................187
Voice prompting ...................................176
Voice control system
see Voice Control System
W
Warm-up (on-board computer, Per‐
formance menu) ...................................... 166
Warning lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Warning/indicator lamp
!ABS warning lamp .......................407
$Brake warning lamp (USA) ...........410
JBrakes warning lamp (Canada) .... 410
?Coolant warning lamp .................. 417
#Electrical malfunction warning
lamp .....................................................416
Index
453
;Engine diagnosis warning lamp .... 416
åESP
®
OFF warning lamp .............. 409
ÆESP
®
SPORT warning lamp .........409
÷ESP
®
warning lamp flashes .........408
÷ESP
®
warning lamp lights up .......408
8Fuel reserve warning lamp ...416, 417
!Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (Canada only) .... 412
FRed indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (USA only) .........412
6Restraint system warning lamp .... 413
7Seat belt warning lamp flashes .... 414
7Seat belt warning lamp lights
up ........................................................ 414
äSuspension warning lamp ............ 415
hTire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem warning lamp flashes ...................420
hTire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem warning lamp lights up .................. 419
LWarning lamp for distance
warning function .................................. 415
ÙWarning lamp for electric power
steering ............................................... 420
!Yellow electric parking brake
indicator lamp is malfunctioning .......... 412
Warning/indicator lamps .......................405
Overview ............................................. 405
PASSENGER AIR BAG .............................41
Warranty ..................................................... 24
Washer fluid
see Windshield washer fluid
Washing by hand (care) .......................... 295
Water tank
see Air-water duct
Wear
Brake discs ...........................................111
Brake pads ........................................... 111
Wheel bolts .......................................... 112
Weather information ............................... 237
Web browser
Calling up a web page .........................262
Calling up options ............................... 263
Calling up the settings .........................263
Deleting a bookmark ........................... 263
Deleting browser data .........................263
Ending ................................................. 263
Managing bookmarks .......................... 263
Overview ............................................. 262
Showing/hiding the menu ...................262
Website
Calling up ............................................ 262
Showing/hiding the web browser
menu ................................................... 262
Wheel change
Lowering the vehicle ........................... 350
Mounting a new wheel ........................ 349
Removing a wheel ...............................348
Wheel rotation .........................................343
Wheels
Care .................................................... 299
Checking ............................................. 321
Checking the tire pressure (man‐
ually) ................................................... 325
454
Index
Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
sure monitoring system) ......................327
Definitions ........................................... 338
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................334
Flat tire ................................................ 303
Installing .............................................. 349
Load index ...........................................336
Load-bearing capacity ......................... 336
Maximum tire load .............................. 335
Maximum tire pressure ....................... 335
MOExtended tires ................................ 304
Noise ...................................................321
Notes ................................................... 112
Notes on installing ...............................341
Overview of tire labeling ......................333
Removing ............................................ 348
Replacing .....................................341 , 345
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................328
Rotating ............................................... 343
Selection .............................................341
Snow chains ........................................ 322
Speed rating ........................................ 336
Storing ................................................ 344
Temperature grade .............................. 333
Tire and Loading Information placard
.............................................................329
Tire characteristics .............................. 336
Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 322
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 326
Tire pressure table ...............................324
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 333
Tire size designation ............................336
TIREFIT kit ...........................................305
Traction grade .....................................333
Tread wear grade .................................333
Unusual handling characteristics .........321
Wi-Fi .........................................................200
Overview ............................................. 200
Setting ................................................. 200
Setting up a hotspot ............................ 201
Window curtain airbag ............................. 36
Windows
see Side windows
Windows (Care) .......................................299
Windshield .................................................94
Replacing the wiper blades .................... 94
Windshield
see Windshield
Windshield washer fluid .........................358
Notes .................................................. 358
Windshield washer system
Topping up ...........................................293
Windshield wipers
Activating/deactivating ......................... 94
Replacing the wiper blades .................... 94
Winter operation
Snow chains ........................................ 322
Wiper blades
Care .................................................... 299
Replacing ...............................................94
Wireless vehicle components
Declaration of conformity ...................... 21
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Index
455
… 447 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Mercedes AMG GT 2020 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Mercedes AMG GT 2020 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 38,36 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info